Handbook for Palm™ Tungsten™ W Handhelds

Handbook for Palm™ Tungsten™ W Handhelds
Handbook for
Palm™ Tungsten™ W
Handhelds
Copyright
© 2003 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Graffiti, HotSync, MultiMail, PalmModem, PalmSource, the Palm
logo, and Palm OS are registered trademarks of Palm, Inc. The HotSync logo, Palm, Palm Powered,
Tungsten, and VersaMail are trademarks of Palm, Inc. CIC and Jot are registered trademarks of Computer
Intelligence Corporation. All other brands are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability
Palm, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide.
Palm, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the use
of this software. Palm, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as
a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on
other media to protect against data loss.
IMPORTANT Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the
accompanying software program(s). Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the
End User Software License Agreement.
Software Download Available
Palm™ Desktop software is supplied on a CD-ROM disc. If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive for
your computer, you can download the Palm Desktop software from www.palm.com.
PN: 407-5702A
Contents
About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1: Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Minimum requirements: Windows computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Minimum requirements: Mac computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wireless service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Making a call in a medical or safety emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Software Download Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Compatibility of third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Chapter 2: Exploring Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Locating handheld components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Locating front panel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using the indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Locating back panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Adding an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 3: Navigating and Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using the navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Typing capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Accessing international and special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Using the Function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using elements of the handheld interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using Graffiti® 2 writing to enter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Learning Graffiti 2 concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Graffiti 2 tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Graffiti 2 alphabet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
iii
Contents
Capital letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Graffiti 2 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Punctuation marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Accented characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Symbols and other special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Graffiti 2 Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Beaming data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using your computer keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Importing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Importing data from a Windows computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Importing data from a Mac computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Chapter 4: Working with Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Other ways to open applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Opening expansion card applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Switching between applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Categorizing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Changing the Applications Launcher display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Copying applications to or from an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Choosing application preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Performing common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Creating records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Editing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Purging records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Categorizing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Sorting lists of records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Attaching notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Choosing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Receiving alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Hiding or masking private records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
iv
Contents
Installing and removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Installing add-on applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Removing Palm Desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 5: Using Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Creating an Address Book entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Selecting types of phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Changing Address Entry details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Making connections from Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Quick Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Tap-to-Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Address Book menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Record menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Chapter 6: Using Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Performing calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Viewing recent calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using Calculator menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 7: Using Card Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reviewing Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Renaming a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Formatting a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Managing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Using the Card Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Chapter 8: Using Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Scheduling an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Rescheduling an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting an alarm for an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Scheduling repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Changing repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Considerations for repeating or continuous events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing the Date Book view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Working in Week view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Working in Month view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Working in Agenda view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
v
Contents
Spotting event conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Date Book menus, preferences, and display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Chapter 9: Using Expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Adding expense items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Changing the date of an Expense item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Entering receipt details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Customizing the Currency pick list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Changing the default currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Defining a custom currency symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setting Show Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Working with Expense data on your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Displaying the euro on your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Printing the euro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Using Expense menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Chapter 10: Using Memo Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Reviewing memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using Memo Pad menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Record menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Chapter 11: Using Palm™ Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Using your hands-free headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Opening Palm Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Answering a phone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Dialing a number from the keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Redialing the most recently dialed number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Dialing a number from a SIM phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Managing a phone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Answering call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using conference calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Creating a conference call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Managing a conference call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Transferring a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
vi
Contents
Retrieving voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using speed dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Creating a speed-dial entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Dialing a speed-dial entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Editing a speed-dial entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Using the Call History list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Dialing a number from the Call History list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using redial reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Creating a redial reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Managing redial reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Managing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Managing ring tunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Using Palm Mobile menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Mobile menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Chapter 12: Using Note Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Creating a note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Reviewing notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Changing Note Pad color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Setting an alarm for a note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Using Note Pad menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Options menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Chapter 13: Using SIM Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Accessing a service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Using the SIM Services menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Chapter 14: Using SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Creating messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Sending and receiving messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Viewing messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Working with draft messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Adding a signature to a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Sending data from another application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Setting preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
vii
Contents
Using SMS menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Message menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Chapter 15: Using To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating list items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Checking off a To Do List item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Changing To Do List item details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Setting a due date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Setting To Do Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Using To Do List menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Record menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Chapter 16: Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software . . . . . 167
VersaMail™ application features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Getting started with the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Synchronizing an existing username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Upgrading a MultiMail/VersaMail database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Account and connection types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Network e-mail account prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Creating a network e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Creating a synchronize-only account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Editing e-mail accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Deleting an e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Selecting a different service for a given e-mail account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Troubleshooting account access problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Getting e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Auto get mail with notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Creating and editing mail folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Creating and sending new e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Working with URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Working with attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Deleting messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Emptying the trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Marking messages as read or unread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
viii
Contents
Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Adding or updating an Address Book entry directly from a message . . 250
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configuring an account in HotSync Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Setting synchronization options and account settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Converting attached files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Synchronizing an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Going beyond the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Managing mail filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Managing mail settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Adding APOP to an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Adding ESMTP to an account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Setting advanced account preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in
other applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Using the command bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Changing e-mail header details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Backing up mail databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Wireless IMAP folder synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Five-way navigation in the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Keyboard shortcuts in the VersaMail application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Chapter 17: Using Palm™ WAP Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Opening Palm WAP Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Opening a WAP site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Browsing a WAP site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Browsing secure WAP sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Using bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Adding a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Visiting a bookmarked WAP site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Editing a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Deleting a bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Using your Push Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using advanced features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Changing gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Setting advanced options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Using cache memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Selecting an Access Point Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Selecting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
ix
Contents
Using the security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Creating password and signature key pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Changing your password or signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Viewing the public key and the signed key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Storing certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Viewing certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Using Palm WAP Browser menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Go menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Chapter 18: Using World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Setting the primary location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Choosing a different primary location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Setting the secondary locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Adding a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Modifying a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Removing a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Setting an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Using World Clock menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Chapter 19: Performing HotSync® Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Selecting HotSync setup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Customizing HotSync application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Performing a cradle/cable HotSync operation: Windows computer . . . 330
Performing a direct HotSync operation: Mac computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Conducting IR HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Preparing your computer for infrared communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Performing an IR HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Returning to cradle/cable HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Conducting HotSync operations using an attached modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Preparing your computer for a modem HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Preparing your handheld for a modem HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Selecting the conduits for a modem HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Performing a HotSync operation using an attached modem . . . . . . . . . . 342
Conducting network HotSync operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Connecting to your company’s dial-in server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Performing a network HotSync operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Using File Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
x
Contents
Creating a user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Performing the first HotSync operation with a user profile . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Chapter 20: Setting Preferences for Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Viewing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Buttons preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Connection preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Creating and editing GPRS connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Creating and editing GSM connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
IR to PC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Date and Time preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Digitizer preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Formats preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Country default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Time, date, week start, and numbers formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Keyboard preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Remapping keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Mobile preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Turning the mobile radio on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Enabling call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Concealing your number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Keeping the screen on during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Diverting your calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Tracking your phone time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Checking your current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Checking your GPRS network usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Setting your network selection search mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Viewing and editing your preferred networks list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Setting PIN for mobile power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Unlocking your SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Setting call barring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Setting Fixed Number Dialing (FND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Using SIM phone books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Network preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Modem Accessory and TCP/IP software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Selecting a service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Entering a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Selecting a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Adding telephone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
xi
Contents
Entering a prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Disabling call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Using a calling card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Connecting to your service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Creating additional service templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Adding detailed information to a service template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Idle timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Selecting Next Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Defining primary and secondary DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Login scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Creating a login script on your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Plug-in applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Deleting a service template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Network preferences menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Owner preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Power preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Automatic shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Cradle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Beam Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Security preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Assigning a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Locking your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Recovering from a forgotten password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Making records private . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
ShortCuts preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Sounds & Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
System, game, and alarm sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Appendix A: Maintaining Your Handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Caring for your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Battery considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Resetting your handheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Performing a soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Performing a hard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Installing and removing the SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
xii
Contents
Appendix B: Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Software installation problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Operating problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Tapping and writing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
E-mail problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Wireless problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Palm WAP Browser problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
SMS problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Palm Mobile problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Application problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
HotSync problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Beaming problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Recharging problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Password problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Product Regulatory and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
xiii
Contents
xiv
About This Book
This handbook is designed to help you get up and running quickly on your Palm™
Tungsten™ W handheld. It describes all you need to know about how to use your
handheld and the applications that come with it. It describes:
■
Enabling wireless features
■
Making and receiving mobile phone calls
■
Sending and receiving SMS messages
■
Locating all the parts of your handheld
■
Viewing and entering data
■
Working with expansion cards
■
Using your handheld with your computer
■
Personalizing your handheld with your own preference settings
After you become familiar with the basic functionality of your handheld, you can
use the rest of this handbook as a reference for performing less common tasks, for
maintaining your handheld, and for solving problems that might arise as you
operate your handheld.
1
About This Book
2
CHAPTER 1
Welcome
Your new Palm™ Tungsten™ W handheld is wirelessly enabled so that you can
use it to transmit and receive information over the airwaves. Use your handheld to
do the following:
■
Send SMS (Short Message Service) messages.
■
Read, compose, and send e-mail on-the-go.
■
Browse or search the Internet.
■
Make or receive a phone call.
■
Stay organized and on time by keeping your appointments, contact
information, and to-do items in one place.
■
Quickly jot memos on the fly.
Before you can use these features, you must set up your handheld and install
software on your desktop computer. To use your wireless features, you must install
an activated subscriber identity module (SIM) card in your handheld. Your
wireless service provider provides a SIM card. Contact your wireless service
provider if you have questions about activating your SIM card.
Read This First , an easy-to-follow installation guide that comes with your
handheld, takes you through the process of successfully setting up your handheld.
The guide contains important information that must be followed for initial setup
of the features available on your handheld.
If you are upgrading from another Palm OS® handheld, see
www.palm.com and navigate to country-specific pages, if necessary. Access support
information for Palm™ Tungsten™ W for important upgrade instructions before
beginning your Tungsten W handheld installation.
IMPORTANT
3
Chapter 1
Welcome
System requirements
Before you install and operate Palm™ Desktop software, your computer system
must meet the following minimum requirements.
Minimum requirements: Windows computers
The minimum requirements for Windows computers are as follows:
■
IBM-compatible Pentium-class computer
■
One of the following operating systems:
– Windows NT 4.0 Workstation with SP6 or later (requires a serial
cradle/cable, sold separately, and administrator rights to install Palm
Desktop software)
– Windows 98
– Windows ME
– Windows 2000 Pro (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop
software)
– Windows XP Home or Pro (requires administrator rights to install Palm
Desktop software)
■
Internet Explorer 4.01 with SP2 or later
■
50 megabytes (MB) available hard disk space
■
VGA monitor or better (16 Bit or High Color, and 800 x 600 resolution
recommended)
■
CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive (you can also download Palm Desktop software
from www.palm.com/support/intl)
■
Mouse
■
One available USB port or serial port (serial cradle/cable sold separately)
Minimum requirements: Mac computers
The minimum requirements for Mac computers are as follows:
■
Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor
■
Mac OS
– Mac OS 9, version 9.1 or later
– Mac OS X, version 10.1.2 or later
4
■
25MB available hard disk space
■
12MB available RAM
■
Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 x 600 or better
Wireless service
■
CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive (you can also download Palm Desktop software
by going to www.palm.com. Access country-specific pages if necessary.)
■
Mouse
■
One available USB port or serial port (serial cradle/cable sold separately and
compatible with Mac OS 9 only)
Wireless service
IMPORTANT Whenever you use the wireless features of your handheld, please
observe the guidelines or prohibitions on the use of wireless devices in your current
location. For example, when you are on an airplane, do not turn on your radio at
times when government or airline regulations prohibit the use of cellular phones. You
can, of course, use all other applications of your handheld in accordance with airline
regulations for electronic devices.
Your handheld is equipped with a GSM/GPRS mobile radio, so you can transmit
and receive information over the airwaves, wirelessly, from your handheld. You
don’t need to plug a wire into a wall socket, and you don’t need a modem.
After you charge the battery in your handheld, the mobile radio is ready for use.
Follow the instructions in Read This First and this book to successfully set up and
use your wireless features.
IMPORTANT Read your wireless service provider’s documentation to understand the
features and options you have selected as part of your service contract with your
wireless service provider. This handbook describes a wide range of wireless features
that are usable only if the service is provided by your wireless service provider.
Your handheld has a signal strength indicator to inform you of the availability and
strength of wireless service in your immediate area. It also has an indicator
showing your GPRS coverage. If you are having problems with your wireless
coverage, see “Wireless problems” in Appendix B.
GPRS coverage
Signal strength indicator
5
Chapter 1
Welcome
Making a call in a medical or safety emergency
To make a call for emergency service: Press all four application buttons at once. You
can make this call even without the SIM card installed, so long as your handheld’s
radio is on and you are in an area that has coverage. The call is free.
Press the four application buttons at once to make a call for emergency service.
Software Download Available
Palm Desktop software is supplied on a CD-ROM disc. Check www.palm.com,
country-specific pages if necessary, for updates and new versions of the software.
Compatibility of third-party applications
Palm works with developers of third-party add-on applications to ensure the
compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld. Some thirdparty applications, however, may not have been upgraded to be compatible with
your new Palm handheld, or they may not have been designed to incorporate all
the features available in your handheld.
If you suspect that a third-party application is adversely affecting the operation of
your handheld, contact the developer of the application. In addition, Palm has
information about some applications’ compatibility with your handheld. To find
this information, do one of the following:
6
■
Open your web browser and go to www.palm.com. Navigate to country-specific
pages if necessary, and access the support information for Tungsten W. Look for
a link leading to information on the compatibility of third-party applications.
■
Read the readme file for your handheld. After you install Palm Desktop
software on your computer, open the Palm folder. The readme file is located in
the Helpnote folder.
Finding information
Finding information
For installation information, see Read This First which came with your Tungsten W
handheld. For comprehensive information about using your handheld, continue
reading this electronic handbook.
For support information, upgrade information, articles, and answers to questions,
go to www.palm.com. Access country-specific pages if necessary, and access the
support information for Tungsten W.
For more information about using Palm Desktop software, see the following:
■
The handheld tutorial, Quick Tour. To access this tutorial, tap the Quick Tour
icon from the Applications main screen.
■
The Windows tutorial for Palm Desktop software, Desktop Quick Tour. To
access this tutorial, open Palm Desktop software and select Quick Tour from the
Help menu.
■
The electronic Palm Desktop software for the Macintosh User’s Guide. To access this
guide, open the Palm folder and then open the Documentation folder.
Double-click the file Palm Desktop.pdf.
■
The online help for Palm Desktop software. To access the online help, open
Palm Desktop software and select the Help menu.
7
Chapter 1
8
Welcome
CHAPTER 2
Exploring Your Handheld
Your wirelessly enabled Palm™ Tungsten™ W handheld helps you stay in touch
with important information while you are away from your desk. You can stay
organized, on time, and up-to-date with daily tasks. Use your new handheld to do
the following:
■
Compose and securely send and receive business or personal e-mail wirelessly.
IMPORTANT Some E-mail service providers do not allow e-mail that originates from
wireless handhelds to be sent through their servers. For more information,
see “E-mail problems” in Appendix B and contact your e-mail service to see if it
supports SMTP relay.
Also, some companies restrict access to internal e-mail accounts when using a
handheld. Check your company for their policy on use of handhelds.
■
Receive alerts when a new voicemail or SMS message arrives or a reminder
occurs. Rely on any or all of the three alert modes: the indicator light, vibrator,
or alarm sound. Support for the alert feature depends on your contract with
your wireless service provider.
■
Make phone calls using a hands-free headset.
■
Set preferences for how you receive alarms: hearing a sound, seeing a blinking
indicator light, or feeling your handheld vibrate. Choose any combination.
■
Enter your schedule in Date Book.
■
Keep all your contact names, addresses, and phone numbers in Address Book.
■
Prioritize and assign your tasks a due date in To Do List.
■
Set alarms from World Clock and Date Book to keep yourself on schedule and
remind yourself of appointments, redial reminders, and notes.
■
Synchronize your data with Palm™ Desktop software on your Windows or Mac
computer so you can work with your personal information on your computer
and maintain a copy of your information.
■
Insert SD or MultiMediaCard expansion cards to add more software or memory,
or to back up your data.
■
Beam information to another device that has an infrared (IR) port.
9
Chapter 2
Exploring Your Handheld
Your handheld may come with an expansion card that contains additional
software applications. If the expansion card is provided, the available applications
are determined by your wireless service provider. After you install software from
the expansion card, you may, depending on the applications provided, be able use
your handheld to do the following:
■
Access Internet information.
■
Access WAP content, applications, and games.
■
Download and use web clipping applications that help you find specially
formatted Internet information quickly.
Locating handheld components
Take a few moments to locate the front and back panel components of your
handheld.
Locating front panel controls
Antenna cap
Red and green indicator light
IR port
Screen
Stylus
Keyboard area
Date
Book
Power button/
Backlight control
Address
Book
Wireless
Application
buttons
Navigator
10
E-mail
Select button
Application buttons
Locating handheld components
IR port
Uses infrared technology to transmit data to and receive data
from other Palm OS® handhelds, and to perform HotSync®
operations. See “Using elements of the handheld interface”
in Chapter 3 and see “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in
Chapter 19 for more information.
Indicator light
Based on preferences you set, indicates when you are within
or out of range for wireless transmission. It also notifies you
of incoming Date Book or World Clock alarms. See “Alarm
Vibrate and indicator light settings” in Chapter 20.
Antenna cap
Houses the antenna for your mobile radio.
Stylus
Slides in and out of the slot in the side channel of the
handheld. To use the stylus, remove it from the slot and hold
it as you would a pen or pencil. Unscrew the top of the stylus
to access the reset tool.
Keypad
The area where you type letters and numbers, and access
special function keys. See Chapter 3 to learn how to type
characters.
Power button/
Backlight control
Turns your handheld on or off and controls the backlight
feature. If your handheld is turned off, pressing the power
button turns the handheld on and returns you to the last
screen you viewed.
If your handheld is turned on, pressing the power button
turns the unit off.
Pressing the power button for about two seconds turns the
backlight on or off. For more information on the backlight,
see the next section, “Using the indicator light”.
Application buttons
Activate the individual handheld applications that
correspond to the icons on the buttons: Date Book, Address
Book, E-mail, and Wireless. See “Buttons preferences” in
Chapter 20 for details on reassigning these buttons to open
any application on your handheld.
Navigator
The five-way navigation button enables you to move up,
down, right, and left in pick lists and menus. You can scroll
down to view information below the viewing area, and scroll
up to view the information above the viewing area. The
navigator also has some special functions that are described
in this handbook.
11
Chapter 2
Exploring Your Handheld
Select button
The navigator center Select button enables you to select
items. The Select button also has some special functions that
are described in this handbook.
Screen
Displays the applications and information stored in your
handheld. It is touch-sensitive and responds to the stylus.
Using the indicator light
Indicator light
The indicator light at the top of the handheld blinks or illuminates to indicate
various status levels, based on preferences you set. The light can be set to indicate
the following:
■
The mobile radio is on and within wireless coverage range.
■
The network has sent a notification to your handheld, indicating a missed call,
a new voicemail message, or a World Clock alert.
■
The mobile radio is on, but outside of the wireless coverage range.
For information about setting preferences for the indicator light, see “Alarm
Vibrate and indicator light settings” in Chapter 20.
12
Locating handheld components
Locating back panel components
Headset jack
Side
channel for
cover
Service test point
Reset
button
Expansion
card slot
Universal
connector
Headset jack
Connects the hands-free headset to your handheld, enabling
you to make or receive telephone calls.
Service test point
For use by Palm, Inc., authorized service personnel only.
Reset button
Under normal use, you should not have to use the reset
button. See “Resetting your handheld” in Appendix A for
information about when and how to use the reset button.
Expansion card slot
Accepts SD or MultiMediaCard expansion cards, enabling
you to add more memory, applications, or Bluetooth
functionality. You can also back up data to an expansion
card.
NOTE Expansion cards are purchased separately.
Universal connector
Connects your handheld to the cradle, which in turn
connects to the back of your computer and through the AC
adapter to the wall current. This allows you to recharge your
handheld as well as update the information between your
handheld and computer using HotSync technology.
The universal connector also connects peripheral hardware
devices to your handheld.
Side channel
The left side channel holds the front cover, which slides in
and out.
13
Chapter 2
Exploring Your Handheld
Adding an expansion card
A tiny expansion card (sold separately) increases the variety of tasks you can do
and the amount of space you have for storing software and data on your handheld.
To insert a card:
1.
Insert the card in the direction shown by the icon.
2.
Push the card in with your thumb. You feel the card lock and hear the system
sound.
Notched
corner
Push
Label on card
faced down
To remove a card:
1.
Push lightly against the card with your thumb.
2.
When the card is released, you hear the system sound.
Push
For complete information about working with expansion cards, see Chapter 7.
14
Using the backlight
Using the backlight
The backlight makes it easy for you to see the information on your handheld. The
backlight is on by default but can be turned off to extend battery life. You can turn
on, off, or adjust the backlight in the following ways:
■
Turn off the backlight and power automatically (after a period of inactivity) in
the Mobile application with the Automatic shutoff feature. See “Power
preferences” in Chapter 20 for more information.
■
Turn the backlight on or off by pressing the power button and holding it down
for about two seconds. Release the button when the backlight turns on or off.
■
Disable the backlight or adjust the backlight brightness level using the Adjust
Brightness dialog box.
To enable the backlight or adjust the backlight level:
1.
Press Function
+ Brightness
.
2.
Tap the Enable Backlight check box to select it.
3.
Tap to the left or right of the slider to adjust the brightness in small increments,
or drag the slider to change the brightness in large increments.
15
Chapter 2
16
Exploring Your Handheld
CHAPTER 3
Navigating and Entering Data
This chapter explains how to enter data into your handheld, navigate around the
interface, and use menu commands. There are several ways to enter data, to
navigate, and to use menu commands:
■
Tapping
■
Using the five-way navigator
■
Using the handheld keyboard
■
Beaming data from another device that has an infrared port
■
Entering or importing data in Palm™ Desktop software and then synchronizing
with your handheld
Tapping
Like using a mouse to click elements on a computer screen, using the stylus to tap
elements on your handheld screen is the basic action that gets things done on your
handheld.
The first time you start your handheld, setup instructions appear on the screen.
These instructions include a calibration screen. Calibration aligns the internal
circuitry of your handheld with its touch-sensitive screen so that when you tap an
element on the screen, the handheld can detect exactly which task you want to
perform.
IMPORTANT Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the
handheld screen. Never use an actual pen, pencil, or other sharp object to write on
the handheld screen. Also, when you first calibrate your handheld, be sure to wait for
each target to appear after tapping the previous target only once.
With your handheld turned on, you can tap the handheld screen to do many
operations, such as the following:
■
Open applications
■
Choose menu commands
■
Select options in dialog boxes
17
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
Just as you can drag the mouse to select text or move objects on your computer, you
can also drag the stylus to select text. You can also use the stylus to drag the slider
of any scroll bar.
Using the navigator
When you work with most applications, the navigator on the front panel of your
handheld makes it easy for you to navigate among and select your entries. You can
use the navigator to perform tasks without the stylus using one hand.
See Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 for additional information about using the navigator
with Address Book, and Chapter 8 for additional information on using the
navigator with Date Book.
To navigate in list screens, do any of the following:
■
Press Select to position the navigator on a list item.
■
Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll an entire screen of records.
■
Press and hold Up or Down on the navigator to accelerate the scrolling.
■
Press Select on the navigator to insert the selection highlight. When the selection
highlight is present, you can do the following:
– Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the previous or next records.
– Press Select again to view the selected record.
– Press Left on the navigator to remove the selection highlight.
To navigate in record screens:
18
1.
Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll within the current record.
2.
Press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to the previous or next record. (This
feature is not available in Address Book.)
3.
Press Select on the navigator to return to the list screen.
Using the keyboard
To navigate in dialog boxes:
■
While a pick list is open, press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight an
item, and then press Select on the navigator to select the item.
■
Press Select on the navigator to close a dialog. If there’s only one button,
pressing Select activates that button. If there’s multiple buttons, Select activates
affirming buttons such as OK, Yes, or Done.
Read dialog boxes carefully. Sometimes, selecting OK or Yes results in
deleting data.
IMPORTANT
Using the keyboard
You can quickly and accurately enter text or numbers on your handheld using the
keyboard. The keyboard also has special function keys that enable you to access
features. Another feature is AutoCorrect, which automatically corrects some
common misspellings when entering data from the keyboard.
Below the keyboard are application buttons and the 5-way navigator that enables
you to navigate menus and pick lists quickly without using the stylus. These
features are described in Chapter 2.
Letter and
number keys
Delete key
Return/Enter key
Tab/Brightness
key
Home/ShortCut
key
Function
key
Command/Menu
key
CAPS/Find key
Space/Symbol key
Letter and number keys: Enables you to enter letters and numbers. You
can change the key response from the Keyboard preferences screen.
See “Keyboard preferences” in Chapter 20.
You can also access international characters using the navigator control.
See “Accessing international and special characters” later in this
chapter.
Tab/Brightness key: Adds a tab or opens the Brightness dialog box. For
more information on the Brightness dialog box, see “Using the indicator
light” in Chapter 2.
19
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
Function key: Press to access the secondary character set. See “Using the
Function key” later in this chapter.
Capitalizes letters or opens the Find dialog box. For
more information on capitalizing letters, see the next section “Typing
capital letters”. For information on the Find dialog box, see “Finding
information” in Chapter 4.
CAPS/Find key:
Adds a space to the text or opens the onscreen
keyboards. For more information about the onscreen keyboards, see
“Accessing the onscreen keyboards” later in this chapter.
Space/Symbol key:
Command/Menu key: Opens the Command toolbar or Menu. For
information about the Command mode, see “Menu commands” in
Chapter 4. For more information about Menus, see “Using menus” in
Chapter 4.
Home/ShortCut key: Opens the Application Launcher or enables you to
enter a text ShortCut. For more information on ShortCuts, see “Using
ShortCuts” later in this chapter.
Return/Enter key:
Adds a manual return to the next line or enters the
data.
Delete/Backspace key:
Deletes the previous character.
Typing capital letters
The keyboard enables you to capitalize letters in two ways:
■
Use the CAPS key
. Press the CAPS key twice to initiate CAPS lock.
■
Press and hold the key. This feature works only when the Keyboard preference
Repeat Function is set to Capital. See “Keyboard preferences” in Chapter 20 for
more information.
Accessing international and special characters
You can access international and special characters directly from the keyboard or
from onscreen keyboards. These character sets enable you to communicate
accurately through your memos or wireless messages.
Accessing from the keyboard
You can access international characters from the keyboard by pressing and holding
a key, and then pressing Up and Down on the navigator. The character on the
screen scrolls through a sequence of related international characters. You can scroll
though the sequence either forward or backward depending on whether you are
pressing Up or Down on the navigator.
NOTE This feature does not work with every key or with the Function key secondary
character set.
20
Using the keyboard
To access international characters from the keyboard:
1.
Press and hold a key.
2.
Press Up or Down on the navigator.
3.
Accessing the onscreen keyboards
You can open the onscreen keyboards anytime you need to enter special characters
or numbers on your handheld.
To use the onscreen keyboard:
1.
Open any application (such as Memo Pad).
2.
Tap any record, or tap New.
3.
Press Function
+ Symbol
.
When a keyboard is open, you can tap to open any of the other keyboards.
Alpha
Tab
Backspace
Caps lock
Carriage return
Caps shift
Numeric
Tap here to display
alphabetic keyboard
International
Tap here to display
international keyboard
Tap here to display
numeric keyboard
Symbol
Tap here to display
symbol keyboard
After you finish, tap Done to close the onscreen keyboard and place the text in
the record.
21
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
Using the Function key
The Function key
enables you to access the secondary character or feature set
from each of the keys. The secondary character and feature set is labeled in blue in
the upper right on each available key.
Function key
When you press Function
, a dot appears in the lower-right corner, indicating
that the next key pressed will use the secondary character or feature set. If you
press the Function
twice, the dot changes to a “1” and the function feature
remains locked. Pressing Function
again unlocks it.
Function active icon
Function lock icon
Using special features
In addition to characters, the Function key accesses special features on some of the
keys. The following keys have special features:
Brightness key: Opens the Brightness dialog box. See “Using the
backlight” in Chapter 2 for more information.
Find key: Opens the Find dialog box. See “Using Find” in Chapter 4 for
more information.
Menu key: Opens the menu for the current screen. For more information,
see “Using menus” in Chapter 4 and see the next section, “Using menu
commands”.
22
Using the keyboard
Using menu commands
By using the menu commands you can access many functions directly from the
keyboard without tapping.
Most menu commands have an equivalent Command stroke, which is similar to
the keyboard shortcuts used to execute commands on computers. The command
letters appear to the right of the command names. For example, to choose Select All
in the Edit menu, press Command stroke
, and type the letter s.
Menu commands
Command letters
The command toolbar displays context-sensitive menu commands for the current
screen. For example, if text is selected the menu icons displayed may be Undo, Cut,
Copy, and Paste. Tap an icon to select the command.
Undo
Cut Copy Paste
Beam
Delete
To use menu commands:
1.
Press Command stroke
.
The Command toolbar opens at the bottom of the screen. The Command toolbar
indicates that you are in Command mode.
2.
Tap an icon or type the command letter immediately to choose the menu
command.
Command mode is active only for a short time.
23
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
Using ShortCuts
ShortCuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and easy.
ShortCuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word
processors.
The handheld comes with several predefined ShortCuts, and you can also create
your own. Each ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters. For example, you
might create a ShortCut for your name or for the header of a memo. See “ShortCuts
preferences” in Chapter 20 to learn about creating your own ShortCuts.
To use a ShortCut:
1.
Press Function
+ ShortCut
.
When you press the ShortCut key, the ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion
point to show that you are in ShortCut mode.
2.
Type the ShortCut characters.
Using elements of the handheld interface
Previous/next
arrows
Menu bar
Menu
command
Pick list
Check
box
Command
button
Menu bar and menu
commands
Scroll
bar
A set of commands that are specific to the application. Not all
applications have a menu bar.
To access the menu bar, do one of the following:
■
Tap the Menu bar.
■
Press Function
+ Menu
.
To access the menu commands, do one of the following:
24
■
Tap the menu command on the menu.
■
Use Right, Left, Up, or Down on the navigator.
■
Press Command Stroke
+ the letter. For more
information see “Using menu commands” later in this
chapter.
Using elements of the handheld interface
Check box
When a checkmark appears in a check box, the
corresponding option is active.
To insert or remove a check mark:
Command buttons
■
If a check box is empty, tapping it inserts a checkmark.
■
If a check box is selected, tapping it removes the
checkmark.
These appear in dialog boxes and at the bottom of
application screens.
To select a command button, do one of the following:
Next/previous arrows
■
Tap a button to perform a command.
■
Press Select on the navigator to select buttons such as OK,
Yes, or Done.
■
Press Function
Yes buttons.
+ Enter
■
Press Function
No buttons.
+ Backspace
to select the OK, Done, or
, to select Cancel or
The left and right arrows display the previous and next
record; the up and down arrows display the previous and
next page of information.
To use the arrows, do one of the following:
Pick list
■
Tap the arrows.
■
Use Right, Left, Up, or Down on the navigator.
A list of choices that you can select from.
To use the pick list:
■
Tap the arrow to display a list of choices.
■
Tap an item in the list.
■
Use Up or Down on the navigator to scroll through the list
and select an item.
25
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
Scroll bar
A bar that enables you to scroll up and down a page.
To use the scroll bars:
■
Drag the slider, or tap the top or bottom arrow, to scroll
the display one line at a time.
■
To scroll to the previous page, tap the scroll bar just above
the slider. To scroll to the next page, tap the scroll bar just
below the slider.
■
You can also scroll to the previous and next pages by
pressing Up and Down on the navigator.
Displaying online tips
Many of the dialog boxes that appear on your handheld contain an online Tips icon
in the upper-right corner. Online tips anticipate questions you have in a dialog box,
provide shortcuts for using the dialog box, or give you other useful information.
To display an online tip:
1.
Tap the Tips icon
.
2.
After you review the tip, tap Done.
Using Graffiti ® 2 writing to enter data
IMPORTANT Before you can use Graffiti 2 writing, you must install Jot from the
Software Essentials CD-ROM. When you install Jot, you can set your handheld to
recognize either Graffiti 2 characters or Jot characters. If you choose Jot characters,
see the instructions in that application for information. If you choose Graffiti 2
characters, read the following section for information.
26
Using Graffiti® 2 writing to enter data
In this section you learn to create Graffiti 2 letters, numbers, punctuation, and
symbols. You also learn some Graffiti 2 tips and tricks.
Most people find they can enter text quickly and accurately with only minutes of
practice. Graffiti 2 writing includes any character you can type on a standard
keyboard. The Graffiti 2 characters closely resemble the uppercase letters of the
regular alphabet, which makes Graffiti 2 writing easy to learn.
Learning Graffiti 2 concepts
There are four basic concepts for success with Graffiti 2 writing:
■
If you draw the character shape exactly as shown in the tables later in this
chapter (like the shapes shown in the following diagram), you can achieve close
to 100 percent accuracy.
■
The heavy dot on each shape shows where to begin the stroke. Certain
characters have similar shapes but different beginning and end points. Always
begin the stroke at the heavy dot. (You should not create the heavy dot; it is there
only to show you where to begin the stroke.)
■
Graffiti 2 includes symbols made with a single stroke and symbols made with
multiple strokes. With some multi-stroke symbols, the first stroke is the same as
a single stroke symbol. As a result, the down stroke for the letter “i” cannot be
recognized as an “i” at the end of the down stroke. The “i” will not be
recognized as an “i” until you enter another symbol that establishes, by its
shape or position, that the down stroke was not part of a two-stroke character
(such as a “t” or “k”), or until a limited time window expires. Similarly,
recognition of a space symbol (a horizontal stroke from left to right) or a period
symbol after a down stroke is dependent upon where the down stroke was
drawn.
27
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
■
The screen is divided into two parts: one for writing lowercase letters and one
for writing numbers. Capital letters are formed across the imaginary line that
divides the two areas.
Write letters here
Write numbers here
To write Graffiti 2 characters:
1.
Tap the screen where you want your text to appear.
You must see a blinking cursor before you write the text.
2.
Use the tables on the following pages to find the stroke shape for the letter you
want to create. For example, the stroke shown below creates the letter n.
Lift stylus
here
Start stroke
at heavy dot
3.
Position the stylus in the left side of the screen.
4.
Start your stroke at the heavy dot, and draw the stroke shape as it appears in the
tables.
5.
Lift the stylus from the screen at the end of the stroke shape.
When you lift the stylus from the screen, your handheld recognizes your stroke
immediately and prints the letter at the insertion point on the screen.
As soon as you lift the stylus from the screen, you can begin the stroke for the next
character you want to write.
28
Using Graffiti® 2 writing to enter data
To delete Graffiti 2 characters:
■
Set the insertion point to the right of the character you want to delete and make
the backspace stroke.
Backspace
Graffiti 2 tips
When using Graffiti 2 writing, keep these tips in mind:
■
Accuracy improves when you write large characters. Draw strokes that nearly
fill the side of the screen.
■
Write at natural speed. Writing too slowly can generate recognition errors.
■
Press firmly and do not write on a slant. Vertical strokes should be parallel to
the sides of the screen.
Graffiti 2 alphabet
The Graffiti 2 alphabet consists of the following letters:
Draw letters on LEFT side of the screen
Letter
Strokes
Letter
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
1
K
1
Strokes
J
2
L
2
M
N
O
P
29
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
Draw letters on LEFT side of the screen
Letter
Strokes
Letter
Q
R
S
T
Strokes
1
2
U
V
W
X
1
Y
2
Z
Capital letters
Graffiti 2 writing automatically capitalizes the first letter of a new record or
sentence but you can also write additional capital letters.
To write additional capital letters:
■
Draw the same stroke shapes used for a lowercase letter, but write across the
middle of the screen.
Imaginary division line
30
Using Graffiti® 2 writing to enter data
Graffiti 2 numbers
Writing numbers with Graffiti 2 writing is similar to writing letters of the alphabet,
except that you make the character strokes on the right side (numbers side) of the
screen.
Draw numbers on RIGHT side of the screen
Number
Strokes
Number
0
1
2
3
4
1
2
Strokes
5
6
7
8
9
Punctuation marks
With Graffiti 2 writing you can create any punctuation mark that you can enter
from a standard keyboard. You can write the period and comma strokes on either
side of the screen. You must write other punctuation marks on a designated side of
the screen. Punctuation marks that appear in the following table must be written
on the left (letter) side of the screen.
Draw these marks on LEFT side of the screen
Mark
Stroke
Mark
Period
.
Ampersand
&
Comma
,
Carriage
return
Apostrophe
'
At
@
Space
Straight quotes
“
Stroke
31
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
Question
?
Tab
1
2
Exclamation
!
1
2
Punctuation marks that appear in the following table must be written on the right
(number) side of the screen.
Draw these marks on RIGHT side of the screen
Mark
Stroke
Mark
Period
.
Backslash
\
Comma
,
Slash
/
Tilde
~
Left Paren
(
Dash
—
Right Paren
)
Plus
+
1
2
Asterisk
*
1
2
Stroke
Equal
=
Accented characters
When writing letters with accent marks, first write the letter stroke on the left side
(or in the center for uppercase letters) of the screen. Then quickly write the accent
stroke on the right side of the screen.
You can use the following accent strokes in combination with Graffiti 2 letters:
Draw accents on RIGHT side of screen
Accent
Acute
á
32
Stroke
Accent
Dieresis
ä
Stroke
Using Graffiti® 2 writing to enter data
Grave
à
Circumflex
â
Tilde
ã
Ring
å
Using these accent strokes, you can write the following accented letters:
à á â ã ä å è é ê ë ì í î ï ò ó ô õ ö ù ú û ü ÿ ý ñ
Symbols and other special characters
You can write symbols and other special characters using the Punctuation Shift
stroke.
NOTE You can also use the Punctuation Shift stroke to write punctuation marks.
To write symbols and special characters:
1.
Enter the Punctuation Shift stroke:
Shift
When Punctuation Shift is active, an up arrow symbol appears in the lowerright corner of the handheld screen. If you accidentally activate Punctuation
Shift, a up stroke will cancel it. Also, you can wait a few seconds for the
Punctuation Shift indicator to disappear. When it disappears, Punctuation Shift
is deactivated.
Shift indicator
2.
Write the symbol or other special character shown in the table that follows. You
can make a symbol stroke on either side of the screen.
3.
(Optional) Enter an additional Punctuation Shift stroke to finish writing the
character and to make the character appear more quickly.
33
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
After the arrow disappears, the symbol appears.
Draw symbols on EITHER side of the screen
Graffiti 2 Gestures
Gestures enable you to use editing commands. To use gestures, draw the following
strokes on the left (letter) side of the screen:
Draw gestures on LEFT side of the screen
Gesture
Stroke
Gesture
Cut
Paste
Copy
Undo
Stroke
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and
easy. ShortCuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word
processors.
Graffiti 2 writing comes with several predefined ShortCuts, and you can also create
your own. Each ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters. For example, you
might create a ShortCut for your name or for the header of a memo. See “ShortCuts
preferences” in Chapter 20 to learn about creating ShortCuts.
34
Beaming data
To use a ShortCut, draw the ShortCut stroke followed by the ShortCut characters.
The ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to show that you are in
ShortCut mode.
ShortCut
Your handheld includes the predefined Graffiti 2 ShortCuts shown in the following
table.
Entry
Shortcut
Date Stamp
ds
Time stamp
ts
Date / time stamp
dts
Meeting
me
Breakfast
br
Lunch
lu
Dinner
di
Beaming data
Your handheld is equipped with an infrared (IR) port that is located at the top of
the handheld, behind the small dark shield. The IR port supports the IrCOMM
implementation of the standards for infrared communication established by the
Infrared Data Association (IrDA). This means that not only can you beam data to
another Palm OS® handheld that’s close by and equipped with an IR port, but you
can also beam data to a mobile phone and to any other device that supports the
IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA standards and that can read the type of data
you’re beaming.
You can beam the following information between devices with an IR port:
■
The record currently displayed in Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, or
Memo Pad
■
All records of the category currently displayed in Address Book, To Do List, or
Memo Pad
■
A special Address Book record that you designate as your business card,
containing information you want to exchange with business contacts
35
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
■
An application installed in RAM memory
■
An application installed on an expansion card that is seated in the card slot
You can also perform HotSync® operations using the IR port.
See “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in Chapter 19 for details.
TIP
To select a business card:
1.
Create an Address Book record that contains the information you want on your
business card.
2.
Press Function
3.
Select “Select Business Card” on the Record menu.
4.
Tap Yes.
+ Menu
.
To beam a record, business card, or category of records:
1.
Locate the record, business card, or category you want to beam.
2.
Press Function
3.
Select one of the following from the Record menu:
+ Menu
.
– The Beam command for an individual record
– In Address Book only: Beam Business Card
– Beam Category
4.
When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly at the IR
port of the receiving handheld.
For best results, handhelds should be between 10 centimeters (approximately
4 inches) and 1 meter (approximately 39 inches) apart, and the path between the
two handhelds must be clear of obstacles. The beaming distance to other Palm
OS handhelds may be different.
5.
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue working on your handheld.
You can also press and hold the Address Book application button to instantly
beam your business card to another device with an IR port .
TIP
36
Using your computer keyboard
To beam an application:
1.
Press the Home
.
2.
Press Function
+ Menu
3.
Tap App, and then select Beam.
4.
Select either Handheld or Card from the Beam From pick list.
5.
Tap the application you want to transfer.
.
Some applications are copy-protected and cannot be beamed. These are listed
with a lock icon next to them.
6.
Tap Beam.
7.
When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly at the IR
port of the receiving handheld.
8.
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue working on your handheld.
To receive beamed information:
1.
Turn on your handheld.
2.
Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the transmitting handheld to open the
Beam dialog box.
3.
Select a category for the incoming information, create a new category, or leave
the information unfiled.
4.
Tap Yes.
Using your computer keyboard
If you have a lot of data to enter, or prefer to use the computer keyboard, you can
use Palm Desktop software or any supported personal information manager (PIM)
to enter information. You can then perform a HotSync operation to synchronize the
information on your computer with the information on your handheld. Many of
the applications that came with your handheld are also available in Palm Desktop
software and in most PIMs, so you don’t need to learn different applications. For
more information on entering data on your computer, refer to the online Help in
Palm Desktop software, the Quick Tour in Palm Desktop software (for Windows
users), and the Palm™ Desktop software Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide
on the Palm Desktop software CD-ROM.
37
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
Importing data
If you have data stored in computer applications such as spreadsheets and
databases, or if you want to import data from another handheld, you can transfer
the data to your handheld without having to enter it manually. Save the data in one
of the file formats in the following list, import it into Palm Desktop software, and
then perform a HotSync operation to transfer the data to your handheld.
Importing data from a Windows computer
Palm Desktop software can import data in the following file formats:
■
Comma delimited (.csv, .txt): Address Book and Memo Pad only
■
Tab delimited (.tab, .tsv, .txt): Address Book and Memo Pad only
■
CSV (Lotus Organizer 2.x/97 Mapping): Address Book only
■
vCal (.vcs): Date Book only
■
vCard (.vcf): Address Book only
■
Date Book archive (.dba)
■
Address Book archive (.aba)
■
To Do List archive (.tda)
■
Memo Pad archive (.mpa)
Archive formats can be used only with Palm Desktop software. Use the archive file
formats to share information with other people who use a Palm OS handheld or to
create a copy of your important Palm Desktop information.
To import data from a Windows computer:
1.
Open Palm Desktop software.
2.
Click the application into which you want to import data.
3.
If you are importing records that contain a field with category names, do the
following:
Select All in the Category box.
Be sure that the same categories that appear in the imported file also exist in the
application. If the categories do not exist, create them now; otherwise, the
records are imported into the Unfiled category.
4.
From the File menu, choose Import.
5.
Select the file you want to import.
6.
Click Open.
If you are importing a vCal or vCard file, skip to step 10. You do not have to
specify which fields correspond to the imported data.
38
Importing data
7.
To import data into the correct Palm Desktop fields, drag fields in the left
column so that they are opposite the corresponding imported fields on the right.
8.
If you do not want to import a field, deselect the check box for that field.
9.
Click OK.
The imported data is highlighted in the application.
10. To
add the imported data to your handheld, perform a HotSync operation.
See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting
data.
Using File Link
The File Link feature enables you to import Address Book and Memo Pad
information to your handheld from a separate external file on your Windows
computer, such as a company phone list. You can configure the File Link feature to
check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation.
HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category in Palm Desktop software
and on your handheld.
With File Link, you can import data stored in any of the following formats:
■
Comma-separated (*.csv)
■
Memo Pad archive (*.mpa)
■
Address Book archive (*.aba)
■
Text (*.txt)
For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.
Importing data from a Mac computer
Palm Desktop software can import data from any of the following applications
when you export the data in the appropriate file format:
■
Address Book Plus (text file)
■
Claris Organizer (Palm Desktop software can open these files directly).
■
ClarisWorks (Save under new name as ASCII text file).
■
DateBook Pro (text file)
■
DayMaker (text file)
■
Dynodex (text file)
■
FileMaker Pro (tab separated text file)
■
Meeting Maker (text file)
■
Newton running OS 1.0 with Newton Connection Kit:
Names, Date Book Calendar, and Notepad (text file)
39
Chapter 3
Navigating and Entering Data
■
Now Contact (text file)
■
Now Up-to-Date (text file)
■
QuickDex (text file)
■
TouchBase Pro (text file)
Palm Desktop software can also import data in the following file formats:
■
Tab delimited (.tab, .tsv, .txt)
■
vCal (.vcs): Data Book only
■
vCard (.vcf): Address Book only
To import data from a Mac computer:
1.
Open Palm Desktop software.
2.
From the File menu, choose Import.
3.
Select the file you want to import.
4.
Click Import.
5.
If you want to change the order of the fields you’re importing, point to a field,
wait for the cursor to change to a double arrow, and then drag the field to a new
location.
6.
If you do not want to import a field, click the arrow between the field names.
7.
From the Fields pop-up menu, choose the appropriate field.
8.
From the Delimiters pop-up menu, choose the appropriate delimiter.
9.
Click OK.
10. To
add the imported data to your handheld, perform a HotSync operation.
See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting
data.
40
CHAPTER 4
Working with Applications
This chapter explains how to open and switch between applications on your
handheld, how to change application settings so they are personalized to your
work methods, and how to categorize applications so you view them in related
groups.
Opening applications
You can use the Applications Launcher to open any application installed on your
handheld or on an expansion card. You can also open Date Book and Address Book
with the application buttons on your handheld.
Home key opens
Application Launcher
Wireless
Date Book
Address Book
E-mail
In addition to providing a way for you to open applications, the Applications
Launcher displays the current time, battery level, and application category.
To open an application on your handheld:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the icon of the application that you want to open. If you have many
applications installed on your handheld, tap the scroll bar to see all your
applications.
41
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
Other ways to open applications
You can also open applications on your handheld in either of the following ways:
■
Press and hold Select on the navigator to open the Applications Launcher. Press
Select on the navigator to insert the highlight. Press Up, Down, Right, and Left
on the navigator to highlight the icon of the application you want to open. Press
Select on the navigator to open the application.
■
In the Applications Launcher, type the first letter of the application’s name. The
Applications Launcher scrolls to the first application with a name that begins
with that letter and highlights the icon. You can open the icon by pressing the
Enter key.
Opening expansion card applications
When an expansion card is properly seated in the expansion card slot, your
handheld responds based on the contents of the card and the application that is
active when you insert the card. In some cases, the application on the card opens
automatically upon insertion, or if you insert a card containing data from the
current application, the application displays the data on the card. In other cases,
the Applications Launcher switches to the card, and displays its contents, and the
pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen displays the name of the card.
To open an application on an expansion card:
■
Select the icon of the application that you want to open.
Switching between applications
When working with any application, press Home
or press an application
button on your handheld to switch to another application. Your handheld
automatically saves your work in the current application and displays it when you
return to that application.
When you use an expansion card, your handheld creates and displays a new
category that matches the name of the expansion card. You can easily switch
between applications installed on your handheld and on the expansion card.
42
Categorizing applications
To switch to an expansion card:
1.
Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner.
When the highlight in the Applications Launcher is not active, you can also
press and hold Select on the navigator to open the category pick list.
TIP
2.
Select the category item that matches the name of the expansion card.
Categorizing applications
The category feature enables you to manage the number of application icons that
appear onscreen in the Applications Launcher. You can assign an application to a
category and then display a single category or all your applications.
By default, your handheld includes system-defined categories, such as All and
Unfiled, and user-defined categories, such as Games, Main, and System.
You cannot modify the system-defined categories, but you can rename and delete
the user-defined categories. In addition, you can create your own user-defined
categories. You can have a maximum of 15 user-defined categories.
When you have an expansion card properly seated in the expansion card slot, the
last item in the category pick list becomes the name of the expansion card. You
cannot otherwise categorize applications that reside on an expansion card.
To categorize an application:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
App menu.
+ Y.
+ Menu
, and then select Category on the
43
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
3.
Tap the pick list next to each application to select a category.
To create a new category, select Edit Categories from the pick list. Tap
New, enter the category name, and then press Function
+ Enter
, or tap
OK to add the category.
TIP
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
To display applications by category:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Do one of the following:
– Press Home
repeatedly to cycle through all your categories.
– Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and select the
category you want to display.
– When the highlight in the Applications Launcher is not active, press and
hold Select on the navigator to open the category list, press Up or Down on
the navigator to highlight a category, and then press Select on the navigator
to display that category.
Changing the Applications Launcher display
By default, the Applications Launcher displays each application as an icon. As an
alternative, you can choose to show a list of applications. You can also choose to
view the same category of applications each time you open the Applications
Launcher.
To change the Applications Launcher display:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Preferences.
44
+ R.
+ Menu
, select Options, and then select
Copying applications to or from an expansion card
3.
Tap the View By pick list and select List.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To open the Applications Launcher to the last opened category:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Press Command Stroke
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Preferences.
+ Menu
, select Options, and then select
3.
Tap the Remember Last Category check box to select it.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Copying applications to or from an expansion card
You can copy applications from your handheld to an expansion card, or from an
expansion card to your handheld.
To copy an application to an expansion card:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
3.
+ C.
+ Menu
, select Copy on the App menu.
Select Handheld from the Copy From pick list.
45
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
4.
Select the card name from the Copy To pick list.
The Copy To pick list appears only if there are multiple cards available.
5.
Tap an application to copy.
6.
Tap Copy.
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
You can install applications to a card that is seated in the expansion card slot
during a HotSync® operation; see “Installing add-on applications” later in this
chapter for details.
NOTE If you view your applications on the card using a Card Reader on your
Windows or Mac computer, the actual file names may differ from those displayed in
the Applications Launcher.
To copy an application from an expansion card:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
+ C.
+ Menu
, select Copy on the App menu.
3.
Select the card name from the Copy From pick list.
4.
Select Handheld from the Copy To pick list.
5.
Tap an application to copy.
6.
Tap Copy.
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
You can also beam applications from expansion cards to your handheld.
See “Using elements of the handheld interface” in Chapter 3 for details.
46
Selecting copy settings
Selecting copy settings
When using the copy feature, you can set the following:
■
How applications are sorted and listed
■
Whether to copy only the application or both the application and its data files
To select copy settings:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
+ C.
+ Menu
, select Copy on the App menu.
3.
Tap Settings.
4.
Select Name or Size from the Sort By pick list.
5.
Tap the Copy Application Only check box to select it, if you want to copy only
the application files. Leave it deselected if you want to copy both the application
file and its associated data files.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
NOTE The Sort By setting is in effect each time you use the copy feature. Each time
you want to copy an application only, you must select the Copy Applications Only
check box.
Using menus
Menus on your handheld are easy to use. Once you have mastered them in one
application, you can use them the same way in all other applications.
The menus of each application are illustrated in the chapter that discusses that
application.
47
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
To open the menu bar:
1.
Open an application (such as Memo Pad).
2.
Do one of the following:
– Press Function
+ Menu
.
– Tap the inverted title area at the top of the screen.
Tap the title area
Press
Function
Press
Menu
In this example, three menus are available: Record, Edit, and Options. The Record
menu is selected and contains the commands New Memo, Delete Memo, and Beam
Memo.
Choosing a menu
The menus and menu commands that are available depend on the application that
is currently open. Also, the menus and menu commands vary depending on which
part of the application you’re currently using. For example, in Memo Pad the
menus are different for the Memo list screen and the Memo record screen.
To select a menu command with the stylus:
1.
Tap the menu bar for an application.
2.
Tap the menu that contains the command you want to use.
3.
Tap the command you want to use.
TIP After you open the menu bar, you can also press Right and Left on the navigator
to select a menu, press Down on the navigator to select the command you want to
use, and then press Select on the navigator to run the command.
48
Choosing application preferences
Menu commands
Most menu commands have an equivalent Command stroke, which is similar to
the keyboard shortcuts used to execute commands on computers. For information
on using menu commands see “Displaying online tips” in Chapter 3.
Choosing application preferences
You can set options that affect an entire application in the application’s Preferences
dialog box.
To change preferences for an application:
1.
Open an application.
2.
Press Command Stroke
+ R.
– Alternately, press Function
the Options menu.
+ Menu
, and then select Preferences on
NOTE Not all applications have a Preferences command.
3.
Make changes to the settings.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Performing common tasks
The tasks described in this section use the term records to refer to an individual item
in any of the applications: a single Date Book event, Address Book entry, To Do List
item, Memo Pad memo, Note Pad note, or Expense item.
Creating records
You can use the following procedure to create a new record in Date Book, Address
Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, Note Pad, and Expense.
To create a record:
1.
Select the application in which you want to create a record.
2.
Tap New.
3.
In Date Book only: Select start and end times for your appointment, and press
Function
+ Enter , or tap OK.
4.
Enter text for the record.
5.
(Optional) Tap Details to select attributes for the record. (In Note Pad the Details
command is located on the Options menu.)
6.
In Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad only: Press Function
+ Enter , or tap Done.
There’s no need to save the record because your handheld saves it automatically.
49
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
Editing records
After you create a record, you can change, delete, or enter new text at any time.
Two screen features tell you when your handheld is in editing mode:
■
A blinking cursor
■
One or more dotted edit lines
Blinking cursor
Edit line
NOTE In Note Pad you can write anywhere on the screen. Therefore, you will
not see an edit line or blinking cursor unless the cursor is in the title line.
Entering text
For information on how to enter text using the keyboard on your handheld or the
keyboard attached to your computer, see Chapter 3. For information on entering
text in Note Pad, see Chapter 12.
Using the Edit menu
The Edit menu is available with any screen where you enter or edit text. In general,
commands available in the Edit menu apply to text that you select in an application.
To select text in an application:
1.
Tap the beginning of the text that you want to select.
2.
Drag the stylus over the text to highlight it (in yellow).
NOTE You can also double-tap to select a word, or triple-tap to select a line of
text. You can also drag across the text to select additional words, or drag down
to select a group of lines.
50
Performing common tasks
The following commands may appear in an Edit menu:
Undo
Reverses the action of the last edit command. For example, if you
used Cut to remove text, Undo restores the text you removed. Undo
also reverses deletions you made using the backspace.
Cut
Removes the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory
of your handheld. You can paste the text you cut into another area
of the current application or into a different application.
Copy
Copies the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of
your handheld. You can paste the copied text into another area of
the current application or into a different application.
Paste
Inserts the cut or copied text at the selected point in a record. The
text you paste replaces any selected text. If you did not previously
cut or copy text, Paste does nothing.
Select All
Selects all the text in the current record or screen. This enables you
to cut or copy all of the text and paste it elsewhere.
Keyboard
Opens the onscreen keyboard. After you finish with the onscreen
keyboard, press Function
+ Enter , or tap Done.
Deleting records
To delete a record using the menu command:
1.
Select the record you want to delete.
2.
Press Command Stroke
+ D.
To delete a record using the Menu:
1.
Select the record you want to delete.
2.
Press Function
3.
Select Record, and then select one of the following Delete commands:
Date Book:
Note Pad:
.
Delete Event
Address Book:
To Do List:
+ Menu
Delete Address
Delete Item
Delete Note
Memo Pad:
Delete Memo
Expense: Delete Item
A confirmation dialog box appears. If you want to save a copy of the deleted
item to an archive file in Palm™ Desktop software, be sure that the check box is
selected. If you don’t want to save a copy, tap the check box to deselect it.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
51
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
If you choose to save a copy of the selected item, your handheld transfers it to the
archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation. (The
archive option is not available in Note Pad.)
Other ways to delete records
You can also delete records in the following ways:
■
Delete the text of the record.
■
In Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, and Memo Pad, open the Details dialog
box for the record, tap Delete, and then press Function
+ Enter , or tap
OK.
NOTE When deleting a repeating event in Date Book, you can choose to delete
the current repeating event, current and future events, or all instances of that
event.
■
In Note Pad, open the note you want to delete, and then tap Delete.
Purging records
Over time, as you use Date Book, To Do List, and Expense, you’ll accumulate
records that have outlived their usefulness. For example, events that occurred
months ago remain in the Date Book, and To Do List items that you marked as
completed remain in the list, as do Expense items.
All these outdated records take up memory on your handheld, so it’s a good idea
to remove them by using Purge. If you think Date Book or To Do List records might
prove useful later, you can purge them from your handheld and save them in an
archive file on your computer.
Purging is not available in Address Book, Note Pad, or Memo Pad; you must delete
outdated records manually from these applications.
To purge records:
1.
Open the application.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Record menu.
+ E.
+ Menu
, and then select Purge on the
A confirmation dialog box appears.
Date Book: Tap the pick list and select how old a record must be to be purged.
Purge deletes repeating events if the last of the series ends before the date that
you purge records.
52
Performing common tasks
Date Book, To Do List: If you want to save a copy of the purged records to an
archive file on your desktop, be sure that the check box is selected. If you don’t
want to save a copy, tap the check box to deselect it.
Expense: Select the category you want to purge. All data in the selected category
will be purged and there is no archive option.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK or Done.
If you chose to save a copy of the purged records, your handheld transfers them to
an archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation.
NOTE Purging does not happen automatically. You must select the command to
make it happen.
Categorizing records
You can categorize records in the Address Book, To Do List, Note Pad, Memo Pad,
and Expense applications so that they are grouped logically and are easy to review.
When you create a record, your handheld automatically places it in the category
that is currently displayed. If the category is All, your handheld assigns it to the
Unfiled category. You can leave an entry as Unfiled or assign it to a category at any
time.
By default, your handheld includes system-defined categories, such as All and
Unfiled, and user-defined categories, such as Business and Personal.
You cannot modify the system-defined categories, but you can rename and delete
the user-defined categories. In addition, you can create your own user-defined
categories. You can have a maximum of 15 user-defined categories in each
application.
When you have an expansion card properly seated in the expansion card slot, the
last item in the category pick list is the name of the expansion card. You cannot
otherwise categorize applications that reside on an expansion card.
Address Book contains the QuickList user-defined category, in which you can store
the names, addresses, and phone numbers you might need in emergencies (doctor,
fire department, lawyer, and so on).
Expense contains two user-defined categories, New York and Paris, to show how
you might sort your expenses according to different business trips.
The illustrations in this section come from Address Book, but you can use these
procedures in all the applications in which categories are available.
To move a record into a category:
1.
Select the record you want to categorize.
2.
In Address Book only: Tap Edit.
3.
Tap Details.
53
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
4.
Tap the Category pick list to display the list of available categories.
5.
Select the category for the record.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
NOTE In Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad you can select the category
name in the upper-right corner of the screen to assign the item to a different
category.
To display a category of records:
1.
Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the list screen.
Tap here
NOTE In the Date Book Agenda view, the pick list is in the upper right of the To
Do list.
2.
Select the category you want to view.
The list screen now displays only the records assigned to that category.
Pressing an application button on your handheld scrolls through all the
categories of that application except for Unfiled. This feature is not available in
Date Book.
TIP
54
Performing common tasks
To define a new category:
1.
Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen or list.
Tap here
2.
Select Edit Categories.
3.
Tap New.
4.
Enter the name of the new category, and then press Function
tap OK.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
+ Enter
, or
, or tap OK.
You can assign any of your records to the new category.
To rename a category:
1.
Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen or list.
2.
Select Edit Categories.
55
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
3.
Select the category that you want to rename, and then tap Rename.
4.
Enter the new name for the category, and then press Function
or tap OK.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
+ Enter
,
, or tap OK.
You can group the records in two or more categories into one category by
giving the categories the same name. For example, if you change the name of
the Personal category to Business, all records formerly in the Personal
category appear in the Business category.
TIP
Finding information
Your handheld offers several ways to find information quickly:
Find locates any text that you
specify, always starting with the current application. However, Find does not
search through applications on expansion cards.
■
All applications that reside on your handheld:
■
Date Book, To Do List, Memo Pad:
■
The Look Up line enables you to scroll immediately to a name
when you enter the first letters of that name.
■
Expense: Lookup displays the names in your Address Book that have data in the
Phone Lookup displays the Address list
screen and enables you to add to a record the information that appears in this
list.
Address Book:
Company field. You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with
an Expense record.
56
Performing common tasks
Looking up Address Book records
In Address Book, you can use the Look Up line with the stylus or the navigator to
look up and quickly scroll to any of your Address Book entries.
To look up an Address Book record with the stylus:
1.
From the Address list screen, enter the first letter of the name you want to find.
Look Up line
The list scrolls to the first entry that begins with that letter. If you write another
letter, the list scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters. For
example, writing an s scrolls to “Sands,” and writing sm scrolls further to
“Smith.” If you sort the list by company name, the Look Up feature scrolls to the
first letter of the company name.
2.
Tap the record to view its contents.
To look up an Address Book record with the navigator:
1.
From the Address List screen, press Right on the navigator to display the
navigator Quick Look Up line.
2.
Press Up or Down on the navigator to select the first letter of the name you want
to find.
The list scrolls to the first entry that begins with that letter.
3.
Press Right on the navigator to move to the next letter box.
Quick Look Up line
The Quick Look Up line displays only letters that are a possible match for that
position.
If only one match is possible for a particular position, the highlight jumps to the
next position.
57
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
4.
Press Up or Down on the navigator to select the next letter of the name you want
to find.
The list then scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters. For
example, selecting s scrolls to “Sands,” and selecting sm scrolls further to
“Smith.” If you sort the list by company name, the Quick Look Up feature
scrolls to the matches for the company name.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the entry you want appears in the list.
6.
Press Select on the navigator to highlight the record you want.
7.
Press Select on the navigator to view the contents of the selected record.
If only one match is possible for the letters you selected, the contents of
the record displays automatically.
TIP
Using Find
You can use Find to locate any text that you specify, in any application that resides
on your handheld. Find does not search applications that reside on an expansion
card.
To use Find:
1.
Press Function
+ Find
.
If you select text in an application before you tap Find, the selected text
automatically appears in the Find dialog box.
TIP
2.
Enter the text that you want to find.
Find is not case-sensitive. For example, searching for the name “davidson” also
finds “Davidson.”
Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter. For example,
searching for “plane” finds “planet” but not “airplane.”
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Find searches for the text in all records and all notes.
As your handheld searches for the text, you can tap Stop at any time. You may
want to do this if the entry you want appears before your handheld finishes the
search. To continue the search after you tap Stop, tap Find More.
4.
58
Tap the text that you want to review.
Performing common tasks
Using Phone Lookup
Phone Lookup displays the Address list screen and enables you to add the
information that appears in this list to a record.
To use Phone Lookup:
1.
Display the record in which you want to insert a phone number. The record can
be in Date Book, To Do List, Memo Pad, or any other application that takes
advantage of this feature.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
the Options menu.
3.
+ L.
+ Menu
and then select Phone Lookup on
Begin to spell the last name of the name you want to find.
The list scrolls to the first record in the list that starts with the first letter you
enter. Continue to spell the name you’re looking for, or when you see the name,
tap it.
4.
Tap Add.
The name you selected, along with the other information associated with it, is
pasted into the record you selected in step 1.
Looking up names to add to Expense records
In Expense, Lookup displays the names in your Address Book that have data in the
Company field. You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with an
Expense record.
59
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
To add names to an Expense record:
1.
Tap the Expense record to which you want to add names.
2.
Tap Details.
3.
Tap Who.
Tap here
4.
Tap Lookup.
The Attendees Lookup screen displays all the names in your Address Book that
have data in the Company field.
5.
Select the name you want to add, and then tap Add.
The name appears in the Attendees screen.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add more names.
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
8.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Sorting lists of records
You can sort lists of records in various ways, depending on the application. Sorting
is available in applications that have list screens: Address Book, Note Pad, To Do
List, Memo Pad, and Expense.
NOTE You can also assign records to categories. See “Categorizing records” earlier
in this chapter.
60
Performing common tasks
To sort records in Address Book, Note Pad, and Memo Pad:
1.
Open the application to display the list screen.
2.
Press Command Stroke
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
+ Menu
, and then select Preferences on the
Address Book
Note Pad
Memo Pad
3.
Do one of the following:
Address Book:
Note Pad:
Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic, Date, or Manual.
Memo Pad:
4.
Tap the setting you want.
Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic or Manual.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To sort the Note Pad and Memo list manually, tap and drag a note or memo to
a new location in the list.
To make the list appear in Palm Desktop software as you manually sorted it on
your handheld, open the application in Palm Desktop software and click Sort
by. Then select Order on Handheld.
To sort records in To Do List and Expense:
1.
Open the application to display the list screen.
2.
Tap Show.
3.
Tap the Sort by pick list and select an option.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
61
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
Attaching notes
In Address Book, Date Book, To Do List, and Expense, you can attach a note to a
record. A note can be up to several thousand characters long. For example, for an
appointment in Date Book, you can attach a note with directions to the location.
To attach a note to a record:
1.
Display the entry to which you want to add a note.
To display an entry, tap it or press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight it,
and then press Select on the navigator.
2.
In Address Book only: Tap Edit.
3.
Tap Details.
4.
Tap Note.
5.
Enter your note.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
A small note icon appears at the right side of any item that has a note.
Note icon
To review or edit a note:
■
Tap the Note icon
.
In Date Book, you can also select the event that contains the note, press Select
on the navigator to open the note, and then press Select on the navigator again to
close the note.
TIP
To delete a note:
62
1.
Tap the Note icon
2.
Tap Delete.
3.
Press Function
.
+ Enter
, or tap Yes.
Performing common tasks
Choosing fonts
In many applications, you can change the font style to make text easier to read. You
can choose small, small bold, large, or large bold fonts in each application that
enables you to change font style.
Small font
Small bold font
Large font
Large bold font
To change the font style:
1.
Open an application.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
3.
+ F.
+ Menu
Tap the font style you want to use.
Tap here for small bold font
Tap here for large bold font
Tap here for
small font
4.
, and then select Font on the
Press Function
Tap here for large font
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
63
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
Receiving alerts
You can receive alerts on your handheld and in Palm Desktop software.
Receiving alerts on your handheld
When you use certain application settings, your handheld can alert you to any of
the following:
■
An appointment set in Date Book
■
A note created in Note Pad
■
An alarm set in World Clock
When an alert occurs, your handheld displays a reminder message. If you tap
Snooze in response to an alert message, your handheld reminds you of the item
again in five minutes. The Reminder screen displays alerts that await attention.
NOTE You may also receive alerts notifying you of time updates from the wireless
network if your wireless service provider supports this feature and you have selected
this preference. When the time is updated, Clock and any wireless applications (that
display time) accept the update, and you see an alert in the Reminders screen.
To respond to alerts, do one of the following:
■
Select an item’s check box to clear the item.
■
Tap an item (either the icon or the text description) to open the application
where the alarm was set. The application opens to the entry associated with the
alarm.
■
Press Function
+ Enter , or tap Done to close the reminder list and return
to the current screen. An attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the
screen; tap it to view the alert list again.
■
Tap Snooze to see the list again in five minutes.
If you tap Done or Snooze and view the reminder list later, the current time is
displayed in the Reminder bar and the original alert time is displayed with each
list item.
■
64
Tap Clear All to dismiss all alerts in the list.
Installing and removing applications
Receiving alerts from Palm Desktop software
You can also set an option to receive Date Book event alerts from Palm Desktop
software. The feature is disabled by default, so you must enable it within Palm
Desktop software.
To enable an event alert from Palm Desktop software:
1.
Double-click the Palm Desktop icon.
2.
From the Tools menu, select Options, and then select Alarms.
3.
Set Alarm Configuration options, either Always Available or Available only
when the Palm Desktop is running.
4.
(Optional) To hear an alert sound as well as receive an alert message, select the
check box Play audible notification with alarm dialog.
5.
Click OK.
Hiding or masking private records
You can use the Security preferences to set a password and select whether to mask
your private records or hide them completely. See “Security preferences” in
Chapter 20 for details.
Installing and removing applications
This section explains how to install and remove applications on your handheld or
on an expansion card, and how to remove Palm Desktop software from your
computer.
Installing add-on applications
Your handheld comes with applications installed and ready to use, but you can
also install additional applications, such as games and other software, on your
handheld or on a card that is seated in the expansion card slot. Applications or
games that you install on your handheld reside in RAM memory, and you can
delete them at any time.
The Install Tool makes it easy to install software during a HotSync operation. There
are a variety of third-party applications available for your handheld. To learn more
about these applications, go to the web site: www.palm.com/support/intl.
To install add-on software on your handheld using a Windows computer:
1.
On your computer, copy or download the application you want to install into
the add-on folder in your Palm Desktop directory on your computer.
2.
Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your desktop.
3.
Click Install.
65
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
You can also access the Install Tool dialog by selecting Install Tool from
the Palm Desktop program group or by double-clicking any file with a PRC,
PDB, PQA, PNC, or SCP file extension.
TIP
66
4.
In the User drop-down list, select the name that corresponds to your handheld.
5.
Click Add.
6.
Select the applications that you want to install.
7.
Click Open.
8.
If you need to change the destination of the application you are installing, click
Change Destination in the Install Tool window, and then use the arrows to move
applications between your handheld and an expansion card.
Installing and removing applications
9.
Click OK to close the Change Destination window.
10. Click Done to
11.
close the Install Tool window.
Perform a HotSync operation to install the selected applications.
See “Performing a cradle/cable HotSync operation: Windows computer” in
Chapter 19 for details.
NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were
not installed. This can happen if the file type was not recognized during the
HotSync operation. Expansion cards may hold applications that use files other
than the PalmTM application files. For your handheld to recognize such a file,
you must launch the application at least once.
To install add-on software on your handheld using a Mac computer:
1.
On your Mac computer, copy or download the application you want to install
into the Add-on folder in your Palm folder.
2.
Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
3.
From the HotSync menu, select Install Handheld Files.
4.
From the User pop-up menu, select the name that corresponds to your
handheld.
5.
Click Add To List.
67
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
6.
Select the Add-on folder.
If the file you want to install is not listed in the dialog box, go to the folder to
which you copied the file. Most Palm application files have the extension PRC,
PDB, PQA, or SCP.
7.
Select the applications you want to install.
8.
Click Add File to add the selected application to the Install Handheld Files list.
You can also drag files or folders of files to the list in the Install Handheld
Files dialog box. The files are copied to the Files To Install folder.
TIP
9.
If you need to change the destination of the application you are installing, click
Change Destination the Install Handheld Files window, and then use the
arrows to move applications between your handheld and an expansion card.
10. Click OK
11.
to close the Change Destination window.
Close the Install Handheld Files window.
12. Perform
a HotSync operation to install the selected applications on your
handheld. See “Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations” in Chapter 19 for
details.
NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were
not installed. This can happen if the file type was not recognized during the
HotSync operation. Expansion cards may hold applications that use files other
than the Palm application files. In order for your handheld to recognize such a
file, you must launch the application at least once.
68
Installing and removing applications
Removing applications
If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer need an application you
installed, you can remove applications from your handheld or from an expansion
card. From your handheld, you can remove only add-on applications, patches, and
extensions that you install; you cannot remove the applications that reside in the
ROM portion of your handheld.
NOTE If you have backed up your applications during a HotSync operation, you also
need to delete them from your computer. Otherwise, they are reinstalled at the next
HotSync operation.
To remove an add-on application:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
+ D.
+ Menu
, select Delete on the App menu.
3.
Tap the Delete From pick list and select either Handheld or Card. To delete
applications from a card, the card must be seated in the expansion card slot.
4.
Tap the application that you want to remove.
5.
Tap Delete.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Yes.
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Removing Palm Desktop software
If you no longer want to use Palm Desktop software, you can remove it from your
computer.
To remove Palm Desktop software from a Windows computer:
1.
From the Windows Start menu, select Settings and then Control Panel.
2.
Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.
3.
Click the Change or Remove Programs button.
4.
Select Palm Desktop.
69
Chapter 4
Working with Applications
5.
Click Change/Remove.
6.
Click Yes in the Confirm File Deletion box.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Click Close.
NOTE You need to install the HotSync Manager from the installation CD if you want
to synchronize data with another PIM.
To remove Palm Desktop software from a Mac computer:
1.
Locate the Palm Desktop Installer icon and double-click.
The Palm Desktop Installer icon is on the Palm Desktop CD or in the installer
that you downloaded.
2.
Select Uninstall from the pop-up menu.
3.
Select the software you want to remove.
4.
Click Uninstall.
5.
Select the folder that contains your Palm Desktop software files.
6.
Click Remove.
NOTE This process removes only the application files. The data in your Users
folder remains untouched.
7.
70
Restart your computer.
CHAPTER 5
Using Address Book
Address Book enables you to keep names, addresses, phone numbers, and
other information about your personal or business contacts. Use Address
Book to do the following:
■
Quickly look up or enter names, addresses, phone numbers, and other
information.
■
Enter up to five phone numbers (home, work, fax, mobile, and so on) or e-mail
addresses for each name.
■
Define which phone number appears in the Address list for each Address Book
entry.
■
Attach a note to each Address Book entry, in which you can enter additional
information about the entry.
■
Assign Address Book entries to categories so that you can organize and view
them in logical groups.
■
Create your own digital business card that you can beam using SMS or e-mail
to other devices with an infrared (IR) port and an application that can read the
data.
To open Address Book:
■
Press the Address Book application button
on the front panel of your
handheld. Address Book opens to display the list of all your records.
Address Book button
Press the Address Book application button
repeatedly to cycle through the
categories in which you have records. You can also press and hold the Address Book
application button
to instantly beam your business card to another device with an
IR port. The receiving device must also have an application that can read the Address
Book data.
TIP
71
Chapter 5
Using Address Book
Creating an Address Book entry
A record in Address Book is called an entry. You can create entries on your
handheld, or you can use Palm™ Desktop software to create entries on your
computer and then transfer the entries to your handheld with your next HotSync®
operation.
Palm Desktop software also has data import capabilities so that you can load
database files into Address Book on your handheld.
See “Importing data” in Chapter 3 and Palm Desktop online Help for more
information.
To create a new Address Book entry:
1.
Press the Address Book button
Address list.
2.
Tap New.
on the front of your handheld to display the
Cursor
at Last
name
Tap New
3.
Enter the last name of the person you want to add to your Address Book.
The handheld automatically capitalizes the first letter of each field (except
numeric and e-mail fields). You do not have to use the CAPS key to capitalize
the first letter of the name.
4.
Tap the First Name field.
TIP
Pressing Tab
moves the cursor to the next field.
5.
Enter the first name of the person in the First Name field.
6.
Enter the other information that you want to include in this entry.
As you enter letters in the Title, Company, City, and State fields, text appears for
the first logical match that exists in your Address Book. As you enter more
letters, a closer match appears. For example, you may already have Sacramento
and San Francisco in your Address Book. As you enter S, Sacramento appears,
and as you continue entering a and n San Francisco replaces Sacramento. As
soon as the word you want appears, tap the next field to accept the word.
72
Selecting types of phone numbers
7.
Tap the scroll arrows
page of information.
or press Up/Down on the navigator to move to the next
8.
After you finish entering information, Press Function
Done.
+ Enter
, or tap
Tap Done
To create an entry that always appears at the top of the Address list, begin the
Last name or Company field with a symbol, as in *If Found Call*. This entry can
contain contact information in case you lose your handheld.
TIP
Selecting types of phone numbers
You can select the types of phone numbers or e-mail addresses that you associate
with an Address Book entry. Any changes you make apply only to the current
entry.
To select other types of phone numbers in an entry:
1.
Tap the entry that you want to change.
2.
Tap Edit.
3.
Tap the pick list next to the label you want to change.
Tap
triangle
4.
Select a new label.
73
Chapter 5
Using Address Book
Changing Address Entry details
The Address Entry Details dialog box provides a variety of options that you can
associate with an entry.
To open the Address Entry Details dialog box:
1.
Tap the entry whose details you want to change.
2.
Tap Edit.
3.
Tap Details.
4.
Select any of the following settings:
Show in List
Select which type of phone or other information appears in
the Address list screen. Your options are Work, Home, Fax,
Other, E-mail, Main, Pager, and Mobile. The identifying
letters W, H, F, O, M, or P appear next to the record in the
Address list, depending on which information is displayed.
If you select E-mail, no identifying letter is displayed.
Category
Assign the entry to a category.
Private
Hide this entry when Security is turned on.
Making connections from Address Book
You can use the entries in your Address Book to launch applications that perform
tasks such as dialing a phone number or creating an e-mail or SMS message. Some
of the applications you can launch are included with your handheld, and others
may be available from third-party developers and are sold separately.
Quick Connect
You can use Quick Connect to select an entry and initiate a related task with one
hand using the navigator. You can also configure which application opens when
you choose a specific Address record field, and whether to add a prefix to all phone
numbers.
74
Making connections from Address Book
To make a connection with Quick Connect:
1.
Open the Address entry to which you want to connect.
2.
Press Right on the navigator to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
You can also tap the Quick Connect icon in the title bar of the Address
record.
TIP
3.
Select the method you want to use to connect.
Quick Connect opens and initiates the related task. For example, if you tap a
phone number, Quick Connect sends the selected phone number to your mobile
phone.
To configure Quick Connect settings:
1.
From the Quick Connect dialog box, tap Settings.
2.
(Optional) Tap the Number Prefix check box and enter a prefix.
For example, to dial 1 before all phone numbers, select this check box and enter
a “1” in this field. The prefix is not added to a number that begins with the “+”
character.
3.
Tap each of the pick lists and select the application you want to associate with
that task.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
75
Chapter 5
Using Address Book
Tap-to-Connect
Tap-to-Connect enables you to select an entry and initiate a related task by tapping
it with the stylus. By default, Tap-to-Connect is enabled.
To enable Tap-to-Connect:
1.
Press Command Stroke
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
2.
Tap Enable Tap-to-Connect.
3.
Tap OK.
+ Menu
, and then select Preferences on the
You can also configure which application opens when you tap a specific Address
record field, and whether to add a prefix to all phone numbers. See “Quick Connect”
earlier in this chapter to learn how to configure these settings.
TIP
To make a connection with Tap-to-Connect:
1.
From the Address list, tap the entry to which you want to connect.
2.
Tap the item you want to launch in Mobile.
For example, to dial a phone number, tap the number you want to dial. To
address an e-mail message, tap an e-mail address.
Address Book menus
Address Book menus are shown here for your reference, and Address Book
features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands.
The Record and Options menus may differ, depending on whether you’re
displaying the Address list screen or the Address view screen.
76
Address Book menus
Record menus
Address list
Address view
Duplicate
Address
Makes a copy of the current record and displays the copy in
Address Edit so you can make changes to the copied record. The
copy has the same category and attached notes as the original
record.
Connect
Opens the Quick Connect dialog box where you can select which
application to use to make the connection.
Send Address
Opens a dialog box where you can select how to send the
selected entry to another device. The options available depend
on the software installed on your handheld.
Options menus
Address view
Address list
Preferences
Determines how Address Book
appears when you return to it from another application. If you
select this check box, Address Book shows the last category you
selected. If you clear it, Address Book displays the All category.
Remember last category:
77
Chapter 5
78
Using Address Book
Rename Custom
Fields
Fields that appear at the end of the Address Edit screen. Rename
them to identify the kind of information you enter in them. The
names you give the custom fields appear in all entries.
About Address
Book
Shows version information for Address Book.
CHAPTER 6
Using Calculator
Calculator enables you to perform basic calculations. Use Calculator to do
the following:
■
Perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root
operations.
■
Store and retrieve values.
■
Display the last series of calculations, which is useful for confirming a series of
“chain” calculations.
To open Calculator:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the Calculator icon
.
Performing calculations
The Calculator includes several buttons to help you perform calculations.
Clears the entire calculation so that you can begin a fresh calculation.
Clears the last number you entered. If you make a mistake while
entering a number in the middle of a calculation, you can use this
button to reenter the number without starting the calculation over.
79
Chapter 6
Using Calculator
Toggles the current number between a negative and positive value.
If you want to enter a negative number, enter the number first and
then press the +/– button.
Places the current number in memory. Each new number you enter
with the M+ button is added to the total already stored in memory. The
number that you add can be either a calculated value or any number
you enter by pressing the number buttons. Pressing this button has
no effect on the current calculation (or series of calculations); it
merely places the value into memory until it is recalled.
Recalls the stored value from memory and inserts it into the current
calculation.
Clears any value that is stored in the Calculator memory.
Calculates the square root of a number. Enter the number, and then
tap the square root button.
Viewing recent calculations
The Recent Calculations command enables you to review the last series of
calculations and is particularly useful for confirming a series of “chain”
calculations.
To display recent calculations:
1.
Press Command Stroke
+ l.
Alternately, press Function
+ Menu
Calculations on the Options menu.
2.
80
, and then select Recent
After you finish reviewing the calculations, press Function
tap OK.
+ Enter
, or
Using Calculator menus
Using Calculator menus
The Calculator menu shown here is for your reference, and the Calculator feature
described here is not explained elsewhere in this book.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Options menu
About Calculator
Shows version information for Calculator.
81
Chapter 6
82
Using Calculator
CHAPTER 7
Using Card Info
Card Info enables you to review general information about an expansion
card. Use Card Info to do the following:
■
Review card contents.
■
Rename a card.
■
Format a card.
Reviewing Card Information
You can view the card name, type, available storage space, and a summary of its
contents.
To review Card Information:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the Card Info icon
3.
Review Card name, Type, and Size.
4.
Review card contents summarized by directory.
.
Review card information
Review summarized
card contents
83
Chapter 7
Using Card Info
Renaming a card
Renaming a card enables you to give an easy to recognize name to the card.
To rename a card:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the Card Info icon
3.
Press Command Stroke
.
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
the Card menu.
+ Menu
4.
Enter the new name for the card.
5.
Tap Rename.
, and then select Rename Card on
Formatting a card
Formatting a card destroys all its data and prepares it to accept new applications
and data.
To format a card:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the Card Info icon
3.
Press Command Stroke
.
Alternately, press Function
the Card menu.
4.
84
Press Function
+ Enter
+ F.
+ Menu
, or tap OK.
, and then select Format Card on
Managing an expansion card
Managing an expansion card
■
When writing data to an expansion card, wait for your handheld to complete
the operation before removing the card from the slot. This prevents data
corruption or accidental damage to the expansion card.
■
You can install applications to an expansion card after performing an initial
HotSync® operation. See “Installing add-on applications” in Chapter 4 for
information. For optimal performance, we recommend that you do not install
more than fifty applications to a single expansion card.
■
When your handheld’s battery level becomes very low, access to the expansion
card may be disabled to protect your data. If this occurs, recharge your
handheld as soon as possible.
Using the Card Info menu
The Card Info menu is shown here for your reference, and the Card Info features
that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Help
Provides help text.
About Card Info
Shows version information for Card Info.
85
Chapter 7
86
Using Card Info
CHAPTER 8
Using Date Book
Date Book enables you to quickly and easily schedule appointments or any
kind of activity associated with a time and date. Use Date Book to do the
following:
■
Enter a description of your appointment and assign it to a specific time and
date.
■
Display a chart of your appointments for an entire week. The Week view makes
it easy to spot available times and potential scheduling overlaps or conflicts.
■
Display a monthly calendar to quickly spot days where you have morning,
lunch, or afternoon appointments.
■
Display an agenda showing appointments, untimed events, and your To Do
items for the day.
■
Set an alarm to notify you of the scheduled activity.
■
Create reminders for events that are based on a particular date, rather than time
of day. Birthdays and anniversaries are easy to track with your handheld.
■
Attach notes to individual events for a description or clarification of the entry
in your Date Book.
To open Date Book:
■
Press the Date Book application button
Date Book opens to today’s schedule.
on the front panel of your handheld.
Date Book button
Press the Date Book application button repeatedly to cycle through the
Day, Week, Month, and Agenda views.
TIP
When you open Date Book, the screen shows the current date and a list of times for
a normal business day.
87
Chapter 8
Using Date Book
Scheduling an event
A record in Date Book is called an “event.” An event can be any kind of activity
that you associate with a day. You can enter a new event on any of the available
time lines.
When you schedule an event, its description appears on the time line, and its
duration is automatically set to one hour. You can easily change the start time and
duration for any event.
It’s possible to schedule events that overlap, but Date Book makes it easy to find
such conflicts. See “Spotting event conflicts” later in this chapter.
You can also schedule events in your Date Book that occur on a particular date but
have no specific start or end times, such as birthdays, holidays, and anniversaries.
These are referred to as “untimed events.” Untimed events appear at the top of the
list of times, marked with a diamond. You can have more than one untimed event
on a particular date.
You can also schedule a repeating event, such as a weekly meeting, and continuous
events, such as a three-day conference or a vacation.
To schedule an event for the current day:
1.
Tap the time line that corresponds to the beginning of the event.
Tap a
time line
Time bar
shows
duration
Enter event
2.
Enter a description of the event. You can enter up to 255 characters.
3.
If the event is one hour long, skip to step 5. If the event is longer or shorter than
an hour, tap the time of the event to open the Set Time dialog box.
Tap the
time of an
event
88
Scheduling an event
4.
Do one of the following:
– Tap the time columns on the right side of the Set Time dialog to set the Start
Time, and then tap the End Time box and tap the time columns to set the End
Time.
– Tap All Day to automatically insert the start and end time of the event as
defined in your Date Book preferences.
Start Time
highlighted
Tap to scroll to
earlier hours
Tap to change
hours
Tap to automatically
fill the start and end
times
Tap to change
minutes
Tap to scroll to
later hours
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
6.
Tap a blank area of the screen to deselect the event. A vertical line appears next
to the time, indicating the duration of the event.
If an event has the same start and end time, the time is displayed only once.
To schedule an event for another day:
1.
Select the date you want for the event by doing one of the following:
– Tap the day of the week that you want in the date bar at the top of the screen.
If necessary, tap the Previous week or Next week scroll arrows to move to
another week.
Previous
week
Next
week
Tap to select a day of
the current week
– Press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous day.
– Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll within the current day.
89
Chapter 8
Using Date Book
– Tap Go To at the bottom of the screen to open the Go to Date dialog box.
Select a date by tapping a year, month, and day in the calendar.
Previous year
Next year
Tap to select a
month
Tap to select a
day
Tap to select
current date
2.
After you locate the date, follow the steps for scheduling an event for the
current day.
To schedule an untimed event:
1.
Select the date that you want for the event.
2.
Tap New.
3.
Tap No Time, so that no start or end times are defined for the new event.
4.
Enter a description of the event.
New
untimed
event
No time
selected
5.
90
Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the untimed event.
Selecting an event
If you create an event and decide later that there is no particular start or end time,
you can easily change it to an untimed event. Tap the time of the event in the Date
Book screen, tap No Time, and then press Function
+ Enter , or tap OK.
Selecting an event
After you create an event, you can select an event to view its contents, reschedule
it, make it a repeating event, and add alarms or notes.
To select an event:
1.
Go to the day on which the event is scheduled.
2.
Tap the event.
You can also press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight on the
next event in the current day or on the first event of another day. To scroll
through the events in the selected day, press Up and Down on the navigator.
TIP
Rescheduling an event
You can easily make changes to your schedule with your handheld.
To reschedule an event:
1.
Select the event you want to reschedule.
2.
Tap Details.
3.
To change the time, tap the Time box and select a new time.
4.
To change the date, tap the Date box and select a new date.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Setting an alarm for an event
The Alarm setting enables you to set an alarm for events in your Date Book. You
can set an alarm to notify you minutes, hours, or days before an event. The default
Alarm setting is five minutes before the time of the event, but you can change the
Alarm to any number of minutes, hours, or days.
When you set an alarm, this icon
appears to the far right of the event with the
alarm. When the alarm occurs, a reminder message also appears onscreen.
To set an alarm for an event:
1.
Select the event to which you want to assign an alarm.
2.
Tap Details.
3.
Tap the Alarm check box to select it.
The default setting, 5 Minutes, appears.
91
Chapter 8
Using Date Book
4.
Tap the pick list to select Minutes, Hours, or Days.
5.
Select the 5 and enter any number from 0 to 99 (inclusive) as the number of time
units.
Enter number of
time units here
Tap here to
select unit of time
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
7.
When the reminder message appears on screen, do one of the following:
– Press Function
+ Enter , or tap OK, to permanently dismiss the
reminder and return to the current screen.
– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. The
reminder message appears again five minutes after you tap Snooze, and
meanwhile an attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen
to remind you of the pending alarm.
– Tap Go To to open Date Book. Date Book opens and displays the event
associated with the alarm.
Alarm for untimed events: You
can set a silent alarm for an untimed event. In this
case, the alarm triggers at the specified period of minutes, hours, or days before
midnight (beginning) of the day of the untimed event. When the alarm triggers, the
reminder list displays the alarm message until you clear it. See “Receiving alerts”
in Chapter 4 for details.
For example, you might set an alarm for an untimed event that occurs on
February 4. If the alarm is set for five minutes, the reminder message appears at
11:55 PM on the night of February 3. The reminder remains in the reminder list
until you turn on your handheld and dismiss it.
92
Scheduling repeating or continuous events
Scheduling repeating or continuous events
The Repeat function lets you schedule events that recur at regular intervals or
extend over a period of consecutive days.
A birthday is a good example of an event that repeats annually. Another example
is a weekly guitar lesson that falls on the same day of the week and the same time
of day.
A business trip or a vacation is an example of a continuous event.
To schedule a repeating or continuous event:
1.
Select the event.
2.
Tap Details.
3.
Tap the Repeat box to open the Change Repeat dialog box.
Tap the
Repeat
box
4.
Tap Day, Week, Month, or Year to set how often the event repeats.
For a continuous event, tap Day.
5.
On the Every line, enter a number that corresponds to how often you want the
event to repeat.
For example, if you select Month and enter the number 2, the event repeats
every other month.
6.
To specify an end date for the repeating or continuous event, tap the End on
pick list and tap Choose Date. Use the date picker to select an end date.
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
After you schedule a repeating or continuous event, the Repeat icon
the far right of the event.
appears to
93
Chapter 8
Using Date Book
Changing repeating or continuous events
When you make changes to a repeating or continuous event, such as deleting or
adding notes or changing the time of an event, you can decide which of the events
you want to change—all events in the series, just the current event, or the current
and future events.
To delete repeating events:
1.
Select the record you want to delete.
2.
Press Function
3.
Select Record, and then select Delete Event.
4.
Do one of the following:
+ Menu
– Tap Current to delete only the current event item.
– Tap Future to delete the current and all future event items and reset the end
date of the repeating event to the last shown date.
– Tap All to delete all occurrences of the repeating event.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Considerations for repeating or continuous events
Keep the following points in mind:
94
■
If you change the start date of a repeating event, your handheld calculates the
number of days you moved the event. Your handheld then automatically
changes the end date to maintain the duration of the repeating event.
■
If you change the repeat interval (e.g., daily to weekly) of a repeating event, past
occurrences (prior to the day on which you change the setting) are not changed,
and your handheld creates a new repeating event.
■
If you change the date of an occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., from
January 14th to January 15th) and apply the change to all occurrences, the new
date becomes the start date of the repeating event. Your handheld adjusts the
end date to maintain the duration of the event. If you apply the change to
current and future occurrences, past occurrences are not changed.
Changing the Date Book view
■
If you change other repeat settings (e.g., time, alarm, private) of a repeating
event and apply the change to all occurrences, your handheld creates a new
event. The start date of this new event is the day on which the setting is
changed.
■
If you apply a change to a single occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., time), that
occurrence no longer shows the Repeat icon .
Changing the Date Book view
In addition to displaying the time list for a specific day, you can also display a
whole week, a month, an agenda, and the current time.
To cycle through Day, Week, Month, and Agenda views:
■
Press the Date Book application button repeatedly to display the next view.
■
Tap the appropriate view icon in the lower-left corner of Date Book.
Working in Week view
Week view shows the calendar of your events for an entire week. This view lets you
quickly review your appointments and available time slots. In addition, the
graphical display helps you spot overlaps and conflicts in your schedule.
To display the Week view:
1.
Tap the Week view icon.
Week view
2.
Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a week at a time, or
tap on a column to display details of an event.
The Week view also shows untimed events and events that are before and after
the range of times shown. Untimed repeating events appear in green.
Previous
week
Next week
Tap for that day
Diamond indicates untimed event
Bar indicates earlier event
Dashed line indicates repeating event
Bar indicates later event
95
Chapter 8
Using Date Book
3.
Tap an event to show a description of the event.
Event details
Tap to show event details
Tips for using Week view
Keep the following points in mind:
■
To reschedule an event, tap and drag the event to a different time or day.
■
Tap a blank time on any day to move to that day and have the time selected for
a new event.
■
Tap any day or date that appears at the top of the Week view to move directly
to that day without selecting an event.
■
Press Right and Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous week.
■
Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, and then press Right and
Left to select a day within the selected week. To view the events on the selected
day, press Select on the navigator again.
■
The Week view shows the time span defined by the Start Time and End Time in
the Date Book Preferences settings. If you have an event before or after this time
span, a bar appears at the top or bottom of that day’s column. Use the onscreen
scroll arrows to scroll to the event, or press Up and Down on the navigator to
scroll to earlier and later time slots within the selected week.
Working in Month view
The Month view screen shows which days have events scheduled. Dots and lines
in the Month view indicate events, repeating events, and untimed events.
Previous/next month
Diamond below date indicates untimed event
Dashed line below date indicates continuous event
Dashes on right side indicate events
Month view button
You can control the dots and lines that appear in the Month view. See “Display
Options” later in this chapter.
96
Changing the Date Book view
Tips for using Month view
Keep the following points in mind:
■
Tap a day in the Month view to display that day in the Day view.
■
Tap the scroll arrows in the upper-right corner, or press Left and Right on the
navigator, to move forward or backward a month.
■
Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight, and then press Left and
Right on the navigator to scroll to a specific day. Press Select on the navigator to
display that day in the Day view.
■
Untimed repeating events appear in green.
Working in Agenda view
The Agenda view shows you your untimed events, appointments, and To Do items
in one screen. When you tap an untimed event or appointment in the Agenda view,
the Day view appears so you can see more detailed information about the event.
You can tap the check box next to a To Do item to mark it as completed. When you
tap on a To Do item, your To Do list appears.
NOTE The To Do items that appear and how you can change them depends on the
settings in your To Do preferences. See “Setting To Do Preferences” in Chapter 15 for
more information.
To display the Agenda view:
1.
Tap the Agenda view icon.
Agenda view
2.
Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a day at a time, or to
display more events and To Do items.
You can also press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll through the
events on the selected day, or press Right and Left on the navigator to scroll to
the next or previous day.
TIP
97
Chapter 8
Using Date Book
NOTE You can also change the category of To Do items shown. Tap on the pick
list to choose another category. See Chapter 15 for more information on
working with To Do items.
Spotting event conflicts
With the ability to define specific start and end times for any event, it’s possible to
schedule events that overlap (an event that starts before a previous event finishes).
An event conflict (time overlap) appears in the Week View as overlapping bars.
The first event created appears as a gray bar, and any subsequent conflicting events
appear as a single red bar. The Day View displays overlapping red brackets to the
left of the conflicting times. The Month View displays conflicting appointments
in red.
Event
conflicts
Date Book menus, preferences, and display options
Date Book menus are shown here for your reference, and Date Book features that
are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Record menu
Send Event
98
Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send the selected event to another device. The options available
depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Date Book menus, preferences, and display options
Options menu
Display Options
Allows you to change Date Book’s appearance and which events are displayed.
Show Time Bars
Activates the time bars that appear in the Day view. The
time bars show the duration of an event and illustrate
event conflicts.
Compress Day view
Controls how times appear in the Day view. When
Compress Day view is off, all time slots are displayed.
When it is on, start and end times are displayed for each
event, but blank time slots toward the bottom of the screen
disappear to minimize scrolling.
Month view settings
These check boxes apply to the Month view of the Date
Book. You can deactivate any or all of these settings to hide
Timed, Untimed, or Daily Repeating events in the Month
view only.
99
Chapter 8
Using Date Book
Preferences
Start/End Time
Defines the start and end times for Date Book screens. If the
time slots you select do not fit on one screen, you can tap the
scroll arrows to scroll up and down.
Alarm Preset
Automatically sets an alarm for each new event. The silent
alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes, days, or hours
before midnight at the end of the date of the event.
Alarm Sound
Sets the tone of the alarm.
Remind Me
Defines how many times the alarm occurs after the initial
occurrence. The choices are Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, and
10 Times.
Play Every
Defines how often the alarm sounds. The choices are Minute,
5 minutes, 10 minutes, and 30 minutes.
About Date Book
Shows version information for Date Book.
100
CHAPTER 9
Using Expense
Expense enables you to keep track of your expenses and then transfer the
information to a spreadsheet on your computer. In Expense you can do the
following:
■
Record dates, types of expenses, amount spent, payment method, and other
details associated with any money that you spend.
■
Assign expense items to categories so that you can organize and view them in
logical groups.
■
Keep track of vendors (companies) and people involved with each expense.
■
Log miles traveled for a particular date or expense category.
■
Sort your expenses by date or expense type.
■
Send or export your expense information to popular computer applications,
such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word, using Palm™ Desktop software and
HotSync® technology on a Windows computer.
IMPORTANT To access Expense, you must first perform a HotSync operation with
your handheld. Expense is automatically loaded onto your handheld during the first
HotSync operation.
To open Expense:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Select the Expense icon
.
101
Chapter 9
Using Expense
Adding expense items
A record in Expense is called an item. You can sort your Expense items into
categories or add other information that you want to associate with the item.
1.
Tap New.
Cursor of
new item
Tap New
2.
Enter the amount of the expense.
3.
Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type from the list.
As soon as you select an expense type, your handheld saves your entry. If you
do not select an expense type, it does not save the entry.
Tap here
TIP Another quick way to create a new Expense item is to make sure that no
Expense item is selected in the Expense list, type the first letter(s) of the
expense type, and then type the numerical amount of the Expense item. This
technique takes advantage of the automatic fill feature. See “Options menu”
later in this chapter for details.
Changing the date of an Expense item
Initially, Expense items appear with the date on which you enter them. You can
change the date associated with any Expense item.
102
Adding expense items
To change the date of an Expense item:
1.
Tap the Expense item you want to change.
2.
Tap the date of the selected item.
Tap date
3.
Tap the new date.
Entering receipt details
Expense provides a variety of options that you can associate with an item. These
options appear in the Receipt Details dialog box.
To open the Receipt Details dialog box:
1.
Tap the Expense item to which you want to assign details.
2.
Tap Details.
3.
Select any of the following options:
Category
Opens a pick list of system and user-defined categories.
See “Categorizing records” in Chapter 4 for more information.
Type
Opens a pick list of expense types.
103
Chapter 9
Using Expense
4.
Payment
Enables you to choose the payment method used to pay the
Expense item. If the item is prepaid (such as airline tickets
supplied by your company), you can choose Prepaid to place your
expense in the appropriate company-paid cell of your printed
expense report.
Currency
Enables you to choose the type of currency used to pay the
Expense item. The default currency unit is defined in the
Preferences dialog box. You can also display up to four other
common types of currency. See “Customizing the Currency pick
list” later in this chapter for more information.
Vendor and
City
Enables you to record the name of the vendor (usually a company)
associated with the expense and the city where the expense was
incurred. For example, a business lunch might be at Rosie’s Cafe
(Vendor) in San Francisco (City).
Attendees
See “Looking up names to add to Expense records” in Chapter 4
for more information.
Press Function
+ Enter
or tap OK.
Customizing the Currency pick list
You can select the currencies and symbols that appear in the Currency pick list.
To customize the Currency pick list:
1.
Tap the Currency pick list in the Receipt Details dialog box, and then select Edit
currencies.
Tap Edit
currencies
104
2.
Tap each Currency pick list and select the country whose currency you want to
display on that line.
3.
Press Function
box.
+ Enter
or tap OK to close the Select Currencies dialog
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
or tap OK.
Customizing the Currency pick list
Changing the default currency
You can select which currency appears by default when you’re entering Expense
items. You can override this setting when entering individual expense items.
To change your default currency:
1.
Open Expense.
2.
Press Command Stroke
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
+ Menu
, and then select Preferences on the
3.
Tap the Default Currency pick list.
4.
Select the currency symbol that you want to appear in Expense.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
or tap OK.
Defining a custom currency symbol
If the currency you want to use is not in the list of countries, you can create your
own custom country and currency symbol.
To define a custom currency symbol:
1.
Press Command Stroke
+ Y.
Alternately, press Function
+ Menu
Currencies on the Options menu.
2.
, and then select Custom
Tap one of the four Country boxes.
Tap a Country
box
105
Chapter 9
Using Expense
3.
Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want to appear in
Expense.
4.
Press Function
box.
+ Enter
or tap OK to close the Currency Properties dialog
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
or tap OK.
NOTE If you want to use your custom currency symbol as the default for all Expense
items, select the symbol in the Preferences dialog box. If you want to use your
custom currency symbol only for a particular Expense item, select the symbol in the
Receipt Details dialog box associated with that item.
Setting Show Options
Show Options defines the sort order and other settings that relate to your Expense
items.
To open the Show Options dialog box:
1.
In the Expense list, tap Show.
2.
Select any of the options.
Tap Show
3.
106
Sort by
Enables you to sort expense items by date or type.
Distance
Enables you to display Mileage entries in miles or kilometers.
Show currency
Shows or hides the currency symbol in the Expense list.
Press Function
+ Enter
or tap OK.
Working with Expense data on your computer
Working with Expense data on your computer
After you enter your expenses into the Expense application on your handheld and
perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software enables you to do any of the
following on your computer. See the Palm Desktop software online help for details.
This feature is not avaialble on Mac computers.
■
Add, modify, and delete your Expense data.
■
Organize your Expense data by category, amount, date, type, or notes.
■
View Expense data in various formats: List, Large Icons, or Small Icons.
■
Record individual expenses in various currencies and display the total in one
selected currency type.
■
Print Expense reports.
■
Transfer Expense data to other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, using the
Send command or Export command, and import data in popular file formats.
Displaying the euro on your computer
When you perform a HotSync operation, the euro symbol is transferred to Palm
Desktop software like any other piece of data on your handheld. The symbol
appears in Palm Desktop software, however, only if you are using fonts that
support the euro symbol.
These fonts are part of the operating system on your computer. They do not reside
with your Desktop application, and they are not produced by Palm, Inc. For more
information refer to the documentation that accompanies your desktop
computer’s operating system.
Printing the euro
Even with operating system support, problems may arise when you print
documents that contain the euro. When a font is present on both the printer and
the computer, the printer font is used by default to increase printing speed. If the
printer font does not include the euro, a box is printed instead of the euro symbol.
These fonts are part of the operating system on your computer. They do not reside
with your Desktop application, and they are not produced by Palm, Inc. For more
information, refer to the documentation that accompanies your desktop
computer’s operating system.
Using Expense menus
Expense menus are shown here for your reference, and Expense features that are
not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
107
Chapter 9
Using Expense
Record menu
Options menu
Preferences
Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can select
automatic fill and default currency options.
Use automatic fill. Enables you to select an expense type by
typing the first letter of an expense type. For example, if you
type the letter T, it enters the “Taxi” expense type. Typing T and
then E enters Telephone, which is the first expense type beginning
with the letters TE.
About Expense
108
Shows version information for Expense.
CHAPTER 10
Using Memo Pad
Memo Pad provides a place to take notes that are not associated with
records in Date Book, Address Book, or To Do List. The number of memos
you can store is dependent only on the memory available on your handheld.
Use Memo Pad to do the following:
■
Send memos to popular computer applications like Microsoft Word when you
synchronize using Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology.
■
Assign memos to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical
groups.
■
Write down phone numbers and other types of information that you can later
copy and paste into other applications.
To open Memo Pad:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the Memo Pad icon
.
Creating memos
A record in Memo Pad is called a memo. You can assign memos to categories and
mark them private as described in Chapter 4. This section covers how to create a
memo.
To create a new memo:
1.
Open Memo Pad.
2.
Tap New.
Tap New
109
Chapter 10
Using Memo Pad
In the Memo list screen, you can also begin typing to create a new memo.
The first letter is automatically capitalized and begins your new memo. If you
have a memo open, you can press Command Stroke
+ N.
TIP
3.
Enter the text that you want to appear in the memo.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Reviewing memos
The first line of a memo appears in the Memo list. This makes it easy to locate and
review your memos.
To review a memo:
1.
In the Memo list, select the text of the memo.
You can also select, review, and move between memos with the navigator.
See “Using the navigator” in Chapter 3 for details.
TIP
Select a memo
to review
2.
Review or edit the text in the memo.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Using Memo Pad menus
Memo Pad menus are shown here for your reference, and Memo Pad features that
are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
The Record and Options menus differ depending on whether you’re displaying the
Memo list or an individual memo.
110
Using Memo Pad menus
Record menus
Memo list
Memo screen
Send Category
Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to send all
records in the selected category to another device. The options
available depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Send Memo
Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to send the
selected memo to another device. The options available depend
on the software installed on your handheld.
Options menus
Memo list
Memo screen
Preferences
Displays the Memo Preferences dialog box, where you define
the sort order for memos.
About Memo Pad
Shows version information for Memo Pad.
111
Chapter 10
112
Using Memo Pad
CHAPTER 11
Using Palm™ Mobile
Palm™ Mobile is a fast and simple way to use your handheld to make and
receive calls. The Mobile features differ depending on your wireless service
provider. Use Palm Mobile to do the following:
■
Dial a number in a multitude of ways, such as from the keypad, or by using
speed dial, call history, or your Address Book.
■
Answer a second call while automatically placing the current caller on hold.
■
Retrieve voicemail.
■
Make and manage a conference call.
■
Retrieve Caller ID information from your Address Book.
■
View a history list of your last 20 missed, incoming, and received calls.
■
Create call reminders to help you follow up on calls.
■
Quickly access a list of frequently called numbers.
■
Attach notes to the Address Book entry of the person you are speaking with.
NOTE The Mobile features available on your handheld depend on your contract with
your wireless service provider.
IMPORTANT Whenever you use the wireless features of your handheld, please
observe the guidelines or prohibitions on the use of wireless devices in your current
location. For example, when you are on an airplane, do not turn on your radio at
times when government or airline regulations prohibit the use of cellular phones. You
can, of course, use all other applications of your handheld in accordance with airline
regulations for electronic devices.
113
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
Using your hands-free headset
Your handheld functions as a mobile phone using a hands-free headset. The
headset enables you to answer and end calls.
The headset cable connects to the jack at the upper-left of the handheld. Once the
jack is connected and the earpiece speaker is placed in your ear, you can answer
and end calls by using the button on the headset microphone.
The button on the headset microphone changes function according to the call
status:
Mobile radio off
Short press: Opens Palm Mobile and cycles through screens.
or
Mobile radio on— Long press: Continuous cycling through Palm Mobile screens.
no calls
Mobile radio on— Short press: Answers call.
phone ringing
Long press: Ignores the call
and sends the call to voicemail.
Mobile radio on— Short press: If you are currently in another application, returns
active call in
you to Palm Mobile Active Call screen. If you are in Palm
session
Mobile, cycles to the next application screen.
Long press: Ends
currently active call.
Mobile radio on— Short press: If you are currently in another application, returns
active call in
you to Palm Mobile Active Call screen. If you are in Palm
session and
Mobile, cycles to the next application screen.
phone is ringing
Long press: Ignores
the call and sends the call to voicemail.
NOTE If you enable the keylock option, the headset button locks with the keypad.
However, it automatically unlocks when you receive an incoming call. It locks again
after your call until you manually unlock the keypad. See “Keyboard preferences” in
Chapter 20.
114
Using your hands-free headset
To use the hands-free headset:
1.
Insert the headset connector into the voice jack.
Microphone
Button
Earpiece speaker
Headset jack
2.
Place the earpiece speaker comfortably in your ear.
Earpiece speaker
Microphone
When you have an active call, you can adjust the speaker volume on your headset
using the Volume dialog box.
To adjust the volume during an active call:
1.
Perform one of the following:
– Press Function
+ Menu
, and then select Volume.
– When a call is active, press Up or Down on the navigator.
115
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
2.
When the Headset Volume screen appears, adjust the volume using the slider
or navigator.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
You can adjust the call volume even when the screen is not lit during a call.
Press the navigator, and the Headset Volume screen opens for a few seconds
so that you can adjust the volume.
TIP
Opening Palm Mobile
You can open Palm Mobile from the Applications Launcher or from the headset.
NOTE The Mobile features available on your handheld depend on your contract with
your wireless service provider. Some wireless service providers require a PIN to turn
on the mobile radio. Check with your wireless service provider for more information.
To open Palm Mobile from the Mobile icon in Applications Launcher:
1.
Press the Home
.
2.
Tap the Palm Mobile icon
.
GPRS coverage
Signal strength indicator
Screen icons
Numeric display
Mobile main screen
Active Call screen
Call History screen
Name of currently active
profile
Icon area
Call being forwarded
Vibrate on
Ringer off
Voicemail message
Roaming
116
Answering a phone call
To open Palm Mobile from the headset:
■
If the headset is not plugged in, insert the headset plug into the headset jack on
your handheld.
The Palm Mobile application automatically opens. If the mobile radio is not on,
the mobile radio automatically turns on.
■
If the headset is already plugged in, press the button on the headset.
See “Using your hands-free headset” earlier in this chapter for more
information on using the headset button.
Answering a phone call
When you receive a call, a notification message is displayed with any caller
information that is available.
To answer a phone call:
1.
Do one of the following:
– If your headset is not plugged in, insert the headset plug into the voice jack
on your handheld and place the speaker in your ear. Palm Mobile
automatically opens and answers the phone call.
– If your headset is plugged in when the call notification arrives, tap Answer.
Tap anywhere onscreen to silence the ringer
Tap Answer to answer the call
Tap Ignore to send the call directly to your
voicemail
2.
Begin communicating.
Tap End to end call
Tap name to go to Call Action screen
117
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
Dialing a number from the keypad
You can dial a number using the keypad the same as you would using a mobile
phone.
To dial a number from the keypad:
1.
Tap the telephone number on the keypad.
TIP
You can also enter the telephone number using your keyboard.
Digits are displayed
in the numeric
display.
Enter phone number
and Tap Dial.
Tap Clear to delete digit from
numeric display. Tap and hold
to clear entire numeric
display.
Tap and hold the 0 key to add
a + (plus) to the number
sequence.
2.
Tap Dial.
The number is dialed and added to the Call History list. You are ready to
communicate.
Redialing the most recently dialed number
You can quickly redial the most recently dialed number.
To redial the most recently dialed number:
1.
Tap Dial when the numeric display has no digits.
Numeric display
has no digits
118
Tap Dial
Dialing a number from a SIM phone book
2.
Tap Dial.
The number is dialed and added to the Call History list. You are now ready to
communicate.
The most recently
dialed number is
displayed
Tap Dial
If you need to enter digits during the phone call to access voicemail or an
automated phone-answering system, press the Keypad icon and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the digits. Also, you can enter the numbers or characters from the
keyboard.
TIP
Tap to access keypad
Dialing a number from a SIM phone book
You can dial numbers from phone books on your SIM card.
To dial a number from a SIM phone book:
1.
Tap Dial from SIM Card from the Mobile menu.
2.
Tap the Phone books pick list, and then select a phone book.
3.
Tap a number.
4.
Tap Dial.
119
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
Managing a phone call
When the phone call is answered or when you place a call, the Active Call screen
is displayed. If you select the name or number, you go to the Call Action screen
where you can do the following:
■
Save the number to the Address Book.
■
Add an Address Book note.
■
Set a redial reminder.
■
Disconnect the call.
To manage a phone call:
1.
Tap the name.
2.
Tap the appropriate button.
Number not found in Address Book
Number in Address Book
You can use any of the following features:
120
Disconnect call
Disconnects only the current selected call, not the calls on
hold.
Save to Address
Book
Opens the Save to Address Book screen. The Save to Address
Book button changes to Create Note if the number was found
in your Address Book when the call was received or placed.
Create note
Attaches a note to the Address Book entry.
Set Redial
Reminder
Opens the Set Redial Reminder dialog box. See “Creating a
redial reminder” later in this chapter.
Using conference calling
Answering call waiting
If you receive a call while you are on the line with another caller, you can place the
current caller on hold and answer the other call. You can also ignore the call and
allow it to go to voicemail.
To answer call waiting:
■
Tap Answer.
The original caller is put on hold, and the new caller becomes the active caller.
Tap Swap to
change the active
callers
Tap Answer
Using conference calling
Conference calling enables you to have from two to five active callers conversing
together.
NOTE The Mobile features available on your handheld depend on your contract with
your wireless service provider.
Creating a conference call
You can create a conference call by conferencing the current callers, or you can dial
and add callers.
To create a conference call with an active caller and callers on hold:
■
Tap Conference.
Tap
Conference
121
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
To place a conference call:
1.
Tap Add Call.
Tap Add Call to add more callers
2.
Enter the number and tap Dial.
Enter number
3.
Tap Dial
Once the number appears as the Active caller, tap Conference.
Tap
Conference
Managing a conference call
Palm Mobile enables you to manage all parts of a conference call. You can do the
following:
122
■
Have a private conversation with one of the callers while the other callers are
put on hold
■
Mute the microphone on your earbud cable
Using conference calling
■
Disconnect one participant from the conference call
■
Disconnect all participants from the conference call
To have a private conversation with one caller:
1.
Tap name.
Tap name
2.
Tap Private Conversation.
Tap Private
Conversation
3.
Tap Conference to end the private conversation and return to the conference
call.
To disconnect one caller:
1.
Tap name.
Tap name
123
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
2.
Tap Disconnect Call.
Tap Disconnect
Call
To add a caller to a current conference call:
1.
Tap Add Call.
Tap Add Call to add caller
2.
Enter the number and tap Dial.
3.
Once the number appears as the Active caller, tap Conference to add callers on
hold.
To end the conference call:
■
Tap End.
Tap End
124
Transferring a call
To mute the conference call:
■
Tap Mute.
Tap Mute
Transferring a call
When you have one call on hold, you can transfer it to another call that you either
make or receive.
To transfer a call to another number:
1.
Place the first call on hold.
2.
Answer an incoming call or make an outgoing call.
3.
Press Function
4.
From the Mobile menu, select Transfer call.
+ Menu
.
Retrieving voicemail
NOTE Your wireless service provider determines your voicemail properties, such as
mailbox size, the number of rings before diverting a call to voicemail, and how to
record your voicemail message. Contact your wireless service provider for
information on setting up your voicemail.
When a voicemail message is waiting, a notification message is displayed. You can
retrieve your voicemail messages directly from the notification message or from
the Palm Mobile application. Your voicemail access number is configured in the
Mobile preferences screen. See “Keyboard preferences” in Chapter 20 for more
information.
125
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
To retrieve voicemail from a notification message:
■
Tap Go To.
Your voicemail number is dialed.
Tap Go To to dial voicemail number
To retrieve voicemail message from Palm Mobile:
■
Press and hold the 1 key.
Your voicemail number is dialed.
Press and
hold the 1 key
to retrieve
voicemail
Voicemail icon indicates
voicemail message
available
If you need to enter digits during the phone call to access voicemail or an
automated phone answering system, press the Keypad icon and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the digits. Also, you can enter the numbers or characters from the
keyboard.
TIP
Tap to access keypad
126
Using speed dial
Using speed dial
Speed-dialing enables you to quickly dial your most commonly used numbers.
The three speed-dial categories enable you to save 24 numbers.
Creating a speed-dial entry
You can use your Address Book to create a speed-dial entry.
To create a speed dial entry:
1.
Tap Speed.
Tap Speed
2.
Tap a category and then tap an empty speed-dial button.
Tap category
Tap empty speed-dial button
3.
Enter a name and telephone number.
You can type the letter “p” or a comma (,) to add a two second pause.
Enter name and number
Tap OK to add entry
127
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
The name appears on the speed-dial button.
Entry added to speed-dial list
5.
Tap Done.
Dialing a speed-dial entry
Before you can dial speed-dial entries, you must create them. For information on
creating speed-dial entries, see “Creating a speed-dial entry” earlier in this chapter.
To dial a speed-dial entry:
1.
Tap Speed.
Tap Speed
2.
Tap a category and then tap one of the speed-dial buttons.
The number is dialed and added to the Call History list. You are now ready to
communicate.
Tap a category for other speed-dial lists
Tap a speed-dial button to dial the number
128
Using speed dial
Editing a speed-dial entry
To edit a speed-dial entry:
1.
Tap Speed.
Tap Speed
2.
Tap Edit.
Tap Edit
3.
Tap an entry.
Tap an entry
129
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
4.
Edit the entry.
Edit name and number
Tap Lookup to go to the lookup option
Tap Clear to delete current entry
Tap OK to change entry
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Using the Call History list
Your handheld keeps a list of 20 of the most recently dialed numbers. If the number
is an Address Book entry, the name from the Address Book entry appears in the
Call History list.
You can also add an entry from Call History to your Address Book.
Dialing a number from the Call History list
You can dial a number using the Call History list.
To dial a number from the Call History list:
1.
Tap the Call History icon
.
Tap Call History icon
2.
Tap an entry from the list.
Tap Show pick list to specify list
Tap entry
Number or name if number is an Address Book entry
Indicates incoming or outgoing call
130
Using redial reminders
3.
Tap Call.
Tap Call
Using redial reminders
A redial reminder notifies you of an appointment you set to make a call. The
reminder gives you the standard option to make the call, snooze, or go to the
Reminders menu.
Creating a redial reminder
You can create a redial reminder from the Call Actions screen and from the Mobile
dialog box.
To create a redial reminder:
1.
Tap Set Reminder or Set Redial Reminder.
131
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
2.
Set the date, time, and alarm.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Managing redial reminders
You can view and edit your redial reminders.
To view and edit the redial reminder list:
132
1.
Press Function
+ Menu
2.
Select Reminders.
3.
Edit your redial reminders.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
.
, or tap Done.
Managing profiles
Managing profiles
The phone profiles store settings for call diverting and the ringer. You can set up to
six profiles.
To change your currently active call profile:
1.
Tap Profile.
Tap Profile
Name of currently active profile
2.
Tap one of the profiles.
Tap
Profile
Ringer off
Vibrate on
To edit your call profiles:
1.
Tap Profile.
133
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
2.
Tap Edit Profiles.
3.
Tap a profile.
Call forwarding on
Vibrate on
Ringer off
4.
Edit the profile.
Car and Cradle profile
All other profiles
You can edit the following settings:
134
Name
The name of your profile. Car and Cradle profile names cannot
be changed.
Volume
Adjusts the volume level or turns off the ringer.
Tune
Sets the tune of the ringer. There are multiple tunes and ring
styles to choose from. When you make a selection, the tune
plays.
Vibrate
Sets the vibrator option to on, off, or vibrate then ring.
Managing ring tunes
Forward to
Sets the call forwarding option to off, forward to voicemail, or
other. If you select other, a field appears where you can enter the
phone number you want to forward the call to.
Activate in
Cradle
Car and Cradle profiles only: Auto-activates the profile when the
handheld is placed in the cradle. When the handheld is removed
from the cradle, the original profile is restored.
Default
Changes the options to the default settings in each list.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Managing ring tunes
You can choose a ringer tune from a tune list for each of your profiles (see
“Managing profiles” earlier in this chapter), and you can delete unwanted tunes.
To delete a ring tone:
1.
Tap a ring tune.
Tap to select ring tune
Tap Delete Tune
2.
Tap Delete Tune.
3.
Tap Delete.
Using Palm Mobile menus
The Palm Mobile menus are shown here for your reference, and menu features that
are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
135
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
Mobile menu
Clear Call History
Clears the list of calls you have recently made.
Enable TTY Mode
Enables calling using Text Telephony (TTY), a standard designed
to enable hearing-impaired callers to use wireless technology.
When a SIM card is not installed, this option is always enabled,
provided that your wireless service provider supports it. This
option appears in the menu only when it is not enabled; enabling
it removes it as a menu item. When you place a call in TTY mode,
the headset volume is automatically changed to a preset level,
and the TTY status icon is displayed in the icon area.
Mobile On
Mobile Off
Turns the mobile radio on or off.
Options menu
Call Settings
Call Timer
136
Opens the Call Settings preferences screen where you can do
the following:
■
Set call waiting. See “Enabling call waiting” in Chapter 20.
■
Conceal your number. See “Concealing your number” in
Chapter 20.
■
Divert your calls. See “Diverting your calls” in Chapter 20.
Opens the Call Timer preferences screen where you can
track your phone time. See “Tracking your phone time” in
Chapter 20.
Using Palm Mobile menus
Current Status
Opens the Current Status preferences screen where you can
check the status of your connection. See “Checking your
current status” in Chapter 20.
GPRS Meter
Opens the GPRS preferences screen where you can check the
status of your connection. See “Checking your GPRS network
usage” in Chapter 20.
Network
Opens the Network preferences screen where you can do the
following:
Security
About Mobile
■
Customize your list of network carriers. See “Setting your
network selection search mode” in Chapter 20.
■
View and customize your preferred network list.
See “Viewing and editing your preferred networks list” in
Chapter 20.
■
Set an option for the network to automatically update date,
time, and time zone settings on your handheld and in
mobile applications.
Opens the Security preferences screen where you can do the
following:
■
Lock your mobile radio until a valid PIN code is entered.
See “Setting PIN for mobile power on” in Chapter 20.
■
Bar or block different classes of incoming and outgoing calls.
See “Setting call barring” in Chapter 20.
■
Set Fixed Number Dialing (FND) so that only preprogrammed phone numbers in the FND phone book can be
dialed. See “Setting Fixed Number Dialing (FND)” in
Chapter 20.
Shows version information for Palm Mobile.
137
Chapter 11 Using Palm™ Mobile
138
CHAPTER 12
Using Note Pad
Note Pad provides a place to take notes in your own handwriting. You can
use Note Pad to do everything you might do with a piece of paper and a
pencil. Use Note Pad to do the following:
■
Take notes, draw a sketch, or write any kind of message directly on your
handheld screen. Later, you can enter this information into other applications.
■
Set an alarm to use your notes as reminder messages.
■
Assign notes to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical
groups.
■
Exchange notes with other devices that have Note Pad 2.0 installed and that use
SMS.
■
Use Palm™ Desktop software and HotSync® technology to copy and paste
notes into popular computer applications like Microsoft Word, or to send notes
as e-mail attachments.
To open Note Pad:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Select the Note Pad icon
.
139
Chapter 12 Using Note Pad
Creating a note
A record in Note Pad is called a note. You can assign notes to categories and mark
them private as described in Chapter 4. This section covers how to create a note.
To create a new note:
1.
Tap New.
Enter title here
Write
information
here
Pen selector
Eraser
2.
Write the information directly on the handheld screen.
Tap the pen selector to select a different pen width, or select the eraser to remove
unwanted strokes.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
To clear the screen:
1.
Press Function
+ Menu
.
2.
Select Edit, and then select Clear Note.
Reviewing notes
The note title and the date you created the note appear in the Note Pad list. If you
did not assign a title to your note, the time you created the note appears as the note
title. This makes it easy to locate and review your notes.
To review a note:
1.
In the Note Pad list, select the note title.
You can also select, review, and move between notes with the navigator.
See “Using the navigator” in Chapter 3 for details.
TIP
Tap arrows to scroll to
next and previous notes
Select a
note to view
140
Changing Note Pad color settings
2.
Review or edit the contents of the note.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Changing Note Pad color settings
By default, your notes appear with a white “paper” background, and the ink from
the pen is blue. You can change the color of both the paper and the ink from the
pen. Your color selections apply to all your notes. You cannot change the color
settings for individual notes.
To set the colors:
1.
In the Note Pad list, press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
+ Menu
+ R.
, and then select Preferences on the
2.
Tap Color.
3.
Tap Pen, and then tap the color of ink you want to use.
4.
Tap Paper, and then tap the color of paper you want to use.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Setting an alarm for a note
You can set an alarm for a specific time and date to remind you to follow up on
a note.
To set an alarm for a note:
1.
Tap the note to which you want to assign an alarm.
2.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
+ A.
+ Menu
, and then select Alarm on the
141
Chapter 12 Using Note Pad
3.
Tap the Date box.
Tap here to select year
Tap here to select month
Tap here to select date
4.
Tap the year, month, and date you want the alarm to sound.
After you tap the date, the Set Alarm dialog box reappears.
5.
Tap the Time box.
6.
Tap the hour and minute columns to select the time you want the alarm to occur.
Tap here to
select minutes
Tap here to
select hour
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
8.
When the alarm goes off and the reminder message appears onscreen, do one of
the following:
– Press Function
+ Enter , or tap OK to permanently dismiss the
reminder and return to the current screen.
– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. An
attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind
you of the pending alarm, and the reminder message appears again in
five minutes. When the reminder message reappears, the current time
appears in the Reminder bar and the note title appears on the screen.
142
Using Note Pad menus
– If you did not title the note, the time the note was created appears on the
screen.
– Tap Go To to open Note Pad. Note Pad will open and display the note
associated with the alarm.
Using Note Pad menus
Note Pad menus are shown here for your reference, and Note Pad features that are
not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
The Record menu is the same when you’re viewing the Note Pad list and an
individual note. The Options menu differs depending on whether you’re viewing
the Note Pad list or an individual note.
Record menu
Send Category
Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send all records in the selected category to another device. The
options available depend on the software installed on your
handheld.
Send Note
Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send the selected note to another device. The options available
depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Compatibility
Displays the Compatibility dialog box, where you can choose to
beam notes to a previous version of Note Pad.
143
Chapter 12 Using Note Pad
Options menus
Note Pad list
144
Note screen
Preferences
Displays the Note Pad Preferences dialog box, where you
define the pen and paper color, the sort order for notes, and the
alarm sound.
Details
Displays the Note Details dialog box, where you assign a
category and privacy option for a note.
About Note Pad
Shows version information for Note Pad.
CHAPTER 13
Using SIM Services
SIM Services enables you to access applications stored on the SIM card.
These applications are provided by your wireless service provider. The
types of applications differ depending on your wireless service provider.
The following are examples of the kinds of applications that can be
provided:
■
Access your bank account balance.
■
Remind you of your number.
■
Manage your network preferences, like prepaid account and Multi-SIM
settings.
■
Request information, such as local traffic information, weather forecast, current
exchange rates, and stock values.
■
Play games.
■
Receive notification when a friend is in the vicinity.
■
Manage your electronic purse and buy wirelessly.
■
Find the nearest movie theater.
Contact your wireless service provider for information on which
services are available.
IMPORTANT
Accessing a service
You can access the services provided by your wireless service provider.
IMPORTANT
Instructions on how to use a service is provided by your wireless service
provider.
145
Chapter 13 Using SIM Services
To access a service:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the Services icon
3.
Do one of the following:
.
– Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll through services, and then press
Select to launch a service.
– Tap a service and tap Launch.
Using the SIM Services menu
The SIM Services menu is shown here for your reference, and the SIM Services
feature that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Options menu
About SIM
Services
146
Shows version information for SIM Services.
CHAPTER 14
Using SMS
The SMS application enables you to send, receive, and forward short text
messages using your handheld. The messages are sent to a mobile phone,
using the phone number as an address.
Most GSM mobile phone service providers have supported Short Message Service
technology for quite a while, and billions of SMS messages are exchanged each
month. Use SMS to do the following:
■
Send messages to mobile phones.
■
Review and forward SMS messages.
■
Place a phone call to a phone number included in an SMS message.
■
Use the keyboard on your handheld to quickly create SMS messages.
■
Receive records associated with your other handheld applications. For
example, your boss can send you a Date Book event for a meeting you need to
attend. When you receive the message, you can choose to add it to your Date
Book or view the raw data as a text message.
IMPORTANT Whenever you use the wireless features of your handheld, please
observe the guidelines or prohibitions on the use of wireless devices in your current
location. For example, when you are on an airplane, do not turn on your radio at
times when government or airline regulations prohibit the use of cellular phones. You
can, of course, use all other applications of your handheld in accordance with airline
regulations for electronic devices.
147
Chapter 14 Using SMS
To open SMS:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the SMS icon
.
Creating messages
When you create a message, the title bar indicates the number of characters the
message contains. If a message exceeds 160 characters, it is split into multiple
messages. When the recipient receives those messages, they may be reassembled
into a single message (provided the recipient’s SMS software supports assembling
multi-part messages). Otherwise, they will appear as two messages.
To create a message:
1.
From any SMS list view, tap New.
Tap To
Tap New
2.
Tap To, and then do one of the following:
– Select a name from the quicklist of recent message recipients.
With the cursor in the To field, press Select on the navigator to open the
list of recent recipients.
TIP
148
Creating messages
– Tap Lookup, and then tap the recipient’s name.
– Tap Add.
To send a message to someone who isn’t listed in your Address Book,
enter their mobile phone number on the To line. The mobile phone number
must be on a compatible SMS network–for example, a GSM network.
TIP
3.
Enter the message text.
4.
Tap Send or press Command Stroke
Outbox to send the message later.
+ E to send the message now, or tap
NOTE Tapping Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox.
It sends only the current message.
Tap Send
Tap Outbox
149
Chapter 14 Using SMS
Sending and receiving messages
You can send all the messages in your Outbox and retrieve all the new messages at
the same time.
To send and receive messages at the same time:
■
Do one of the following:
– From any SMS list view, tap Send & Check.
– If you have assigned one of the application buttons to open SMS, press and
hold the SMS application button for two seconds. See “Buttons preferences”
in Chapter 20 for more information on assigning application buttons.
Tap Send & Check
After the transmission finishes, a message appears, indicating the number of new
messages you received.
To send all messages in your Outbox:
■
Do one of the following:
– From message view, press Command Stroke
– From list view, press Command Stroke
– From any view, press Function
Message menu.
+ Menu
+ E.
+ S.
, and then select Send on the
To download all messages:
■
From the list view, do one of the following:
– Press Command Stroke
+ H.
– From any view, press Function
the Message menu.
150
+ Menu
, and then select Check on
Viewing messages
Viewing messages
SMS stores your messages in five separate categories:
Inbox
Stores downloaded messages.
Outbox
Stores messages waiting to be sent.
Trash
Stores messages you deleted. You can restore deleted messages to
their original category.
Archive
Files messages you want to keep.
Draft
Stores messages you want to change or review before you send
them.
In the Inbox and Outbox, icons appear next to the message to indicate whether it
has been read or sent. In the Inbox, additional icons indicate whether the message
is incomplete and whether it contains data other than text that requires another
application to read it.
If you have assigned one of the application buttons to open SMS, you can press
the SMS application button to cycle through the categories. Also, pressing and
holding the assigned button allows you to quickly perform a Check and Send
operation. See “Buttons preferences” in Chapter 20 for more information on
assigning application buttons.
TIP
To view text messages in your Inbox:
1.
Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2.
Select Inbox.
Unread
message
Read
message
Message contains data
from another application
Incomplete
message
151
Chapter 14 Using SMS
3.
Tap the message you want to view.
4.
Tap one of the following:
Done:
Returns to the list view.
Reply: Creates a message to the sender and copies any selected text into the new
message.
Delete:
5.
Moves the message to the Trash category.
(Optional) If the message contains a phone number, the number will appear in
blue, underlined text. Tap the phone number and select one of the following:
Dial:
Opens the Mobile application and places a call to the phone number.
Save:
Saves the number to Address Book.
SMS:
Opens a new message screen.
To open SMS attachments:
152
1.
Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2.
Select Inbox.
3.
Tap the message you want to view.
4.
Do one of the following:
, or tap Yes to add the data to the appropriate
– Press Function
application.
+ Enter
– Press Function
message.
+ Backspace
or tap No to view the raw data as a text
Viewing messages
To view messages in your Outbox or Archive categories:
1.
Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2.
Select either Outbox or Archive.
Unsent
message
Sent
message
3.
Tap the message you want to view.
4.
Tap one of the following:
Done:
Edit:
Returns to the list view.
Opens the message so you can modify the contents.
Delete:
Moves the message to the Trash category.
To view messages in your Trash:
1.
Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2.
Select Trash.
3.
Tap the message you want to view.
4.
Tap one of the following:
Done:
Returns to the list view.
Restore:
Moves the message back to the category it was in when you deleted it.
153
Chapter 14 Using SMS
Working with draft messages
When you create a message, you can save it as a draft message. SMS does not send
draft messages when you transmit the messages in your Outbox. You can store
draft messages for as long as you like and review and edit them before you send
them.
To place a message in the Draft category:
1.
Create or open the message you want to store in the Draft category.
2.
From the Message view, press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Message menu.
+ Menu
+ D.
, and then select Draft on the
To view or edit draft messages:
1.
Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner.
2.
Select Draft.
3.
Tap the message you want to edit.
4.
In the message view, tap Edit.
5.
Edit the message.
6.
Tap one of the following:
Send:
Sends the message now.
Outbox:
Moves the message to the Outbox to be sent later.
Cancel: Opens a dialog box that asks if you want to save the message in the
Draft category.
7.
154
Press Function
+ Enter , or tap Yes to keep your changes and return the
message to the Draft category. Press Function
+ Backspace
or tap No to
delete the message.
Adding a signature to a message
Adding a signature to a message
A signature is standard text that appears at the end of a message. You can define
your own personal signature and then add it to a message by using menu
commands.
To define a signature:
1.
Press Command Stroke
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
2.
Enter your signature.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
+ Menu
, and then select Preferences on the
, or tap OK.
To add your signature to a message:
1.
Create or edit the message where you want to add your signature.
2.
From the message view, press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
the Options menu.
+ Menu
+ Z.
, and then select Add signature on
Sending data from another application
In addition to creating text messages, you can create a message that contains data
from an application on your handheld. For example, you can send a Date Book
event to someone to remind them to add a meeting to their calendar. If the recipient
receives the message on a handheld, they can transfer the message directly to the
appropriate application. If the recipient receives the message on another device,
the data appears as text.
To send data from another application:
1.
Open the record you want to send.
2.
Press Function
+ Menu
.
155
Chapter 14 Using SMS
3.
Tap Record, and then tap Send Event, Send Address, Send Item, Send Note, or
Send Memo (based on the application).
4.
Tap the To pick list to select from a list of recent recipients, or tap Lookup to
select a number from your Address Book.
5.
Tap Send.
Setting preferences
The SMS Preferences screen enables you to customize several of the settings in the
SMS application.
To view or change SMS Preferences:
1.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
2.
156
+ R.
+ Menu
, and then select Preferences on the
Change any of the following options:
Sort by
Determines how messages in the list views are sorted. Tap the
pick list to select from the following options: Alphabetic, Date,
Phone Number, and Status.
Show Date
Indicates whether dates appear in the list view. To display dates,
select this check box.
Setting preferences
Alert Sound
Indicates whether a new messages triggers an alert and which
alert it triggers. To trigger a new message alert, select this check
box. Tap the pick list to select one of the following sounds:
Alarm, Alert, Bird, Concerto, Phone, Sci-fi, or Wake up.
Confirm
Deleted
Message
Indicates whether a confirmation message appears each time
you delete a message. To display confirmation messages, select
this check box.
Delete After
Transfer
Indicates whether data messages are deleted after you accept the
data in the appropriate application. To keep data messages after
you transfer them to the application, deselect this check box.
Signature
Enables you to enter a personal signature that you can add to
your messages.
3.
Tap Details.
4.
Change any of the following options:
Leave
Messages on
SIM
Determines whether the current messages remain on the SIM
card after they are downloaded to the SMS application. This
option affects only the messages currently residing on the SIM
card and not newly received messages.
Force GSM
text
Determines whether to send 7-bit data or 8-bit data. Seven-bit
data is the most compatible with phones. When the check box is
selected, only 7-bit data is sent.
Services
Tap the pick list to select from the following options: Force GPRS,
Force GSM, Pref. GPRS, Pref. GSM. When a service is forced,
only that service is used. When a service is preferred, that service
is used first and, if necessary, is switched to the other service.
Return
Receipt
Determines whether you receive receipt confirmation notices.
Tap the pick list to select from the following options: None and
Requested.
157
Chapter 14 Using SMS
Warn Over
Determines whether you receive a warning when multi-part
messages exceed more than the specified number of parts. Tap
the pick list to select from the following options: 1 part, 3 parts,
5 parts, 10 parts, 50 parts, and Never warn.
Expires
Indicates how long the server keeps attempting delivery of a
message. Tap the pick list to select from the following options:
4 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 2 Weeks, 1 Month, and Max. Time.
Message
Center
Indicates whether your handheld obtains your mobile phone
service provider’s Message Center number directly from the SIM
card, or whether you need to enter the number manually. Tap the
pick list to select either Auto or Custom.
TIP
To restore all of these options to the original settings, tap Default.
5.
Press Function
box.
+ Enter
, or tap OK to close the Message Details dialog
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Using SMS menus
SMS menus are shown here for your reference, and application features that are not
explained elsewhere are described here. For information about Edit commands,
see Chapter 4.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Message menu
New Message view
(when creating a message)
List view
158
Send
Sends all messages in the Outbox.
Check
Retrieves all messages.
Empty Trash
Prompts you to confirm that you want to permanently remove all
messages in the Trash category from your handheld.
Clear Folder
Moves all messages in the current folder to the Trash.
Using SMS menus
Options menu
List view
New Message view
(when creating a message)
Phone Lookup
Opens the Phone Lookup dialog box, where you can select a
mobile phone number where you want to send a message.
Font
Opens the Font dialog box, where you can choose various fonts for
the list and message views.
Clear To list
Clears the recent recipients list.
About SMS
Shows version information for the SMS application.
159
Chapter 14 Using SMS
160
CHAPTER 15
Using To Do List
To Do List is a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize the things
that you have to do. Use To Do List for the following:
■
Make a quick and convenient list of things to do.
■
Assign a priority level to each task.
■
Assign a due date for any or all of your To Do List items.
■
Assign To Do List items to categories so that you can organize and view them
in logical groups.
■
Sort your To Do List items by due date, priority level, or category.
■
Attach notes to individual To Do List items for a description or clarification of
the task.
To open To Do List:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the To Do icon
.
161
Chapter 15 Using To Do List
Creating list items
A To Do List item is a reminder of some task that you have to complete. A record
in To Do List is called an item.
To create a To Do List item:
1.
Do one of the following:
– Tap New.
– If no To Do List item is currently selected, begin typing.
New To Do
item
Tap New
2.
Enter the text of the To Do List item. The text can be longer than one line.
3.
Tap anywhere onscreen to deselect the To Do List item.
Setting priority
You can use priority setting for items to arrange the tasks in your To Do List
according to their importance or urgency. The default setting for the To Do List is
to arrange items by priority and due date, with priority 1 items at the top. If you
have a number of items in your list, changing an item’s priority setting may move
its position in the list.
When you create a new To Do List item, its priority is automatically set to level 1,
the highest (most important) level. If you select another item first, however, the
item you create appears beneath the selected item and is given the same priority as
the selected item.
162
Checking off a To Do List item
To set the priority of a To Do List item:
1.
Tap the Priority number on the left side of the To Do List item.
Tap here
Select
priority
2.
Select the Priority number that you want to set (1 is most important).
Checking off a To Do List item
You can check off a To Do List item to indicate that you’ve completed it. You can
set the To Do List to record the date that you complete the To Do item, and you can
choose to show or hide completed items. See “Setting To Do Preferences” later in
this chapter.
To check off a To Do List item:
■
Tap the check box on the left side of the item.
You can also highlight the item you want to check off, and then press
Select on the navigator.
TIP
Completed
To Do item
163
Chapter 15 Using To Do List
Changing To Do List item details
The To Do Item Details dialog box enables you to change settings for individual
items.
To display the To Do Item Details dialog box:
1.
Tap the text of the item whose details you want to change.
TIP
2.
You can also select an item with the navigator.
Tap Details.
Setting a due date
You can associate a due date with any To Do List item. You can also sort the items
that appear in the list based on their due dates.
To set a due date for a To Do List item:
1.
In the Details dialog box, tap No Date to open the Due Date pick list.
Tap here
2.
3.
Tap the date that you want to assign the item:
Today
Assigns the current date.
Tomorrow
Assigns tomorrow’s date.
One week later
Assigns the date exactly one week from the current date.
No Date
Removes the due date from the item.
Choose date
Opens the date selector, where you can choose any date
that you want for the item.
Tap OK.
If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the To Do Show options
dialog box, you can tap directly on the due date in the To Do List to open the
pick list shown in step 2.
TIP
164
Setting To Do Preferences
Setting To Do Preferences
The To Do Preferences dialog box enables you to control the appearance of To Do
List and of To Do items in the Date Book Agenda view.
To change the Preferences settings:
1.
In To Do List, tap Show.
2.
Select any of the following settings:
Show Completed
Items
Displays your completed items in the To Do List. If you turn
off this setting, your To Do items disappear from the list when
you complete (check) them.
Items that no longer appear on the list because you turn off
this setting have not been deleted. They are still in the
memory of your handheld. Purge completed items to remove
them from memory.
3.
Show Only Due
Items
Shows only the items that are currently due, are past due, or
have no due date specified. When this setting is active, items
that are not yet due do not appear in the list until their due
dates.
Record
Completion Date
Replaces the due date with the actual date when you
complete (check) the item. If you do not assign a due date to
an item, the completion date still records when you complete
the item.
Show Due Dates
Displays the due dates associated with items in the To Do List
and displays an exclamation mark next to items that remain
incomplete after the due date passes.
Show Priorities
Shows the priority setting for each item.
Show Categories
Shows the category for each item.
Tap OK.
165
Chapter 15 Using To Do List
Using To Do List menus
To Do List menus are shown here for your reference, and To Do List features that
are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Record menu
Send Item
Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send the selected item to another device. The options available
depend on the software installed on your handheld.
Send Category
Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to
send all records in the selected category to another device. The
options available depend on the software installed on your
handheld.
Options menu
About To Do List
166
Shows version information for To Do List.
CHAPTER 16
Using Palm™ VersaMail™
Personal E-mail Software
With the VersaMail™ application, you can send, receive, and manage e-mail on
your handheld. This chapter describes how to set up different types of e-mail
accounts and explains how to use the many e-mail features in the VersaMail
application.
The VersaMail application version 2.5 is the newest offering in the line of Palm™
personal e-mail software applications. Formerly known as MultiMail® software,
the VersaMail 2.5 application contains new features that make sending and
receiving e-mail messages and managing e-mail accounts easier than ever.
VersaMail ™ application features
Key features of the VersaMail 2.5 application include the following:
■
Support for both the Palm™ Tungsten™ W navigator and keyboard,
simplifying data entry and navigation
■
Support for both the built-in GSM (dial-up) and GPRS (high-speed) radio in
your handheld, enabling wireless e-mail connectivity
NOTE If you want to use the built-in GPRS or GSM radio in your handheld to
make a network connection, you must set up GPRS or GSM data service with
your wireless service provider.
■
Enhanced use of color, fonts, styles, and user-selected display options
■
Basic HTML formatting display for e-mail messages received in HTML format
■
Increased number of file types supported for being sent and received as
attachments
■
Scheduled retrieval of new e-mail, with notification
■
Improved message-addressing capabilities
167
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Getting started with the VersaMail application
To start using the application, simply press the VersaMail button
handheld.
on your
If you are using a Windows computer, the Palm VersaMail HotSync® Conduit is
installed automatically when you install the Palm Desktop software. See
“Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop” later in this
chapter for information on using the conduit.
Synchronizing an existing username
If you plan to synchronize your Tungsten W handheld with an existing username
by performing a HotSync operation, you must do so before you enter your e-mail
account information in the VersaMail application. If you enter the e-mail account
information first and then synchronize your handheld to an existing username, the
e-mail account information you entered is overwritten.
Upgrading a MultiMail/VersaMail database
If you have previously used a Palm personal e-mail application such as MultiMail
SE or MultiMail Deluxe, or used version 2.0 of the VersaMail application, you can
upgrade your e-mail database for use with the VersaMail 2.5 application.
To upgrade an existing e-mail database for use with the VersaMail application:
168
1.
Perform a HotSync operation with a user profile that contains the existing
e-mail database. To do so, press the HotSync button , and then select a profile
that contains an e-mail database from the displayed list of users.
2.
Press the VersaMail button
3.
Tap Yes to accept the upgrade.
on your handheld.
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
With the VersaMail application, you can access e-mail accounts from providers
such as Earthlink or Yahoo. You may also access your corporate e-mail with the
appropriate mail server configuration. See “Using a corporate e-mail account”
later in this chapter for more information.
You can add up to eight e-mail accounts on your handheld by setting up a
connection to an e-mail service provider or synchronizing to a desktop e-mail
application. For example, if you have a Yahoo e-mail account with POP access, you
can create a new account in the VersaMail application and name that new account
Yahoo, so that you can send and receive e-mail on your handheld using your Yahoo
account.
Account and connection types
Two types of e-mail accounts are supported:
■
Network: You can send and receive e-mail directly to and from your handheld
by connecting with an e-mail service provider.
■
Synchronize Only (Windows computers only): You
can download, view, and
manage e-mail between the handheld and a desktop e-mail application, such as
Microsoft Outlook, by performing a HotSync operation using the cradle/cable.
You can’t send and receive messages wirelessly or with a modem for an account
of this type.
Using a network account, you can set up or access an e-mail account by using any
of the following connection methods:
■
Palm™ Bluetooth Card (sold separately) attached through the expansion card
slot connection to a mobile phone or local access point that is enabled with
Bluetooth technology
■
PalmModem® accessory (sold separately)
■
External modem sled (sold separately)
■
Infrared (IR) port on the handheld to infrared port on a mobile phone
■
Direct connection to a mobile phone by means of a physical cable
■
Handheld cradle connected to your desktop (Windows users only)
169
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Network e-mail account prerequisites
Before you can set up a network e-mail account, you must do the following:
■
Establish the e-mail account with an e-mail service provider. Common
providers include Internet service providers (ISPs) such as Earthlink and
Prodigy. A provider can also be a wireless GSM or GPRS carrier such as
VoiceStream, Cingular, or Vodafone.
■
Configure the service connection settings for this account on your handheld
using your handheld’s Network Preferences and Connection Preferences
screens. See “Connection preferences” in Chapter 20 for more information.
You must also have the appropriate prerequisite for the type of connection you
want to make, as follows.
Connection Type
Prerequisite
High-speed GPRS
Active GPRS service ordered from your
wireless carrier.
GSM dial-up
Active wireless service with a GSM carrier. If
you are using GPRS, the same carrier
generally provides both GSM and GPRS
service.
Note that some GSM carriers require you to
order a special data service (separate from
voice service) to make a network connection.
170
PalmModem accessory
PalmModem accessory.
External modem sled
Wireless modem accessory.
IR to IR phone
IR-enabled mobile phone.
Direct connection to a phone by
means of a physical cable
Connector cable and mobile phone.
Handheld cradle connected to
desktop
Handheld cradle and cable (Windows users
only).
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
Using a GPRS/GSM carrier
If you want to use the built-in GPRS or GSM radio on your handheld to make a
network connection, you must have (or you must set up) service with a GPRS or
GSM provider. Many providers give you an e-mail account with your monthly
data service subscription.
Using an ISP
If you are setting up a new e-mail account and have a well-known ISP such as
Earthlink or Mindspring, many of the required settings during the account setup
are automatically configured.
For other ISPs, you need the following information:
■
The protocol used for incoming mail, such as POP or IMAP
■
The name of the incoming mail server
■
The name of the outgoing mail (SMTP) server
■
Whether your e-mail account requires any security, such as SSL, APOP, or
ESMTP
■
Your e-mail address and password
■
The login script (if any) that you need for connecting to your ISP or mail server
NOTE Information about your e-mail account is available from the e-mail provider.
Depending on the type of e-mail service you have, you may be able to access this
information by going to the e-mail provider’s web site or by contacting the provider’s
customer support.
Using a corporate e-mail account
If you want to access e-mail on your handheld using your corporate e-mail
account, you create this account on your handheld in exactly the same way as any
other account (see “Network e-mail account prerequisites” later in this chapter),
with one exception: for a corporate e-mail account, you may need to set up a virtual
private network (VPN). See “VPNs” later in this chapter for information.
The following considerations apply when setting up a corporate e-mail account:
Username and
password
These might be your Windows NT or Windows 2000 username
and password, your Lotus Notes ID username and password,
or something else. Check with your company’s server
administrator to obtain the correct username and password.
The VersaMail 2.5 application provides strong 128-bit AES
encryption for your password.
Protocol
Most corporate mail servers use the IMAP protocol for
retrieving mail. In rare cases, your company server may use the
POP protocol. Check with your company’s server administrator
to verify the protocol.
Incoming and
outgoing mail
server settings
Check with your company’s server administrator to obtain
these settings.
171
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
See “Creating a network e-mail account” later in this chapter for steps for inputting
your username, password, protocol, and incoming and outgoing server settings
when you set up your corporate e-mail account.
With a corporate e-mail account, you can access the following types of mail servers,
among others:
■
Microsoft Exchange
■
Lotus Domino
■
Sun iPlanet
VPNs
If you want to access e-mail on your handheld using your corporate e-mail
account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your
handheld. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate mail server through the
company’s firewall (security layer). Without a VPN, you cannot “break through”
the firewall to gain access to the mail server.
If you plan to access your corporate e-mail account using the built-in GSM or GPRS
radio on your handheld, you must set up a VPN on your handheld. If you intend
to access your corporate e-mail account using some other connection method,
check with your company’s server administrator to see if a VPN is required to
access the corporate network.
NOTE The auto get mail with notification feature in the VersaMail application may
not work with a particular VPN connection. Also, you cannot use scheduled sending
retry of e-mail with accounts that use a VPN connection. See “Auto get mail with
notification” and “Send retry” later in this chapter for information.
Creating a network e-mail account
You create a new account in Account Setup, which guides you through the process.
To create a network e-mail account:
1.
172
Press Function
+ Menu
, select Accounts, and select Account Setup.
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
2.
Tap New.
3.
Enter the following:
Account Name
Enter a descriptive name for the account, such as “My Yahoo.”
Mail Service
Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which
you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not listed.
Protocol
Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most e-mail
providers use the POP protocol.)
If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you
selected, it displays the correct protocol.
4.
Tap Next.
Entering the account username and password
In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you enter the username and
password for this account. The VersaMail 2.5 application provides strong128-bit
AES encryption for your password.
173
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To enter the account username and password:
1.
Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is generally the part of
your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire
e-mail address.
2.
Tap the Password box, and then enter your password.
3.
Tap OK, or press Function
+Enter . The Password box displays the word
“Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.
4.
Tap Next.
Entering the name of the incoming and outgoing mail server
You need to verify your e-mail address for the account you are accessing, as well
as enter the names of the outgoing and incoming mail servers.
To enter mail server settings:
1.
If you chose a preconfigured service from the Mail Services pick list on the
Account Setup screen, the e-mail address field is completed automatically,
based on the username and mail service you entered. Check the address to
verify that it is correct, and edit it if necessary.
If you chose Other from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen,
enter the e-mail address for your account.
E-mail address will be filled in
automatically if you chose a
preconfigured mail service
Mail servers will be filled in
automatically if the VersaMail
application knows the names based
on the mail service you chose
2.
Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as
pop.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
174
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
3.
Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as
smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
4.
Tap Next.
5.
Do one of the following:
– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap
Done. This takes you to the Inbox of the account you set up. See “Getting,
sending, and managing e-mail” later in this chapter for information on
getting and sending e-mail.
– To set up additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of
procedures.
Setting mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account
The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether
your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.
To set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:
1.
(Optional) Select any of the following:
Get unread mail
NOTE The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread
mail only from the server. If you have a POP e-mail account,
the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the
server regardless of whether you have read them (for
example, on your desktop or on the web), and regardless of
whether this check box is selected.
For IMAP accounts, select Get unread mail ONLY to
download only unread mail to your handheld. If you don’t
choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all of your e-mail
messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to
your Inbox, including messages you have already read. To
get all mail (including mail you have already read) and not
just unread mail, deselect Get unread mail ONLY.
175
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Delete messages
on server
To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when
they are deleted in the VersaMail application, select the
Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in
VersaMail check box.
Leave mail on
server (POP
account only)
To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server
so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave
mail on server check box. For example, if you create an
account to receive e-mail from your Yahoo account and select
this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still visible the next time
you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.
Port Number
The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and to 143
for IMAP servers. You may need to change the port number
if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure
connection (see the next bullet item). If you are not sure
about the correct port number, check with your mail server
administrator.
Maximum
Message Size
To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message,
enter the size in kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size.
The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by
default, but you can enter a smaller size. The maximum
message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text
and approximately 1.5MB of total raw data for any
attachments.
POP accounts
2.
176
Tap Next.
IMAP accounts
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
Setting outgoing mail options
Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.
To set outgoing mail options:
1.
2.
(Optional) Do any of the following:
Display Name
Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing
messages, such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply To Address
Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and
reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different
from the e-mail address from which you are sending the
message. For example, if you are sending a message from
[email protected] but you want recipients to reply to
[email protected], enter the reply-to address here. Reply To
Address makes it look as though the e-mail came from the
address you entered.
BCC
Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail
message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy
e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the
message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages
you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate
e-mail account, enter that e-mail address.
Tap Next.
177
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Adding a signature
If you want, you can add a signature to each e-mail message you send. For
example, you can enter your name and telephone number so that they appear on
each message you send.
To add a personal signature:
1.
Tap the Attach Signature to messages check box, and then enter the text of the
signature.
This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.
Signature lines appear only if
check box is selected
2.
Tap Next.
Setting advanced outgoing mail options
You can set additional outgoing mail options.
To set advanced outgoing mail options:
1.
(Optional) Select either of the following:
Port Number
The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If
you are not sure about the correct port number, check with
your mail server administrator.
Authentication
Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) check
box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication.
Check with your system administrator before selecting this
option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for information. If you select this option, username
and password fields appear. These fields are already filled in
based on the account information you entered previously. In
most cases, the information displayed is correct; however,
occasionally your authentication username and/or
password is different from your account username or
password. Check with your e-mail service provider for
authentication username and password information.
If you need to enter new information, enter a username
and/or tap the Password box and enter a password, and
then tap OK.
178
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
2.
Tap Done, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Testing your new account
After you finish setting up a new e-mail account, the Inbox of the account you just
created is displayed. You can test whether the e-mail account is set up and working
properly by tapping Get Mail. See “Getting e-mail by subject or getting the entire
message” later in this chapter for more information.
Creating a synchronize-only account
NOTE You must be using a Windows computer to use a synchronize-only account.
A synchronize-only e-mail account enables you to download, view, and manage
e-mail between the handheld and a desktop e-mail application, such as Microsoft
Outlook, by performing a HotSync operation by means of the cradle/cable. You
can’t send and receive messages wirelessly or with a modem for any account of this
type.
To create a synchronize-only e-mail account:
1.
Press Function
Setup.
2.
Tap New.
+ Menu
, select Accounts, and then select Account
179
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
3.
Do the following:
Account Name
Enter a descriptive name for this account, such as “My Yahoo.”
Mail Service
Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which
you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not listed.
Protocol
Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most mail
providers use the POP protocol.)
If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you
selected, it displays the correct protocol.
4.
On the same screen, select the Synchronize Only Account check box.
Select check box for a
synchronize-only account
5.
180
Tap Next.
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
Entering the account username and password
In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you enter the username and
password for this account. The VersaMail 2.5 application provides strong 128-bit
AES encryption for your password.
To enter the account username and password:
1.
Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is generally the part of
your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire
e-mail address.
2.
Tap the Password box, and then enter your password.
3.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter . The Password box displays the word
“Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.
4.
Tap Next.
Entering the name of the incoming and outgoing mail server
You need to enter your e-mail address for the account you are accessing, as well as
the names of the outgoing and incoming mail servers.
To enter mail server settings:
1.
If you chose a preconfigured service from the Mail Services pick list on the
Account Setup screen, the e-mail address field is completed automatically,
based on the username and mail service you entered. Check the address to
verify that it is correct, and edit it if necessary.
If you chose Other from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen,
enter the e-mail address for your account.
E-mail address will be filled in
automatically if you chose a
preconfigured mail service
Mail servers will be filled in
automatically if the VersaMail
application knows the names based
on the mail service you chose
181
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
2.
Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as
pop.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
3.
Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as
smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
4.
Tap Next.
5.
Do one of the following:
– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap
Done. After you finish setting up a synchronize-only e-mail account, you
need to configure this account on your desktop. See “Configuring an account
in HotSync Manager” later in this chapter for information. You will not be
able to synchronize e-mail between your handheld and your desktop until
you configure the account on your desktop.
– To set up additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of
procedures.
Setting mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account
The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options, depending on whether
your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.
182
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
To set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:
1.
(Optional) Select any of the following:
Get unread mail
NOTE The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread
mail only from the server. If you have a POP e-mail account,
the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the
server regardless of whether you have read them (for
example, on your desktop or on the web), and regardless of
whether this check box is selected.
For IMAP accounts, select Get unread mail ONLY to
download only unread mail to your handheld. If you don’t
choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all of your e-mail
messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to
your Inbox, including messages you have already read. To
get all mail (including mail you have already read) and not
just unread mail, deselect Get unread mail ONLY.
Delete messages
on server
To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when
they are deleted in the VersaMail application, select the
Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in
VersaMail check box.
Leave mail on
server (POP
account only)
To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server
so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave
mail on server check box. For example, if you create an
account to receive e-mail from your Yahoo account and select
this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still visible the next time
you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.
Port Number
The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and to 143
for IMAP servers. You may need to change the port number
if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure
connection (see the next bullet item). If you are not sure
about the correct port number, check with your mail server
administrator.
Maximum
Message Size
To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message,
enter the size in kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size.
The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by
default, but you can enter a smaller size. The maximum
message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text
and approximately 1.5MB of total raw data for any
attachments.
183
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
POP accounts
2.
IMAP accounts
Tap Next.
Setting outgoing mail options
Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.
To set outgoing mail options:
1.
2.
184
(Optional) Enter or select any of the following:
Display Name
Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages,
such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply To
Address
Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and
reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different from the
e-mail address from which you are sending the message. For
example, if you are sending a message from “[email protected]”
but you want recipients to reply to “[email protected],” enter the
reply-to address here. Reply To Address makes it look as though
the e-mail came from the address you entered.
BCC
Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail
message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy
e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message.
For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from
your handheld to be sent to your corporate e-mail account, enter
that e-mail address.
Tap Next.
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
Adding a signature
If you want, you can add a signature to each e-mail message you send. For
example, you can enter your name and telephone number so that they appear on
each message you send.
To add a personal signature:
1.
Tap the Attach Signature to messages check box, and then enter the text of the
signature.
This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.
Signature lines appear only if
check box is selected
2.
Tap Next.
Setting advanced outgoing mail options
You can set additional outgoing mail options.
To set advanced outgoing mail options:
1.
(Optional) Select either of the following:
Port Number
The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If
you are not sure about the correct port number, check with
your mail server administrator.
Authentication
Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) check
box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication.
Check with your system administrator before selecting this
option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for information. If you select this option, username
and password fields appear. These fields are already filled in
based on the account information you entered previously. In
most cases, the information displayed is correct; however,
occasionally your authentication username and/or
password is different from your account username or
password. Check with your e-mail service provider for
authentication username and password information.
If you need to enter new information, enter a username
and/or tap the Password box and enter a password, and
then tap OK.
185
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
2.
Tap Done, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Configuring your synchronize-only account
After you finish setting up a synchronize-only e-mail account, you need to
configure this account on your desktop. See “Configuring an account in HotSync
Manager” later in this chapter for information. You will not be able to synchronize
e-mail between your handheld and your desktop until you configure the account
on your desktop.
Editing e-mail accounts
From time to time, you may need to edit information about one of the e-mail
accounts you set up.
To select the account to edit:
186
1.
Press Function
+ Menu
.
2.
Select Accounts.
3.
Select Account Setup.
4.
Tap the name of the account to edit, and then tap Edit.
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
To edit an account:
1.
On the Account Setup screen, change any of the following:
Account Name
Enter a descriptive name for this account, such as “My
Yahoo.”
Mail Service
Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which
you are connecting. Select Other if your ISP is not listed.
Protocol
Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP. (Most mail
providers use the POP protocol.)
If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you
selected, it displays the correct protocol.
2.
Tap Next.
Changing the account username and password
In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup, you can change the username
and/or password for this account. The VersaMail 2.5 application provides strong
encryption for your password.
To edit the account username and password:
1.
(Optional) Enter a new username for accessing your e-mail. This is generally the
part of your e-mail address appearing before the @ symbol; it is usually not your
entire e-mail address.
2.
(Optional) Tap the Password box, and then enter a new password. The
Password box displays the word “Assigned” to indicate that a password has
been entered.
187
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
3.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter . The Password box displays the word
“Assigned” to indicate that a password has been entered.
4.
Tap Next.
Editing the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers
If your e-mail address or the names of the outgoing and incoming mail servers
have changed or have been entered incorrectly, you can edit the address or the
server names.
To edit mail server settings:
1.
(Optional) Enter a new e-mail address for the account you are accessing, such
as “[email protected]”
2.
(Optional) Enter the new or correct name of your incoming (POP) mail server,
such as pop.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
3.
(Optional) Enter the new or correct name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server,
such as smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the
mail service you selected, the correct server name is displayed.
4.
188
Tap Next.
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
5.
Do one of the following:
– To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application, tap
Done. This takes you to the Inbox of the account you set up. See “Getting,
sending, and managing e-mail” later in this chapter for information on
getting and sending e-mail.
– To edit additional mail options, tap Next. Continue with the next set of
procedures.
Editing mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account
The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options, depending on whether
your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol.
To edit mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account:
1.
(Optional) Change any of the following:
Get unread mail
NOTE The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread
mail only from the server. If you have a POP e-mail account,
the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the
server regardless of whether you have read them (for
example, on your desktop or on the web), and regardless of
whether this check box is selected.
For IMAP accounts, select Get unread mail ONLY to
download only unread mail to your handheld. If you don’t
choose this option and you tap Get & Send, all of your e-mail
messages on your provider’s mail server are downloaded to
your Inbox, including messages you have already read. To
get all mail (including mail you have already read) and not
just unread mail, deselect Get unread mail ONLY.
Delete messages
on server
To delete messages on your provider’s mail server when
they are deleted in the VersaMail application, select the
Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in
VersaMail check box.
189
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Leave mail on
server (POP
account only)
To get e-mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server
so you can view it later on your desktop, select the Leave
mail on server check box. For example, if you create an
account to receive e-mail from your Yahoo account and select
this option, your old Yahoo e-mail is still visible the next time
you visit Yahoo.com to access your Yahoo e-mail Inbox.
Port Number
The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and to 143
for IMAP servers. You may need to change the port number
if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure
connection (see the next bullet item). If you are not sure
about the correct port number, check with your mail server
administrator.
Maximum
Message Size
To limit the maximum size of an incoming e-mail message,
enter the size in kilobytes (KB) for Maximum Message Size.
The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by
default, but you can enter a smaller size. The maximum
message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text
and approximately 1.5MB of total raw data for any
attachments.
POP accounts
2.
190
Tap Next.
IMAP accounts
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
Editing outgoing mail options
Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts.
To edit outgoing mail options:
1.
2.
(Optional) Change any of the following:
Display Name
Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages,
such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply To
Address
Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and
reply to on your e-mail messages, only if this is different from
the e-mail address from which you are sending the message. For
example, if you are sending a message from [email protected] but
you want recipients to reply to [email protected], enter the
reply-to address here. Reply To Address makes it look as though
the e-mail came from the address you entered.
BCC
Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail
message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy
e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message.
For example, if you want a copy of all messages you send from
your handheld to be sent to your corporate e-mail account, enter
that e-mail address.
Tap Next.
191
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Editing a signature
If you added a signature to the e-mail messages you send, you can edit the
signature. For example, you can change your name or the telephone number that
appears in each message you send.
To edit a personal signature:
1.
(Optional) To add a signature, select the Attach Signature to messages check
box, and then enter the text of the signature.
To edit an existing signature name, phone number, and so on, edit the
information on the signature lines.
To remove a signature, deselect the Attach Signature to messages check box.
This signature is attached to all your outgoing e-mail.
2.
Tap Next.
Editing advanced outgoing mail options
You can change additional outgoing mail options.
192
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
To edit advanced outgoing mail options:
1.
(Optional) Change either of the following:
Port Number
The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If
you are not sure about the correct port number, check with
your mail server administrator.
Authentication
Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) check
box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication.
Check with your system administrator before selecting this
option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for information. If you select this option, username
and password fields appear. These fields are already filled in
based on the account information you entered previously. In
most cases, the information displayed is correct; however,
occasionally your authentication username and/or
password is different from your account username or
password. Check with your e-mail service provider for
authentication username and password information.
If you need to enter new information, enter a username
and/or tap the Password box and enter a password, and
then tap OK.
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
2.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Deleting an e-mail account
When you delete an account in the VersaMail application, the account is removed
from your handheld. The account still exists on the server. For example, deleting
your Yahoo account from the VersaMail application deletes only the account from
your handheld. Your e-mail account still exists at Yahoo.com.
NOTE You can delete all but one of your e-mail accounts; you must have at least one
account.
193
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To delete an account:
1.
Press Function
+ Menu
.
2.
Select Accounts.
3.
Select Account Setup.
4.
Tap the name of the account you want to delete, and then tap Delete.
5.
Tap Yes in the Delete Confirmation dialog box to delete the account and all
associated e-mail messages.
6.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
After you perform the next HotSync operation, the memory associated with an
account and its messages is released.
Selecting a different service for a given e-mail account
When you set up connections on your handheld (on the Connection Preferences
screen), you pair each connection with a network service (on the Network
Preferences screen) and then select one of these services to be the default for all
network activity (sending and receiving e-mail, surfing the web, and so on) on
your handheld. By default, the VersaMail application uses this service for sending
and receiving messages for all e-mail accounts you set up. See Chapter 20 for
information on setting up connections using the Connection Preferences and
Network Preferences screens.
However, for any given e-mail account, you have the option of switching to a
different service for use with that account only. For example, the default service
194
Setting up and managing e-mail accounts
you have selected for your handheld may be called My GPRS and use a GPRS
connection. You may also have set up an e-mail account called My Earthlink, which
runs on the My GPRS connection by default. But if you travel into an area that does
not have GPRS coverage, you may want to switch your My Earthlink account to
the service called Earthlink GSM, which uses a GSM dial-up connection.
To set up a service for a given e-mail account (different from the default service for your handheld):
1.
From the Inbox of the account you want to switch, tap Get Mail.
2.
Tap Details.
3.
Tap the Always connect using check box. A pick list of available services
appears. The currently used connection is displayed by default.
Tap to change the service
connection for this e-mail account
only from your default handheld
service connection
195
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
4.
Select the connection you want to switch to from the Service pick list.
Select a new service connection
for this e-mail account only
5.
Tap OK (alternately, press Function
+ Enter ), and then tap OK (or press
Function
+ Enter ) again. If there is an existing service connection, it is
disconnected and the new connection is initiated. The VersaMail application
sends and checks for any new e-mail using the new connection.
When you exit the VersaMail application, the new service disconnects. When you
reopen the application, the e-mail account you selected (My Earthlink in this
example) continues to connect using the new connection (Earthlink GSM in this
example) until you either select a new service or deselect the Always connect using
check box. If you deselect the Always connect using check box, the e-mail account
(My Earthlink) connects using the default handheld service (My GPRS in this
example).
The Always connect using check box changes the connection service for the
selected e-mail account only. You must follow the preceding procedure for each
e-mail account whose connection you want to switch from the default connection
on your handheld.
Troubleshooting account access problems
Occasionally you may experience problems using an e-mail account after you set
it up. If you followed the account setup procedures described in “Setting up and
managing e-mail accounts” earlier in this chapter but experience problems using
the account, you may need to verify that the account complies with your e-mail
provider’s requirements. See Appendix B for troubleshooting information for
account access problems.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Getting and sending e-mail on your handheld is easy and helps you keep your
business and personal life organized. You can get and send e-mail by simply
tapping one button on the handheld.
You can manage the messages in your e-mail accounts by moving messages
between folders, deleting old e-mail messages individually or in groups, and
marking messages as read or unread.
This section explains how to do the following:
196
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
■
Get and send e-mail for your e-mail accounts
■
View and send e-mail attachments, such as text or Microsoft Word documents,
wirelessly
Getting e-mail
You can get e-mail subjects only—the message size, author, and subject—or you
can get entire messages immediately. If you choose to get message subjects only
and want to read a full message, you can get more of the message. If you choose to
get the entire message, the body text of the message will be downloaded up to the
maximum message size you select. See “Reading e-mail” later in this chapter for
information.
Choosing the e-mail account and displaying the Inbox
To view the e-mail in an account, you must switch to that account and then get the
e-mail. For example, if you want to collect and view the e-mail from your Yahoo
account, you switch to the account created to retrieve e-mail from your Yahoo
account.
To display an account and its Inbox:
1.
In your Inbox or on another folder screen, press Function
2.
Select Accounts.
3.
Tap the name of the account you want from the list.
Alternately, press Command
the list.
+ Menu
.
+ the number of the account you want from
You can also press the VersaMail button
repeatedly to scroll through
the accounts you have configured in the VersaMail application until you get to
the account you want.
TIP
197
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
4.
Tap the folders pick list, and tap Inbox if the Inbox is not displayed.
Getting e-mail by subject or getting the entire message
When you get e-mail messages, you can choose to get the subject only or to get the
entire message. You can also use the Details dialog box to select options for getting
unread e-mail only, downloading attachments, using filters, and more.
To get e-mail messages:
1.
Tap Get Mail.
If you have e-mail stored in your Outbox, tap Get & Send.
2.
In the Get Mail Options dialog box, tap Subjects Only to download subjects
only, or tap Messages to download entire messages.
You can deactivate the Get Mail Options dialog box by using VersaMail
Preferences. See “Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail” later in
this chapter.
TIP
3.
(Optional) Tap Details and select options for retrieving unread e-mail (IMAP
accounts only), downloading attachments, using filters, auto-disconnect,
maximum download size, and default connection type for this account. Tap OK.
NOTE See “Creating mail filters” later in this chapter for more information
about filters. See “Setting advanced account preferences” later in this chapter
for information on the auto-disconnect feature. See “Selecting a different
service for a given e-mail account” earlier in this chapter for information on
setting a default connection type.
198
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
NOTE The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default.
4.
(Optional) For IMAP accounts, you have the option of synchronizing IMAP
folders from the Get Mail Options dialog box. See “Wireless IMAP folder
synchronization” later in this chapter for information.
5.
Tap OK, or press Function
6.
(Optional) If you are retrieving mail using a VPN connection, you may be asked
to enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN. If so, enter
the username and password. See “VPNs” earlier in this chapter for more
information.
7.
The Getting Messages dialog box shows updates as your e-mail is downloaded.
+ Enter
.
When the Getting Messages dialog box disappears, another dialog box appears
and displays the number of new e-mail messages.
8.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
A list of your e-mail appears in the Inbox.
Shows unread/
total messages
Envelope icon
indicates whether
a message or
subject has been
downloaded, and
whether there are
any attachments
Displays the time for
messages received today
and the date for all other
messages
199
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Auto get mail with notification
You can set up the VersaMail application to automatically search for new mail on
a regular schedule for an e-mail account. The auto get mail feature automatically
retrieves new messages and downloads them to your handheld, without needing
to tap Get Mail.
If auto get downloads any new messages, your handheld notifies you by blinking
an indicator light, beeping, or vibrating. The handheld also displays a visual list of
notifications on the Reminders screen.
The auto get feature downloads the first 3KB of each message. If a message is larger
than 3KB, tap the More button on the message screen to download and view the
entire message.
Auto get mail recognizes any filter criteria you have set up for downloading
messages to your handheld. See “Managing mail filters” later in this chapter for
information. Any messages that do not meet the filter criteria are not downloaded
during an auto get. To retrieve messages that do not conform to filter criteria,
perform a manual get with all filters turned off.
If auto get is occurring and you turn your handheld off or the connection to your
e-mail service provider is disconnected, the auto get fails. If you are attempting an
auto get over a network from a public location, you must be in range of a network
access point for the auto get to work.
If you are retrieving messages using the built-in GSM/GPRS radio on your
handheld, auto get mail does not take place if the radio is off—for example, if the
handheld automatically shuts off the radio because the battery is low.
Scheduling auto get mail
When setting up a schedule, you select the interval for retrieving mail, the start and
end times for retrieving mail, and the days on which scheduled e-mail retrieval
should take place.
You can set up different schedules for each of your e-mail accounts, but you can set
up only one schedule for an account. For example, if you set up a schedule for mail
retrieval on weekdays for your Yahoo account, you cannot set up a separate
schedule for weekends on the same account.
If more than one scheduled auto get takes place at the same time (for example, for
two separate e-mail accounts), the retrievals take place in the following order:
200
■
Any past-due auto get (for example, a retry of an earlier failed auto get)
■
Current retrievals according to the order of e-mail accounts (#1, #2, and so on)
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
NOTE The auto get feature may not work with your specific VPN connection. It is also
not supported if you have configured the security preferences on your handheld to
encrypt databases on the handheld. For some nonsupported connection types, the
Options menu does not display the auto get mail option; for others, if you try to set
up an auto get schedule, an error message appears.
To set up a scheduled auto get mail:
1.
On the message screen, Tap the Menu icon
2.
Select Options.
3.
Select Auto Get Mail.
4.
Select the Get mail automatically check box.
.
201
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
5.
Set schedule options:
Interval
Tap the Every pick list and select the time interval, from
15 minutes to 12 hours. See “Resource issues with auto get
mail” later in this chapter for information on setting the
interval.
Start Time
Tap the Start Time box, tap to enter the start time hour and
minute, and tap to enter AM or PM. Then tap OK.
End Time
Tap the End Time box, tap to enter the end time hour and
minute, and tap to enter AM or PM. Then tap OK.
Days
Tap the days you want the schedule to be active. You can
choose any number of days, but you can set up only one
schedule for each e-mail account.
6.
Tap OK.
7.
(Optional) Tap Get Mail. You should perform a manual Get Mail after setting up
a scheduled auto get. This ensures that only new messages are retrieved during
auto get.
TIP Alternately, if you have configured an e-mail account to synchronize
messages between your handheld and your desktop, you can perform a
HotSync operation after setting up a scheduled auto get to ensure that only
new messages will be retrieved during auto get. See “Synchronizing e-mail
between the handheld and the desktop” later in this chapter for configuration
information.
202
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Auto get notifications
The auto get mail feature provides three types of alerts during and after message
retrieval:
■
Depending on the connection type, a series of status messages may appear
during the auto get connection and mail retrieval process.
■
You can choose to have your handheld alert you when a new message arrives
in your account. The beep or alert sound your hear is called a notification. Your
handheld also notifies you of a new message’s arrival by blinking an indicator
light or vibrating if certain preferences are selected. For more information, see
“Making your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e-mail” later in this
chapter.
NOTE You must select the Notification option to have your handheld notify
you when new messages are received. See the next section, “Setting
notification options,” for more information.
■
If auto get discovers and downloads new messages for an e-mail account, a
notification appears on the Reminders screen, displaying the account name and
the number of new messages. If auto get is scheduled for more than one
account, a separate notification appears for each account. See “Viewing and
using the Reminders screen” later in this chapter.
Setting notification options
You can turn the notification sound on or off to notify you when new e-mail
arrives. You can choose from a variety of sounds, such as birds, bumble bees, or
simply an alarm.
203
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To set notification options:
1.
In the Inbox or on another folder screen, tap the Menu icon
.
2.
Tap Options.
3.
Tap Notification.
4.
Tap the Notify me of new mail and mail alerts check box.
5.
Tap the Notify Sound pick list and select a sound. The handheld plays a brief
demonstration of the sound.
NOTE If you have installed a custom sound on your handheld, it appears on
the Notify Sound pick list.
6.
Tap OK.
You can follow these procedure steps to change the notification sound or to turn
the sound on or off at any time.
Making your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e-mail
In addition to setting a notification sound, you can also choose to have your
handheld’s indicator light blink or to have your handheld vibrate when you
receive new e-mail. You select how your handheld notifies you of new e-mail in
your handheld’s General preferences.
204
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
To make your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e-mail:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the Prefs icon
3.
Tap Sounds & Alerts.
4.
Do any of the following:
.
– To change the volume of the Alarm Sound, tap the Alarm Sound pick list and
select Low, Medium, High, or Off.
– To change whether or not the handheld indicator light blinks when you
receive new e-mail, tap the Alarm LED pick list and select On or Off.
– To change whether or not the handheld vibrates when you receive new
e-mail, tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list and select On or Off.
5.
Depending on your handheld model, press the VersaMail button
Done.
or tap
Viewing and using the Reminders screen
Your handheld displays a Reminders screen that shows summary information
about new e-mail messages and alerts from other applications, such as alerts to
remind you of Date Book appointments.
205
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To view the Reminders screen:
■
Tap the blinking asterisk
in the upper-left corner of any screen.
Tap the check box to
remove a single
reminder from the
list
Tap the text to open
the account Inbox or
view a detailed error
message
The mail icon tells
you that this
reminder is for an
e-mail message
If you set up a scheduled auto get mail and you receive new e-mail messages, they
are downloaded into the Inbox. As you work with e-mail messages in the Inbox,
the Reminders screen doesn’t display a reminder for any new messages that arrive,
because the messages are already displayed in the Inbox.
NOTE A broken envelope icon
appears next to a notification when an auto get
mail fails.
To respond to the reminders, do one of the following:
■
Tap the check box to clear a reminder from the list.
■
Tap the reminder (either the mail icon or the text description) to go to the Inbox
of that account or to read a detailed error message.
■
Tap Done to close the Reminders screen and return to whatever you were doing
on your handheld before the Reminders screen appeared.
■
Tap Clear All to dismiss all reminders on the Reminders screen.
When a notification appears on the Reminders screen, tap the notification to go to
the Inbox of that account, or launch the VersaMail application and go to that
account. Once you view a message in the Inbox it is removed from the Reminders
screen, even if you do not open the message. Auto get then starts at the next
scheduled interval, with the Reminders screen counter reset to 1.
If you do not view the Inbox of the selected account and another scheduled e-mail
retrieval takes place and finds new messages, the Reminders screen adds the
number of new messages to the notification for that account. For example, if
scheduled auto get #1 finds two new messages and, before you view the Inbox,
scheduled auto get #2 takes place and finds three more new messages, the
Reminders screen notification indicates five new messages for that account.
206
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
If auto get discovers new messages but then fails for any reason, a notification
appears on the Reminders screen, displaying the account name and an error
message.
You can tap the error message or open the VersaMail application to that account for
more detailed information on the failed auto get.
If auto get discovers no new messages for an account, no notifications appear on
the Reminders screen for that account.
The Reminders screen displays only the most recent notification for an account.
For example, if one scheduled auto get failed, but the next one succeeded and
downloaded two new messages, the Reminders screen would first display the
error message, but would display the number of messages retrieved after the
successful retrieval.
Reminders screen notifications are specific for each account. For example, if auto
get fails for one account but succeeds in downloading new messages for a separate
account, the Reminders screen displays an error message for the first account and
a message indicating the number of messages downloaded for the second account.
Auto get mail retries
If the interval for a scheduled auto get is set at “Every 1 hour” or less frequently,
and an auto get fails for any reason, the VersaMail application continues
attempting to retrieve e-mail at 30-minute intervals until either the next scheduled
auto get occurs or the end time for scheduled e-mail retrieval is reached. If the
interval is set for more frequently than one hour and an auto get fails, the
VersaMail application waits until the next scheduled auto get.
207
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Resource issues with auto get mail
If you use the auto get mail feature, you should be aware of the following potential
resource constraints:
Decreased battery
life
If you set the auto get interval for more frequently than once per
hour, you may drain your handheld’s battery charge more
quickly, and thus need to recharge the battery more frequently.
Increased monthly
charges
If your e-mail service provider charges a service fee, using the
auto get feature can substantially add to your monthly charges.
If you have a data plan with a GSM or GPRS carrier, the plan
most likely charges a flat fee for a certain amount (MB) of data
per month, with extra charges for each additional amount (KB
or MB) of data. Thus, if you use the built-in GSM or GPRS radio
on your handheld to retrieve e-mail messages, using the auto
get feature may substantially increase your monthly charges.
This issue is especially noticeable for POP accounts, because the
size of the IDs used to locate POP account messages is much
larger (and thus POP messages take longer to download) than
for IMAP accounts.
If you set the auto get mail interval for more frequently than once per hour, an alert
message appears.
To minimize resource concerns, set your interval for e-mail auto get to no more
frequently than once per hour.
Inbox icons in the VersaMail application
The icons to the left of a message in the Inbox indicate the message’s status.
Only the subject header information is downloaded.
Part or all of the message text is downloaded.
Part or all of the message text and attachment information is
downloaded.
208
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Reading e-mail
To read e-mail, tap the e-mail message in the Inbox or the folder where the message
is located.
Tap to read
Alternately, you can use the navigator for one-hand message viewing.
To read a message using the navigator:
1.
Press Select on the navigator to highlight the first message displayed on the
screen, and then press Up or Down to scroll one message at a time to the
message you want to read.
2.
Press Select to open the message.
3.
After reading the message, press Select to close the message.
If you chose to get messages by subjects only, tap the More button
to view the
body of the e-mail message, plus any attachments, up to the maximum message
size you select. If the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size,
only a partial message is displayed. Tap the More button to view the entire
message. See “Getting e-mail by subject or getting the entire message” earlier in
this chapter.
If you chose to get entire messages, the body of the e-mail message is displayed.
However, if the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only
a partial message is displayed. Tap the More button to view the entire message.
Tap More to view the entire
message
209
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Plain text and HTML e-mail
By default, the VersaMail application is set to receive mail in HTML format. This
means that any e-mail messages sent as HTML will be displayed on your handheld
with basic HTML formatting intact, including the following:
■
Boldface
■
Italics
■
Underlining
■
Colored words
■
Bullet lists
■
Numbered lists
■
Line breaks
Most formatting not displayed is stripped of its HTML tags and shown as plain
text. For certain types of graphic images (for example, JPEG or GIF files), the
graphic may be displayed as a URL in the body of the e-mail message. In some
cases, you can tap the URL to open the graphic image. See “Working with URLs”
later in this chapter for more information.
When you set the VersaMail application to receive e-mail messages as HTML, any
messages sent as plain text will be displayed as plain text only. You can also set the
application to receive all messages as plain text only, regardless of the format in
which they were sent. If you choose this option, only the text of any messages sent
in HTML format will be displayed.
NOTE The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, with all HTML
tags stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally
received as HTML.
To select whether to receive e-mail messages in HTML or in plain text format:
1.
Press Command
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Preferences.
210
+ Menu
, select Options, and then select
2.
Tap the Receive Format pick list and select HTML or Plain Text. The default is
HTML.
3.
Tap OK.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Viewing other folders
By default, the VersaMail application displays the messages in a given account’s
Inbox folder. You can easily view the messages in a different folder.
To view other folders:
1.
Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Available folders
2.
Tap the folder you want to view.
Managing display options in the folder’s list view
You can customize the way in which messages appear in the list view of your mail
folders. The options you choose apply to all folders.
The display options that you can customize, and the default settings, are as
follows:
Option
Default
Sort by
Date
Sort order
Descend
Summary view
Two-line view
Summary view columns
Sender, Date, Subject
Font
Gil Sans MT 12 Plain
Unread message color
Black
Read message color
Black
211
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To change the sort order:
1.
Tap Display.
2.
Tap the Sort by pick list, and then tap the column name.
3.
Tap Descend or Ascend to change the sort order.
4.
Tap OK.
To select a one-line or two-line view:
212
1.
Tap Display.
2.
Tap the Show pick list, and then tap the view you want.
3.
Tap OK.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
To display or hide a column in a folder’s list view:
1.
Tap Display.
2.
Tap the check box for each column that you want to show. The column options
will change depending on whether you choose a one-line or a two-line view.
NOTE If you select Date, the Date column displays the message time for any
messages received today—that is, any message received after 12:01 A.M.
Otherwise, the Date column shows the date the message was received.
3.
Tap OK.
To change the font:
1.
Tap Display.
2.
Tap in the Font field.
Tap here
3.
Tap the Font pick list and select the font you want.
213
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
4.
Tap the Size pick list and select the font size you want.
5.
Tap the Style pick list and select the font style you want.
6.
Tap OK.
To select colors for read and unread mail:
1.
Tap Display.
2.
Tap the Unread pick list, and then tap the color you want to use to display
unread messages.
3.
Tap the Read pick list, and then tap the color you want to use to display read
messages.
4.
Tap OK.
In the list view itself, you can also change the size of the columns.
214
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
To change the size of a column in the folder’s list view:
NOTE Changing column size is available for one-line message view only.
1.
Tap and hold the stylus on the column divider.
2.
Drag the column divider to change the width of the column.
Drag the column
divider left or right to
make the column
narrower or wider
3.
Tap OK.
You can also change the font within an individual message. This change affects the
the font of all messages you compose.
To change the font of a composed message:
1.
On the message screen, tap the Menu icon
.
2.
Select Options.
3.
Tap Font.
4.
Tap the Font pick list and select the font you want.
215
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
5.
Tap the Size pick list and select the font size you want.
6.
Tap the Style pick list and select the font style you want.
7.
Tap OK.
Moving e-mail between folders
You can move one or more e-mail messages between folders.
To move one e-mail message:
1.
216
Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then tap the
folder name, or press Up or Down to move to the folder you want, and the press
Select to select the folder.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
2.
Tap the message you want to move, press Right on the navigator to open the
Message menu, press Down to go to the Move To option, and then press Select
to select this option.
Alternately, tap the icon to the left of the message, and then tap Move To from
the pop-up menu.
The folders pick list appears.
3.
Press Up or Down on the navigator to move to the folder you want, and then
press Select to select the folder.
Alternately, tap the folder you want.
You can also move a single e-mail message from within the body of the message
by pressing Command
, tapping the folder icon, and selecting the destination
folder from the pick list. See “Using the command bar” later in this chapter for more
information on the command bar.
TIP
217
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To move multiple e-mail messages:
1.
Tap the folder that contains the e-mail messages you want to move.
2.
Select the messages by tapping to the left of each message icon.
To select a group of adjacent messages, drag the stylus to the left of the
message icons.
TIP
A checkmark appears next to each selected message.
3.
Do either of the following:
– Press Command
+ V (alternately, press Function
then select Move To on the Message menu.
+ Menu
), and
– Tap a message icon next to a selected message, and then tap Move To on the
pick list.
218
4.
Tap the folders pick list, and select a destination folder.
5.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Creating and editing mail folders
You can also create new folders so that you can store e-mail messages by subject,
person, or project. The VersaMail application has certain existing folders, such as
Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, and Trash.
The procedure for creating and editing folders varies slightly between POP and
IMAP e-mail accounts, as described in the following procedure.
To create and edit e-mail folders:
1.
Tap the folders pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then tap Edit
Folders.
2.
On the Edit Folders or Edit IMAP Folders screen, select any of the following:
POP accounts
IMAP accounts
– To create a new folder, tap New, and then enter the new folder name. For
IMAP accounts only, select the check box if you also want to create the folder
on the server. When finished, tap OK, or press Function +
Enter .
POP accounts
IMAP accounts
219
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
– To rename a folder, tap the folder name from the list on the screen, tap
Rename, and then enter the new folder name. For IMAP accounts only, select
the check box if you also want to rename the folder on the server. When
finished, tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter .
POP accounts
IMAP accounts
– To delete a folder, tap the folder name from the list on the screen, and then
tap Delete. For IMAP accounts only, select the check box if you also want to
delete the folder on the server, and then tap OK, or press Function
+
Enter . For POP accounts, the folder will be deleted immediately and you
will not see a confirmation screen.
Delete confirmation
appears for IMAP
accounts only
Creating and sending new e-mail
When you create a new e-mail message, you can enter the person’s e-mail address
or use the Lookup screen to find a particular address.
To create a new e-mail message:
220
1.
Tap New, or press Command
+ N.
2.
Enter the recipient’s name using one of the methods described in the next
procedures.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
NOTE When you address a message to several recipients, you do not see all the
recipients on the To list because the list is truncated on the To line. If you tap the To
field, a dialog box shows all recipients for the current message.
Addressing a message by typing the address
You can address a message by entering the complete address.
To enter the address:
1.
On the New Message screen, tap or navigate to the To field and enter the
address, and then tap Done.
For multiple recipients, type a semicolon (;) and then a space between recipient
names, or press Enter . The To field expands to two lines during address entry
for addresses longer than the one-line display.
After address entry, addresses longer than one line are shown on a single line
with an ellipsis symbol to the right of the address line.
Ellipsis indicates address is longer
than one line
221
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Alternately, on the New Message screen, tap To and enter the address on the
Recipient List screen, and then tap Done. Use the shortcut buttons at the bottom
of the screen for quick address entry.
For multiple recipients, type a semicolon (;) or tap the semicolon button at the
bottom of the screen, and then type a space between recipient names.
NOTE If you enter a comma instead of a semicolon, it is automatically changed
to a semicolon. If you enter a space with no punctuation between names,
semicolons are not inserted and the e-mail message is improperly addressed.
If you want to edit an e-mail address that is longer than the line provided on the
New Message screen, tap the To field and edit the address.
2.
To send copies, tap cc: or bcc: and enter the recipient’s address.
Copies (cc:) allow recipients to see the addresses of the other recipients, but
addresses in the blind copies (bcc:) field are hidden from all other recipients.
To automatically fill in the address as you type, see “Using Smart
Addressing to address a message” later in this chapter.
TIP
Addressing a message using Address Book
You can enter a recipient’s address by using the Lookup screen to select the
address. The names and addresses on the Lookup screen come from Address Book.
To use an address from Address Book:
222
1.
On the New Message screen, tap the word To.
2.
On the Recipient List screen, tap Lookup.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
3.
On the Address Lookup screen, tap the address you want, and then tap Add.
4.
(Optional) Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each address you want to add.
5.
To enter an address in the cc: or bcc: field, tap the field name and follow the steps
given for the To field.
Using Smart Addressing to address a message
Smart Addressing types ahead and completes a recognized e-mail address. Smart
Addressing automatically fills in fields when the recipient’s name and e-mail
address are in your Address Book.
By default, Smart Addressing is selected in VersaMail Preferences.
To use Smart Addressing to address a message:
1.
On the New Message screen, tap in the To field.
2.
Start entering the person’s name, such as Joe Smith.
Once the name is recognized from your Address Book, the name and e-mail
address are automatically completed on the recipient list. For example, if you
have a Joe Smith and a Joan Smith in your Address Book (and no other names
starting with J), once you type “Joe,” the entry “Joe Smith” is completed with
the correct e-mail address.
3.
If Smart Addressing recognizes more than one name for the typed entry, or if
the recognized name has more than one e-mail address associated with it, all the
names or e-mail addresses are displayed. Continue typing until only the name
or e-mail address you want is displayed, or navigate or tap to select the name
or e-mail address you want.
4.
Tap Done.
223
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Turning Smart Addressing on or off
You can turn Smart Addressing on or off in VersaMail Preferences. By default,
Smart Addressing is turned on.
To turn Smart Addressing on or off in VersaMail Preferences:
1.
In the Inbox, press Command
+ R.
Alternately, in the Inbox, press Function
then tap Preferences.
+ Menu
, tap Options, and
2.
Tap Advanced.
3.
Tap the Enable Smart Addressing check box if it is not selected. A checkmark
means it is turned on.
4.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Composing and sending e-mail
After you enter your recipient addresses, you can compose the rest of the e-mail
message.
To compose the rest of the e-mail and send it:
1.
224
Tap the Subject field and enter the subject of your e-mail.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
2.
Tap the area below the Subject line and enter the text of your e-mail.
To access the editing features available on the Edit menu, press
Function
+ Menu
. The first character of each sentence is automatically
capitalized for you.
3.
(Optional) Tap the Options menu and select Add Attachments (alternately,
press Command
+ A). See “Attaching files from a handheld application”
later in this chapter.
4.
Tap one of the following to send the e-mail:
Send
Sends the e-mail immediately. (Alternately, press
Command
+ Y.)
Outbox
Stores e-mail in the Outbox so you can compose e-mail offline and
then send all e-mail during one connection with the server. To send
your e-mail later, tap Get & Send. A connection is made to the mail
server and all the e-mail in the Outbox is delivered.
You can also tap Drafts (or press Command
message in the Drafts folder rather than send it.
TIP
+ W) to save this
Send retry
When you tap Send on the message menu, the VersaMail application automatically
attempts to send the message. If the send attempt fails for any reason (for example,
your handheld is out of range, or the application cannot connect to the mail server),
you can choose to have the application move the message to the Outbox and
continue to try to send the message at 30-minute intervals, a maximum of three
times.
If you put a message in the Outbox, you must perform a manual send to send the
message on the first attempt. The VersaMail application attempts automatic send
retry only after a manual send attempt fails.
If automatic send retry succeeds on any attempt, the message is moved to the Sent
folder.
NOTE Automatic send retry occurs only if you tap Send to send the message
manually. It does not work if you tap Get & Send.
225
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To select automatic send retry:
■
Tap Yes on the dialog box notifying you that manual send has failed.
NOTE Automatic send retry is not supported for VPN connections, or for accounts
for which your ISP requires you to log in to the mail server before sending mail. It is
also not supported if you have configured the security preferences on your handheld
to encrypt databases on the handheld.
If you are retrieving messages using the built-in GSM/GPRS radio on your
handheld, automatic send retry does not take place if the radio is off—for example,
if the handheld automatically shuts off the radio because the battery is low.
Send retry notifications
If automatic send retry fails after the third attempt, a notification appears on the
Reminders screen. A separate notification appears for each e-mail account for
which a send retry has failed.
NOTE A broken envelope icon
appears next to a notification when an automatic
send retry fails.
Tap the notification or open the account in the VersaMail application to view a
detailed error message.
226
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Viewing the error message deletes the notification from the Reminders screen. The
Reminders screen shows only the most recent notification for an e-mail account, no
matter how many automatic send retries have been attempted for that account.
If automatic send retry fails after the third attempt, you must send the message
manually.
NOTE If you perform a soft reset or a HotSync operation during automatic send retry,
the retry cancels. You must manually send any messages in the Outbox after the soft
reset.
Modifying messages in the Outbox
A message in the Outbox waiting for the next automatic send retry can be edited,
moved, or deleted. However, if you edit the message, you will need to perform a
manual send in order to send the message. If the manual send fails, you can choose
to store the message in the Outbox to await the next automatic send retry.
During automatic send retry, any message that the VersaMail application is
attempting to send is in a locked state and cannot be edited, moved, or deleted. If
you try to modify a message in the locked state, an error message appears.
If a send retry fails after the third attempt, the message is stored in the Outbox in
the error state. You can send the message again manually, or edit, move, or delete
the message. However, if you edit the message, you will need to perform a manual
send in order to send the message. If the manual send fails, you can choose to store
the message in the Outbox to await the next automatic send retry.
See the next section “Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications,” for icons that
indicate messages awaiting the next automatic send retry as well as messages in
the locked and error state.
Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications
The icons to the left of a message in the Outbox indicate the message’s status.
Message is waiting either to be manually sent or to be sent during the
next send retry. You can edit, move, or delete a message in this state.
Send retry is currently in process; you cannot edit, move, or delete a
message in this state.
Third automatic send retry has failed. You must manually send a
message in this state.
227
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Completing drafts
If you are composing an e-mail message and you exit the VersaMail application
before tapping Outbox, Send, or Cancel, the e-mail automatically moves to the
Drafts folder. To finish editing the e-mail, tap the folders pick list and select Drafts.
Select the e-mail you want to complete or edit, and tap Edit. You can also delete the
e-mail in the Drafts folder.
Attaching a personal signature
You can include a personal signature, such as your name, e-mail address, and
telephone number, with each e-mail you send.
To create a personal signature:
1.
Press Command
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Preferences.
228
+ Menu
, tap Options, and then tap
2.
Tap Signature.
3.
Tap the Attach Signature check box to select it.
4.
Enter your signature information.
5.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Forwarding e-mail
You can quickly forward e-mail messages from any folder other than the Outbox
folder.
To forward e-mail:
1.
Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the e-mail.
2.
Tap the e-mail message to display it.
3.
Press Command
+ F.
Alternately, tap the Forward button.
Tap Forward
4.
Tap the word To.
5.
On the Recipient List screen, enter or look up the recipient address. See the
procedure for creating new e-mail earlier in this chapter for more information
on addressing messages.
6.
(Optional) Enter some text describing the forwarded message.
7.
Tap Send (alternately, press Command
Outbox to store it in the Outbox.
+ Y) to send the message, or tap
NOTE Forwarded messages are always sent as text only, even if you received the
original message in HTML format.
229
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Replying to e-mail
You can reply to an e-mail message as you are reading it, or start the reply when
viewing messages in the folders list view.
To reply to an e-mail message that you are reading:
1.
Tap the message you want to reply to.
2.
Tap Reply, or press Command
3.
In the Reply Options dialog box, select options for replying to the sender only
or to all e-mail recipients, and for including original message text.
4.
Tap OK, or press Function
5.
Enter a reply.
6.
Tap Send (alternately, press Command
Outbox to send it later.
+ O.
+ Enter
.
+ Y) to send the message now, or tap
NOTE Replies are always sent as text only, even if you received the original message
in HTML format.
230
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
To reply to an e-mail message from the folders list:
1.
On the message screen, tap the folder name in the upper-left corner to open the
message menu, and then press Right on the navigator to move to and open the
Options menu.
2.
Press Down on the navigator to move to the Reply option, and then press Select
to select this option.
TIP Alternately, you can tap the folders pick list, select the folder that contains
the e-mail, tap the envelope icon next to the message, and then tap Reply on
the pick list.
3.
In the Reply Options dialog box, select options for replying to the sender only
or to all e-mail recipients, and for including original message text.
4.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
The e-mail is addressed.
5.
Enter a reply.
6.
Tap Send (alternately, press Command
tap Outbox to send it later.
+ Y) to send the message now, or
NOTE Replies are always sent as text only, even if you received the original message
in HTML format.
231
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Working with URLs
You can tap a URL in a received message to view the web page or file associated
with the URL. Tapping the URL opens PalmSource® Web Browser to view the page
or file.
You can also tap an embedded e-mail address to open a new message screen with
the address in the To field.
Depending on whether the received message is displayed in HTML or plain text
format, URLs and e-mail addresses appear in slightly different forms, as follows:
HTML
URLs and e-mail addresses appear as blue underlined text.
Plain text
URLs appear as any text beginning with “http://” or “www.” You
cannot view the page or file associated with a URL that does not
begin with “http://” or “www” in a plain text message.
E-mail addresses appear in the form
“[email protected]” (or other three-letter extension such
as .net, .org, and so on).
Tap underlined blue
text in HTML e-mail
Tap text beginning
with “www” or
“http://” or in e-mail
address format in
text e-mail
Working with attachments
You can easily download, view, and send attachments with e-mail messages.
Downloading attachments to your handheld
At times e-mail contains attached files, such as Microsoft Word or text files, that
you want to view or install on your handheld. You can download and work with
the following attached files:
232
vCard (.vcf)
This is an address.
vCal (.vcs)
This is usually a calendar appointment or a To Do task.
Text (.txt)
This is usually a memo or another plain text file.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
HTML (.html or
.htm)
Usually a web page or a formatted text file. Your handheld
displays HTML attachments with full formatting intact in Web
Browser.
Microsoft Word
(.doc)
The formatting is stripped and the text of most Microsoft Word
documents is shown.
JPEG (.jpg),
bitmap (.bmp), and
TIFF (.tif) tiles
These are graphics files. You can download these files and view
them using the Photo Viewer application on your handheld.
Other application
files
For other types of application files, your handheld may contain
a viewer that allows other applications to pass it a file for
viewing. For example, your handheld may contain an image
viewer that allows another application to pass it a GIF
attachment for viewing. You do not need to do anything
different in the steps for downloading and viewing
attachments; if your handheld contains such a viewer, the
attachment is automatically opened. If your handheld does not
contain such a viewer, you cannot view the attachment. Among
the file types that may be supported are GIF, MP3, and AAC
files.
PRC (.prc)
This is a Palm OS® application that you can install and run on
your handheld.
PDB (.pdb)
This is a file that works with specific Palm OS applications.
ZIP (.zip)
These are compressed files that contain other types of files, for
example, text files or Word docs. You can download and
uncompress (“unzip”) a ZIP file and then view the contents on
your handheld.
Among the types of attachments you can receive are the following handheld
application files:
■
Address Book entries
■
Date Book appointments
■
To Do list items
■
Text memos
You can also save downloaded files to an expansion card. See “Saving attachments
to an expansion card” later in this chapter for information.
NOTE The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text
and approximately 1.5MB of total raw data for any attachments. If the attachment is
too large, it cannot be downloaded to the handheld.
233
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To download an attachment:
1.
In the Inbox, tap the message with the attachment.
A paper clip icon appears on the message’s icon if the message has an
attachment that has been downloaded.
Paper clip icon
indicates
downloaded
attachment
If you choose to get messages by subject only, you must tap More for each
downloaded message in order to view the body of the e-mail message plus any
attachments, up to the maximum message size. If the downloaded message
(either body text alone or body text plus any attachments) exceeds your
maximum message size, you see a message showing that the message and/or
attachments were too large and asking if you would like to continue
downloading them.
For example, if the maximum message size is 5KB and you download a body of
2KB, then any attachment under 3KB is also downloaded, and any attachment
over 3KB is not. See “Downloading large attachments” later in this chapter.
2.
Click the red paper clip icon in the upper-right corner. If the attachment is not
downloaded, a paper clip icon will not appear even though the message was
sent with an attachment. You must download the attachment for the paper clip
icon to appear.
Tap red paper clip icon to view
attachment
234
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
3.
Your options for working with a downloaded attachment vary according to the
file type.
Type
Action
Viewable file:
text, Word doc,
To Do task, HTML,
graphic, and so on
Tap the name of the attachment you want to view, and then
tap View. If there are multiple viewers registered on your
handheld for the attachment file type, either use the default
viewer shown, or select a viewer from the list. For example,
if you have two photo viewing applications on your
handheld and you select a photo attachment on the list, the
Viewer pick list appears containing the names of the photo
viewing applications. Tap the pick list and select the
application you want to use to view the photo attachment.
If there is only one viewer registered for the attachment file
type, the viewer is shown without a list.
Palm OS
application
or database file
(.prc or .pdb)
Tap the name of the attachment you want, and then tap
Install. The file is installed automatically.
Compressed ZIP
file
Tap the name of the attachment you want, and then tap
Unzip. The file uncompresses, and the files it contains are
listed. Tap the name of the file you want to view or install,
and then tap View or Install.
Viewer pick list is displayed only if handheld has
multiple viewers registered for attachment file
type
Button displays View, Install, or
Unzip depending on the
attachment file type
4.
When you have finished viewing or installing the attachment, tap Done. This
returns you to the Attachments dialog box, where you can select another
attachment if you want to.
If there is no Done button on the attachment screen, press the VersaMail button
to return to the Inbox of the account you were in.
5.
When you have finished viewing or installing all attachments, tap Done on the
Attachments dialog box. This returns you to the Message screen.
235
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Downloading large attachments
Downloading and viewing a message with a single attachment that exceeds your
maximum message size, or a message with multiple attachments whose total size
exceeds your maximum message size, requires some extra steps.
To determine if a message has an attachment or multiple attachments that exceed the
maximum message size:
■
In the Inbox, tap the message title.
More button indicates that message
plus any attachments exceeds
maximum message size
If the message plus attachments exceeds the maximum message size, the More
button
appears on the Message screen. In the case of multiple attachments, if
some of the attachments were downloaded completely, you see both the red paper
clip icon (indicating fully downloaded attachments) and the More button
(indicating incompletely downloaded attachments).
To download a single attachment that exceeds the maximum message size:
1.
Tap the More button.
Tap More
2.
236
Tap Yes to continue downloading the entire message with attachment.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
When downloading is complete, the red paper clip icon appears and the More
button is no longer displayed. Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment
presented earlier in this chapter.
To download multiple attachments whose total size exceeds the maximum message size:
1.
Tap the red paper clip icon.
2.
Select one of the following:
– To view any fully downloaded attachments without continuing to download
additional attachments, tap No. Follow the procedure for viewing an
attachment presented earlier in this chapter.
– To continue downloading all messages, tap Yes.
When downloading is complete, the Attachments dialog box appears, showing all
downloaded messages. Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented
earlier in this chapter.
Saving attachments to an expansion card
If you have purchased an expansion card that provides extra memory, you can save
downloaded attachments to the expansion card.
To save an attachment to an expansion card:
1.
Insert the expansion card into the slot on your handheld.
2.
Follow the procedure for downloading attachments described earlier in this
chapter.
237
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
3.
On the Attachments screen, select the attachment you want to save, and then
tap Save To Card.
4.
Tap OK.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each attachment you want to save.
Attaching files from a handheld application
You can attach files on your handheld to e-mail messages you send. For example,
you can attach files from the various handheld applications, such as any Date Book
appointment (.vcs), To Do List tasks (.vcs), or text memos (.txt).
NOTE The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and
approximately 1.5MB of total raw data for any attachments. The maximum number
of attachments for any e-mail message is ten, regardless of the attachments’ total
size.
You can attach the following types of files from a handheld application:
238
■
vCard (.vcf)
■
vCal (.vcs)
■
Memo/Text (.txt)
■
PRC (.prc)
■
PDB (.pdb)
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
To attach a file from a handheld application:
1.
Press Command
+ A.
Alternately, press Function
Attachment.
2.
+ Menu
, tap Options, and then tap
Tap the Type pick list and select the file type.
Select type of file you want to
attach
All files of the selected type appear in the Type box. For example, if you select
Appointments (vCal), tap Date Book to see a list of appointments from a
particular date that you can attach, or tap To Do to see To Do List tasks.
3.
Tap the file that you want to attach, and then tap Add.
239
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
The selected file appears in the Attachments box.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each attachment you want to add, and then tap Done.
To delete an attachment from an e-mail message, tap the attached file in
the Attachments box and then tap Delete.
TIP
5.
Tap Send or Outbox.
Attaching files from an expansion card
If you have purchased an expansion card and have saved files to the card, you can
attach files from the card to an e-mail message you are sending. The types of files
you can attach from an expansion card include the following:
■
Word docs
■
HTML files
■
JPEG and GIF graphics files
■
MP3 and WAV audio files
■
Any other file type
To attach a file from an expansion card:
240
1.
Insert the expansion card into the slot on your handheld.
2.
On the New Message screen, tap the Menu icon
3.
Tap Options.
4.
Tap Add Attachment.
.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
5.
Tap the From pick list and select Files on Card.
6.
Tap the Type pick list and select the file type.
Only file types that correspond to the types of files on the card will be displayed
on the list. For example, if the card contains only Word docs and Address Book
entries, only the file types “doc” and “vCard” will be listed. You can select a
particular file type, or select All Files to view all files on the card.
7.
Tap the file that you want to attach, and then tap Add.
241
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
The selected file appears in the Attachments box.
8.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each attachment you want to add, and then tap Done.
To delete an attachment from an e-mail message, tap the attached file in
the Attachments box and then tap Delete.
TIP
9.
Tap Send or Outbox.
Forwarding an attachment
You can include an attachment on any message you forward, up to the maximum
message size.
To forward a message with an attachment:
1.
Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the e-mail.
2.
Tap the e-mail message to display it.
3.
Tap the Forward button, or press Command
4.
Tap the word To. On the Recipient List screen, enter or look up the recipient
address. See the procedure for creating e-mail earlier in this chapter for more
information on addressing messages.
5.
Follow the procedure for attaching files presented earlier in this chapter.
+ F.
Deleting messages
You can delete one or more e-mail messages from any folder. For example, you can
delete old messages in the Inbox or messages that you were working on in the
Drafts folder. When you delete a message, it is placed in the Trash folder. See
“Emptying the trash” later in this chapter.
To delete messages on the server when you empty the trash on your handheld, you
can select the Delete Msgs on Server setting in VersaMail Preferences. If you don’t
periodically empty the trash and delete messages on the server, any incoming
e-mail may “bounce” back to the sender. See “Setting preferences for getting and
deleting e-mail” later in this chapter.
242
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
To delete one or more messages:
1.
Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the message you want
to delete.
2.
Do one of the following:
Item to delete
Action
One message
Tap the bullet next to the message’s icon.
Multiple
messages
Tap the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want
to delete.
A group of
adjacent
messages
Drag the stylus along the left of the message icons. To select
another group, lift the stylus and select the next group of
messages.
3.
Press Right on the navigator to move to and open the Message menu.
4.
Press Down on the navigator to move to the Delete option, and then press Select
to delete the message.
TIP Alternately, you can tap the message icon next to a selected e-mail
message and then tap Delete, or press Function
+ Menu
and then
select Delete.
5.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
6.
(Optional) Tap Also delete message(s) on server if you want to delete the
messages from the server now.
If you selected the setting
Delete Msgs on Server in
VersaMail Preferences, this
check box is selected
243
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
The selected messages move to the Trash folder and are deleted from your
handheld when you empty the trash. If you set the preference to automatically
empty the trash, the messages are deleted when the trash is emptied. By default,
the trash auto-empties all deleted e-mail older than one week. See “Emptying
the trash” later in this chapter for more information.
IMPORTANT
If you delete a message on the server, you cannot retrieve it and view it
again later.
To delete messages before a certain date:
1.
Press press Function
Message menu.
+ Menu
, and then tap Delete Old from the
2.
Tap the Folder pick list and select the folder that contains the messages you
want to delete.
Displays the current
folder for deleting
messages
3.
244
Tap the Older than pick list, and then tap One Week, One Month, or Choose
Date.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
If you tap Choose Date, you can select a date from the calendar.
Tap a date to select it,
or tap Today
4.
Tap Delete.
5.
(Optional) Tap Also delete message(s) on server if you want to delete the
message from the server now.
6.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Emptying the trash
Deleted e-mail accumulates in the Trash folder and takes up space on your
handheld. To increase memory, you should empty the trash regularly. If you want
to automatically empty the trash, you can set a preference to empty the trash
immediately or empty any e-mail older than a certain number of days.
To empty the trash:
1.
Press Command
+ E.
Alternately, press Function
the Message menu.
+ Menu
, and then select Empty Trash from
NOTE If Auto-Empty Mail from Trash is selected in VersaMail Preferences, a
message asks if you want to delete the trash.
245
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
2.
(Optional) Tap Details to see how many messages are in the trash and whether
the messages are set to be deleted on the server.
3.
If you want to delete messages from the handheld as well as from the server, tap
Both. A message asks if you want to update the server now.
To delete the message from only the handheld now, tap Handheld.
NOTE Many e-mail providers, such as Yahoo, have size restrictions for mail storage.
If your mailbox on the server becomes full, messages are returned to the senders.
To have the trash emptied automatically:
1.
Press Command
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Preferences.
2.
+ Menu
, select Options, and then select
Tap Advanced.
By default, Auto-Empty Mail from Trash is selected, and the time interval is set
at Older Than 1 Week.
3.
Tap the pick list, and select how often you want the e-mail messages
automatically emptied from the trash.
– Immediately.
– Older Than 1 Day.
– Older Than 3 Days.
– Older Than 1 Week.
– Older Than 1 Month.
4.
246
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
Marking messages as read or unread
You can mark messages as read or unread. When you tap a message to read it, it is
automatically marked as read.
To mark messages as read or unread:
1.
Tap the folders pick list and select the folder you want.
2.
Tap the icon next to the message you want to mark.
3.
Tap Mark Read or tap Mark Unread.
To mark multiple messages, tap the bullets next to the messages you
want, press Function
+ Menu
, and then select Mark Read or Mark
Unread.
TIP
4.
For IMAP accounts only: Tap Handheld to mark the messages as read or unread
on your handheld. Tap Both to mark the messages on both the handheld and the
server.
247
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
If you tap Both, this message appears.
Tap OK to connect with the server and immediately mark the messages as read
or unread on the server. This action also processes any other pending actions on
the server, such as messages not yet deleted.
Tap Cancel if you want the messages marked during the next HotSync
operation or the next time you connect to the server.
NOTE Because POP servers do not support the read or unread message
feature, the message is in bold or regular typeface for POP accounts on the
handheld, but you can’t connect with the server to change the message state.
Read messages appear in plain text; unread messages appear in bold text.
Setting preferences for getting and deleting e-mail
VersaMail Preferences determine how the VersaMail application gets, sends, and
deletes e-mail.
To set e-mail preferences:
1.
Press Command
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Preferences.
248
+ Menu
, select Options, and then select
Getting, sending, and managing e-mail
2.
Select preferences:
Get
Enables you to retrieve the subject only or the entire
message.
Ask Every Time
Displays a dialog box for choosing subjects only or entire
messages each time you retrieve e-mail. If deselected,
messages are retrieved according to the option you select in
the Get pick list.
Confirm Deletions
Displays a confirmation dialog before deleting e-mail.
Delete Msgs on
Server
If selected, automatically deletes messages on the server that
you have deleted on your handheld. If not selected, you will
be asked each time you delete messages on your handheld
whether you want to also delete them on the server. Because
mailboxes on the server usually have size restrictions, we
recommend periodically deleting messages on the server.
Download
Attachments
Causes files attached to e-mail to be automatically
downloaded to your handheld. Attachments that exceed the
maximum message size cannot be downloaded. See
“Working with attachments” earlier in this chapter for more
information.
Receive Format
Enables you to retrieve messages in HTML format or in plain
text format. If you choose HTML, any messages sent to you
in HTML format will be displayed with basic HTML
formatting intact. Other messages will be displayed as plain
text. If you choose Plain Text, all messages will be displayed
as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were
sent. Default setting is HTML.
See “Working with URLs” earlier in this chapter for more
information on receiving e-mail in HTML format.
Signature
Enables you to attach a default signature to all your outgoing
messages. See “Attaching a personal signature” earlier in
this chapter for more information.
249
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Adding or updating an Address Book entry directly from a message
You can add or update an e-mail address in the Address Book directly from the
body of a received e-mail message.
To add a new Address Book entry:
1.
On the Message screen, press Function
then select Add to Address Book.
+ Menu
, select Options, and
A dialog box appears with the “From” address displayed. If a Display Name
exists for this Address Book entry, the Last name and First name fields show the
display name.
2.
(Optional) If the Last name and First name fields are blank, enter the first and
last name associated with the “From” e-mail address.
3.
Tap OK to add the e-mail address to the Address Book, and then tap OK in the
confirmation dialog box.
You can also update an existing Address Book entry with a new e-mail address, or
create a second Address Book entry for a name that has an existing record. The
procedure is the same as for adding a new Address Book entry. If you tap Add to
Address Book from the body of an e-mail message and a record already exists for
the recipient name, you are prompted either to update the e-mail address for the
recipient or to create a new record for the recipient.
250
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
You must have a Windows computer to synchronize e-mail between
your handheld and your computer.
IMPORTANT
To manage your e-mail on your desktop as well as on your handheld, you can
synchronize an e-mail account on the handheld with an e-mail application on the
desktop. You can use many popular e-mail applications, called clients, such as
Microsoft Outlook, Eudora, Lotus Notes, Outlook Express, or any other e-mail
clients that use MAPI.
This chapter describes the following:
■
Starting the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit
■
Configuring and activating accounts in the HotSync Manager
■
Synchronizing e-mail on the handheld with a desktop e-mail application
■
Converting attached files using attachment conversion plug-ins
Configuring an account in HotSync Manager
Before synchronizing an e-mail account, you configure the account’s settings in the
Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit. The settings have to be specified only once
unless you need to make changes.
To start Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit :
1.
Click the HotSync Manager icon
2.
Select Custom.
3.
Select VersaMail in the Conduit list.
in the Windows system tray.
251
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
4.
Click Change.
5.
Select Synchronize Active Accounts.
6.
(Optional) Select the check box Enable Informational Logging if you want the
HotSync log to record information, such as errors encountered, about the
conduit during a HotSync operation.
7.
(Optional) Select the check box Set Selection As Default to make the current
settings the default settings for all accounts.
Setting synchronization options and account settings
Next, you must configure each e-mail account’s general synchronization settings.
For example, if you created an Earthlink e-mail account on the handheld and want
to synchronize that with the desktop, set the synchronization options for the
Earthlink account. During a HotSync operation, the Earthlink account on the
handheld and the e-mail application specified in the conduit are synchronized.
252
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
To configure an account and set the synchronization options:
1.
On the VersaMail Configuration For User… screen, click the plus sign to the left
of the account you want to configure.
Click plus
sign
2.
Under the account name, click Mail Client Sync Setup.
3.
Select the option Check this box to synchronize this mail account when you
perform a HotSync operation; otherwise, the account cannot be synchronized.
253
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
4.
Click the Mail Client pick list and select the desktop e-mail application you will
use to synchronize the selected account with your handheld. For each
application, additional setup information is displayed in the Setup Notes box.
See the following table for additional setup information for each client.
If your e-mail application is compatible with Extended MAPI, try Microsoft
Exchange 5.0 or later as a choice for the Mail Client option. If your e-mail
application is compatible with Simple MAPI (SMAPI), try Microsoft Outlook
Express as a choice for the Mail Client option. Although Netscape uses SMAPI,
Netscape is not supported.
TIP
(Optional) If prompted, enter profile and password information for the client
you selected.
You must select the synchronize check box and select a mail client in
order to synchronize the account between your desktop and your handheld.
IMPORTANT
Mail Client
Action
Microsoft
Select a MAPI profile to access the mail server. The conduit
Exchange 5.0 or displays any existing MAPI profiles in the list. Enter your
later
password for Exchange.
Microsoft
Outlook 97 or
later
Select the MAPI profile to access the mail server. The conduit
checks for any existing MAPI profiles and displays them in the list.
Enter your password for Outlook. See “Configuring Microsoft
Outlook” later in this chapter for the changes you need to make in
Outlook.
Microsoft
If you select Microsoft Outlook Express, enter the password for
Outlook Express your e-mail account. See “Configuring Microsoft Outlook
5.5 or later
Express” later in this chapter for details.
Lotus Notes
Enter your Lotus Notes ID and password. Click Browse if you need
to locate your Notes ID.
If you want to synchronize to a local mail file instead of a server
mail file, select the Synchronize to local (replicated) mail file check
box. You must do all of the following in order to synchronize to a
local mail file:
Eudora 5.0 or
later
254
■
Replicate the server mail file to the desktop.
■
Make sure the replicated mail file is in the Notes data directory.
■
If you have performed a custom Notes installation and have
replicated the server mail file to another directory on your
desktop, make sure that it is the path found in the notes.ini file.
See “Configuring Eudora” later in this chapter for more
information about the settings to make in Eudora.
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
Mail Client
Action
Direct POP
connection to
server
Select this option to synchronize an account by connecting
directly with a POP server. You must enter the information about
the server in the VersaMail application on your handheld when
you create the e-mail account to access the server. You will enter
information about the incoming (POP) server, the outgoing
(SMTP) server, your e-mail username, your password, and your
e-mail address. You can change these settings under Handheld
Settings in the conduit; see the procedure for setting handheld
synchronization settings later in this chapter.
During the HotSync operation, the conduit reads the settings you
made. If the settings do not exist or all server information is
wrong, an error is reported in the HotSync.log file. However, if the
incoming server (POP) is correct, the Inbox is synchronized if the
option to synchronize the Inbox is selected. If the outgoing server
(SMTP) is correct, the Outbox is synchronized (send e-mail) if you
selected the option to synchronize the Outbox. If neither is correct,
then nothing happens.
If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires
APOP authentication, you must select the option to use APOP on
your handheld. “Adding APOP to an account” later in this chapter
for details.
If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires
ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require
ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use ESMTP
on your handheld. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for details.
Direct IMAP
connection to
server
Select this option to synchronize an account by connecting
directly with an IMAP server. You must enter the information
about the server in the VersaMail application on your handheld
when you create the e-mail account to access the server. You will
enter information about the incoming (IMAP) server, the outgoing
(SMTP) server, your e-mail username, your password, and your
e-mail address. You can change these settings under Handheld
Settings in the conduit; see the procedure for setting handheld
synchronization settings later in this chapter.
During the HotSync operation, the conduit reads the settings you
made. If the settings do not exist or all server information is
wrong, an error is reported in the HotSync.log file. However, if the
incoming server (IMAP) is correct, the Inbox is synchronized if the
option to synchronize the Inbox is selected. If the outgoing server
(SMTP) is correct, the Outbox is synchronized (send e-mail) if you
selected the option to synchronize the Outbox. If neither is correct,
then nothing happens.
255
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Mail Client
Action
If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires
ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require
ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use ESMTP
on your handheld. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for details.
Other e-mail
applications
Select Microsoft Exchange 5.0 or later as a choice for the Mail
Client option if your e-mail application is compatible with
extended MAPI. If your e-mail application is compatible with
SMAPI, select Microsoft Outlook Express as a choice for the Mail
Client option.
NOTE A profile contains configuration information, such as the location of
incoming e-mail, your personal address book, and other information services
that you can use. The profile may be MS Exchange Settings, your name, or
something different. For more information on profiles, see your e-mail
application’s documentation.
5.
256
Under the account name, click Advanced Sync Options.
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
6.
Enter the synchronization options you want:
Maximum
message size
(KB)
Enter the maximum message size from 1 to 2048KB. If the
message exceeds the maximum size, the conduit truncates
the message. For example, the maximum message size might
be 50KB, and the message might have the following:
■
Message header: 1KB
■
Body: 20KB
■
Attachment: 140KB
■
Attachment: 220KB
In this case the conduit puts the message header, body, and
attachment 2—totaling 41KB—on the handheld. Attachment
1 is removed because adding it to the message causes the
message to exceed the maximum.
Days To
Synchronize
Mail
Set how many days of e-mail, between 0 and 999, that e-mail
should be synchronized. A value of 0 synchronizes all e-mail
in the Inbox during the next HotSync operation. For other
values, the conduit synchronizes e-mail for today and the
number of days preceding today. For example, if you enter a
value of 2, e-mail is synchronized for today and yesterday,
but if you enter 3, e-mail is synchronized for today,
yesterday, and the day before.
Synchronize
unread mail only
Select whether to synchronize all e-mail between your
desktop and your handheld, or unread e-mail only. By
default, the check box is deselected, meaning that all e-mail
will be synchronized.
Download
attachments
Select whether to download attachments during
synchronization. By default, the check box is selected; if
unselected, only the body text of any message containing an
attachment will be downloaded to your handheld during
synchronization.
Send e-mail from
Outbox
Select the check box to send any e-mail in the handheld’s
Outbox during the next HotSync operation.
Synchronize
incoming e-mail
Select the check box to synchronize the Inbox during the next
HotSync operation.
257
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
7.
(Optional) If you chose Microsoft Outlook, Microsoft Exchange, Lotus Notes, or
Direct IMAP as your mail client, click Folder Synchronization Options.
Set folder synchronization options as follows:
258
a.
Click the name of the folder you want.
b.
Click in the Synchronize column to the right of the folder name.
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
c.
8.
Click the arrow to open the drop-down list, and click Yes or No to
synchronize the folder or not.
Click OK.
You can now set synchronization options for your handheld for the selected
account.
To set handheld synchronization settings:
1.
Under the selected account name, click the plus sign to the left of Handheld
Settings.
Click plus
sign
259
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
2.
Click Account Information
3.
If you are using an account that is already configured on your handheld, the
account information will already be entered. If not, enter the following:
NOTE You do not need to fill in these fields if the account is a synchronize-only
account and the mail client is not Direct POP or Direct IMAP.
260
Display Name
Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing
messages, such as “Joe Smith.”
E-mail Address
Enter the e-mail address of the account you are accessing,
such as [email protected]
Username
Enter the username you use to access your e-mail. This is
generally the part of your e-mail address appearing before
the @ symbol; it is usually not your entire e-mail address.
Password
Enter the password for this account.
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
4.
Under Handheld Settings, click Server Settings.
5.
If you are using an account that is already configured on your handheld, the
account information will already be entered. If not, enter the following:
NOTE You do not need to fill in these fields if the account is a synchronize-only
account and the mail client is not Direct POP or Direct IMAP.
Incoming Mail
Server
Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as
pop.mail.yahoo.com.
Incoming Mail
Server Port
Number
The default is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers. If you
are not sure about the correct port number, check with your
mail server administrator.
Whether this
account requires
APOP
authentication
(POP accounts
only)
Selecting this check box encrypts your username and
password when traveling over the network. Some services
require APOP to work properly, while others do not work
properly if APOP is used. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or
web e-mail provider supports APOP, check with your e-mail
provider. “Adding APOP to an account” later in this chapter.
Outgoing Mail
Server
Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as
smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
261
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Outgoing Mail
Server Port
Number
The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If
you are not sure about the correct port number, check with
your mail server administrator.
Whether this
account requires
ESMTP
authentication
Select this check box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires
authentication. Check with your system administrator
before selecting this option. See “Adding ESMTP to an
account” later in this chapter for information. If you select
this option, username and password fields appear. These
fields are already filled in based on the account information
you entered previously. In most cases, the information
displayed is correct; however, occasionally your
authentication username and/or password is different from
your account username or password. Check with your
e-mail service provider for authentication username and
password information.
If you need to enter new information, enter a username
and/or tap the Password box and enter a password, and
then tap OK.
6.
Click the Save icon
on the toolbar to save the settings for this account.
Account information screens
Two screens in the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit provide summary
information on your accounts:
■
262
The Account Overview screen indicates whether the account is active; whether
the account has been synchronized and, if so, the last synchronization date; the
mail client for this account; and whether the mail client and/or the incoming
mail server has been changed since the last HotSync operation.
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
■
The Handheld Settings Overview screen lists the server protocol, display name,
e-mail address, incoming and outgoing mail server addresses, and whether
APOP or ESMTP authentication is required.
To view the Account Overview screen:
■
Click the selected account name.
To view the Handheld Settings Overview screen:
■
Under the selected account name, click Handheld Settings.
Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit shortcuts
You can use the icons in the toolbar to perform certain tasks quickly, such as saving
account configuration settings.
Icon
Action
Save account settings. Saves any changes you have made to
an account.
Add a new account. You are prompted to enter the account
name and protocol.
Delete an account. You are prompted to select the account to
delete from a drop-down list.
Quick Account Reference. Lists all accounts and shows
whether they are active and the date they were last
synchronized.
Help. Displays the Help window with complete online help.
263
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Verifying handheld account settings before synchronizing accounts
Certain settings you configure on your handheld for an e-mail account must be set
correctly for the synchronization process as well. Before configuring an e-mail
client on your desktop for synchronization, be sure to verify the following settings
on your handheld:
■
APOP and ESMTP: If you want to synchronize e-mail for an account that requires
either APOP or ESMTP authentication (for example, Yahoo accounts require
ESMTP authentication), you must select the option to use APOP or ESMTP on
your handheld. See “Adding APOP to an account” and “Adding ESMTP to an
account” later in this chapter for details.
■
Mail filters: Any mail filters you have configured for an e-mail account on your
handheld also apply during the synchronization process. For example, if you
have set filters to accept only e-mail containing the subject words “Current
Software Project,” only those same messages are synchronized between your
desktop and your handheld. Be sure to turn mail filters off if you want to
synchronize all messages between your desktop and your handheld. See
“Turning filters on and off” later in this chapter for details.
Configuring Microsoft Outlook
You can synchronize Microsoft Outlook 97/98/2000/XP with a VersaMail e-mail
account, but you must set Microsoft Outlook as the default e-mail handler. You
must check your username and password.
To configure Microsoft Outlook:
1.
In the Control Panel, click Internet Options.
NOTE For Windows XP, click Network and Internet Connections, and then click
Internet Options.
2.
Click the Programs tab.
3.
Select Microsoft Outlook as the default e-mail program.
4.
Click OK.
NOTE Make sure your username and password are set up correctly within Microsoft
Outlook.
Configuring Microsoft Outlook Express
You can synchronize a VersaMail e-mail account with Microsoft Outlook Express
5.5 or 6.0, but you must set Outlook Express as the default e-mail handler.
NOTE Make sure your username and password are set up correctly within Outlook
Express.
264
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
To configure Outlook Express:
1.
In the Control Panel, click Internet Options.
NOTE For Windows XP, click Network and Internet Connections, and then click
Internet Options.
2.
Click the Programs tab.
3.
Select Outlook Express as the default e-mail program.
4.
Click OK.
You can also make Outlook Express the default e-mail handler within the e-mail
application. From the Tools menu, select Options. Click the General tab, and then click
Make Default.
TIP
Configuring Eudora
If you are using Eudora as your e-mail application, you must set up MAPI in
Eudora.
To set up MAPI in Eudora:
1.
From the Eudora Tools menu, select Options.
2.
Do one of the following:
– If Eudora is the only e-mail application that you use, select Always as the
MAPI setting.
– If you use more than one e-mail application, select When Eudora is running
as the MAPI setting.
3.
Ensure that your username and password are set up correctly within Eudora.
This information is needed to log in to Eudora to retrieve and synchronize your
e-mail.
IMPORTANT Eudora must be running in order for you to perform a HotSync
operation. The VersaMail application synchronizes with your Dominant Personality in
Eudora 5.1 or later.
Converting attached files
You can use attachment conversion plug-ins to convert attached files that you are
receiving. Your handheld comes with DataViz Documents To Go version 5
installed, and Documents To Go plug-ins are automatically configured.
Documents To Go enables you to convert attachments using HotSync operations.
With Documents To Go, you can view Word, Excel, and PowerPoint attachments
on your handheld. See the Documents To Go Getting Started Manual for more
information.
265
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
When you receive a message with an attachment on your handheld, the file is
converted to the DataViz format on the handheld when you perform a HotSync
operation. You can then read and edit the file in Documents To Go on the handheld.
In the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit, you can turn off DataViz Documents To
Go plug-ins or select other plug-ins.
To turn off attachment conversion plug-ins:
1.
Click the HotSync Manager icon
2.
Select Custom.
3.
Select VersaMail in the Conduit list.
4.
Click Change.
5.
Click Attachment Conversion.
in the Windows system tray.
Plug-in types are listed in the left column. If the plug-in is selected, the right
column shows the name of the company supplying the plug-in. If a plug-in is
not selected, the right column reads Not Selected.
266
Synchronizing e-mail between the handheld and the desktop
NOTE The drop-down lists in the right column display only the companies
currently supplying plug-ins for a particular type. If more than one company
supplies a plug-in of a particular type (for example, Word doc), then multiple
company names appear on the list. If no company is currently supplying a
plug-in of a particular type, then the only option that appears on the list is Not
Selected.
6.
Do one of the following:
Item
Action
To deselect a plug-in
Click the right column next to the plug-in type name, and
then select Not Selected from the drop-down list.
To select a plug-in
Click the right column next to the plug-in type name, and
then select the name of the company supplying the
plug-in from the drop-down list.
Click the right column next to the plug-in type name, and
To change the
company supplying a then select the name of the company you want to supply
plug-in of a particular the plug-in from the drop-down list.
type
7.
Click save.
Synchronizing an account
To synchronize accounts, you must set the HotSync action for the VersaMail
application in the HotSync Manager. You can, however, exclude e-mail accounts
from a HotSync operation.
If you don’t want an account synchronized, deselect the check box Select this
check box to synchronize this e-mail account when you perform a HotSync operation.
TIP
267
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To select which accounts are synchronized during a HotSync operation:
268
1.
Click the HotSync Manager icon
2.
Select Custom.
3.
Select VersaMail in the Conduit list.
4.
Click Change.
5.
Select one of the following:
in the Windows system tray.
Synchronize
Active Accounts
Select this option to include active accounts in the next
HotSync operation. For an account to be synchronized, you
must have selected the option Check this box to synchronize
this mail account when you perform a HotSync operation.
Do Nothing
Select this option to exclude e-mail accounts from the next
HotSync operation.
6.
(Optional) Select Set Selection As Default to apply the options you selected to
all subsequent HotSync operations. Otherwise, the settings apply to the next
HotSync operation only.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Perform a HotSync operation.
Going beyond the basics
Synchronizing multiple accounts
You can synchronize more than one account during the same HotSync operation.
NOTE If you want to synchronize both a Microsoft Outlook and a Microsoft Outlook
Express account, you must have Microsoft Outlook set as the default e-mail client on
the desktop.
The maximum number of accounts you can synchronize are as follows:
■
1 Simple MAPI account (for example, an account set up using Outlook Express
or Eudora)
■
1 Extended MAPI account (for example, an account set up using Outlook)
■
1 Lotus Notes account
■
5 combined direct POP or direct IMAP accounts
If you attempt to synchronize more than the limit for a particular type of account
during a HotSync operation, you will receive an alert prompting you to deactivate
any accounts over the allowed number.
Going beyond the basics
You use many of the VersaMail application features, such as getting and sending
e-mail, daily. Other features are used less frequently but are especially valuable in
certain situations. For example, filtering e-mail is helpful if you are traveling and
want to receive messages only from certain people or about specific subjects.
Filters and other special features are discussed in this chapter.
This section describes the following:
■
Creating and using filters to determine which e-mail you actually view
■
Managing mail settings
■
Adding APOP to an account
■
Adding ESMTP to an account
■
Setting advanced account options
■
Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in other applications
■
Using the command bar
■
Viewing e-mail header details
■
Backing up your mail databases
■
Synchronizing IMAP folders wirelessly
The section ends with a summary of the VersaMail application navigator controls
and keyboard shortcuts.
269
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Managing mail filters
Filters provide efficient ways to manage e-mail retrieval and storage. When you
tap Get Mail or Get & Send, filters determine which e-mail messages are
downloaded to your handheld and in which folder the downloaded messages are
stored.
For example, you may want to file e-mail about sales meetings in a Sales folder.
You can create a filter that automates this action, so that whenever you receive
e-mail about sales meetings, it is immediately sent to the Sales folder, which you
created on the filters screen.
Creating mail filters
To create a mail filter, you select various criteria, such as To, From, and Contains.
This information makes up the filter statement.
For example, if you want stock quotes from your online brokerage service sent to
a folder you created called Finance, you can filter those e-mail messages and store
them in the Finance folder. The filter statement, which is displayed in the Filter
Editor, is shown in the following figure.
IMPORTANT If you create a filter, only messages that meet the filter criteria are
downloaded to your handheld. You do not see any other messages that have been
sent to you, even in your Inbox. To avoid this, you must set up two filters as described
in the following procedure. Using the example above, the first filter would have all
mail containing “onlinebroker” in the “From” field moved to the “Finance” folder.
For the second filter, you should specify that all mail NOT containing “onlinebroker”
in the “From” field should be moved to the Inbox (or other folder you designate). If
you do not create this second filter, then only messages containing “onlinebroker” in
the “From” field are downloaded to your handheld.
270
Going beyond the basics
To create a filter:
1.
From the Inbox or another folder, press Function
+ Menu
2.
Select Options, and then select Filters.
3.
Tap New.
4.
Enter a short description of the filter in the Name field.
5.
Use the If the pick lists to create criteria for the filter.
.
The three pick lists and the edit line combine to create a statement that identifies
the type of e-mail and where you want the e-mail stored. For example, a filter
might read, “If the [Subject] [Contains] sales meeting, Then get mail and move
to [Sales].” When you use this filter to sort incoming e-mail, any e-mail
containing sales meeting in the subject line is filed in the Sales folder.
To pick list
Select the message header field with the information
contained in the edit line: To, From, Subject, cc, Date, Size.
For example, you might select Date to download only
messages that are less than a certain number of days old.
Contains pick list
Select a filter action: Contains, Starts with, Does NOT
Contain.
271
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
6.
Edit line
Enter the text that must be found in the header field. For
example, if you want to sort e-mail with the subject Sales,
enter “Sales.” If you enter more than one criteria, separate
each with a comma—for example, Sales, New York.
Then get mail and
move to pick list
Select the folder or mailbox into which you want your
filtered e-mail to go. You can also create a new folder for
storing the incoming e-mail. Tap Edit Folders, and then
create a new folder or delete or rename existing ones.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
The filter appears in the Filters list.
Selected filters execute in the order in which they appear on the list. Move filters
up and down the list to ensure that they execute in the correct order.
NOTE Filters created on the handheld also apply to e-mail synchronization. See
“Synchronizing an account” earlier in this chapter for more information.
Turning filters on and off
By default, a filter that is turned on or selected affects all subsequent downloads of
e-mail until you deselect it. More than one filter can be in effect at once. Before you
download e-mail, be sure to turn on the filters you want and turn off those you
don’t want.
To turn a filter on or off:
272
1.
Press Function
+ Menu
.
2.
Select Options, and then select Filters.
Going beyond the basics
The Filters dialog box appears with the filters you created.
Filters with a checkmark are
turned on
3.
Tap the pick list in the upper-left corner, and select Connected or Synchronize.
– Connected applies a filter to messages downloaded to your handheld over a
modem or network connection.
– Synchronize applies a filter to messages downloaded to your handheld
during a HotSync operation.
4.
Tap the filter check boxes to select the filters you want to use for subsequent
e-mail transactions.
If you deselect a filter listed under Connected, be sure that the filter
is deselected also under Synchronize.
IMPORTANT
5.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Editing or deleting a filter
You can edit a filter to change its name or the criteria in the filter.
To edit or delete a filter:
1.
Press Function
+ Menu
.
2.
Select Options, and then select Filters.
3.
Tap the name of the filter.
273
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
4.
Do one of the following:
– To edit the filter, revise your entry in the Name field and/or your selections
in the pick lists, and revise the text in the edit line. Tap OK.
– To delete the filter, tap Delete, and then tap Yes to confirm the deletion.
5.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Managing mail settings
You can configure advanced mail settings such as server information, incoming
and outgoing mail server options, and more, for each e-mail account.
To select the account whose settings you want to manage:
1.
In your Inbox or on another folder screen, press Function
2.
Select Options.
3.
Select Mail Servers.
+ Menu
Shows server settings for current
account. Tap the Account pick list
to edit the account.
4.
Tap the Account pick list, and then tap Edit Accounts.
All e-mail accounts
appear in the list
5.
274
Tap the name of the account whose settings you want to manage, and then
tap OK.
.
Going beyond the basics
To change the protocol type:
1.
On the Server Settings screen, tap the Protocol pick list, and then tap POP or
IMAP.
2.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
To change your username or password:
1.
On the Server Settings screen, enter a new username.
Your username is typically the first part of your e-mail address, which appears
before the @ symbol.
2.
Tap the Password box, and enter a new password in the Password Entry dialog
box. The VersaMail 2.5 application provides strong 128-bit AES encryption for
your password.
3.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
To set a default service for this account (different from the default service for your handheld):
1.
On the Server Settings screen, tap the Always connect using check box.
Tap to change the service
connection for this e-mail
account only from your default
handheld service connection
275
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
2.
Tap the connection type you want from the Services pick list.
Select a service connection for
this e-mail account only
3.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
NOTE Select this option only if you want a given e-mail account to use a
different service from the default service you set for your handheld. For
example, you may have selected a default service that uses the built-in GPRS
radio on your handheld to make a network connection. However, for your
Earthlink account, you may want to switch to the Earthlink service, which uses
dial-up GSM to make a network connection. To do this, tap the Always connect
using check box, and then select Earthlink from the Services pick list. Leave this
check box deselected if you want to use your default handheld service for the
Earthlink account.
See Chapter 20 for information on setting connection types using the
Connection Preferences and Network Preferences screens. See “Selecting a
different service for a given e-mail account” earlier in this chapter for details on
using a different service for a specific e-mail account.
To change e-mail address/mail server settings:
276
1.
On the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2.
Tap the Options pick list and select Address/Servers.
Going beyond the basics
3.
4.
Edit any of the following:
Email address
Enter the e-mail address of the account you are accessing,
such as [email protected]
Incoming mail
server
Enter the name of your incoming (POP) mail server, such as
pop.mail.yahoo.com.
Outgoing mail
server
Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server, such as
smtp.mail.yahoo.com.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
To change incoming mail server settings:
1.
On the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2.
Tap the Options pick list and select Incoming Mail.
277
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
3.
Select or enter either of the following:
Get unread mail
ONLY
For IMAP accounts, retrieves unread e-mail only. To get all
e-mail and not just unread e-mail, deselect Get unread mail
ONLY.
Maximum
Message Size
Shows the maximum message size that you can receive.
.
4.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
To set additional incoming mail options:
278
1.
On the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2.
Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Incoming.
Going beyond the basics
3.
The incoming mail options are different depending on the connection type you
selected and the server protocol—POP or IMAP.
POP accounts
IMAP accounts
Port Number
Defaults to 110 for POP and to 143 for IMAP servers. If you
are not sure about the correct port number, check with your
mail server administrator.
Leave mail on
server (POP only)
Leaves e-mail that you receive on the handheld on the server
also.
Use APOP
(POP only)
Encrypts your username and password when traveling over
the network. Some services require APOP to work properly,
while others do not work properly if APOP is used. If you
aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider supports
APOP, check with your e-mail provider. See “Adding APOP
to an account” later in this chapter.
Mailbox (IMAP
only)
Defines the root mailbox on your IMAP server.
Deleted Mail
(IMAP only)
Stores deleted e-mail in the folder you specify on the server.
This field is case sensitive, so spell the folder name exactly as
it is on the server. For example, if your Deleted Mail folder is
called Trash on the server, you must enter Trash in this space.
Sent Mail (IMAP
only)
Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server. This
field is case sensitive, and the folder name should be spelled
exactly as it is on the server.
If you are using the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit and have an IMAP
account, you must configure the outgoing mail settings to send mail.
279
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
To set outgoing mail server (SMTP) settings:
1.
On the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2.
Tap the Options pick list and select Outgoing Mail.
3.
Enter any of the following:
4.
280
Display Name
Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing
messages, such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply To Address
Enter the e-mail address that you want recipients to see and
reply to on your e-mail messages, only if it is different from
the e-mail address from which you are sending the message.
For example, if you are sending a message from
[email protected] but you want recipients to reply to
[email protected], enter the reply-to address here. Reply To
Address makes it look like the e-mail came from the address
you entered.
BCC
Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e-mail
message you send to another e-mail address. The blind copy
e-mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the
message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages
you send from your handheld to be sent to your desktop
e-mail account, enter that e-mail address.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Going beyond the basics
To set additional outgoing mail options:
1.
On the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
2.
Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Outgoing.
3.
Set additional options for outgoing e-mail:
Port Number
The default is 25, the port number most SMTP servers use. If
you are not sure about the correct port number, check with
your mail server administrator.
My server requires
authentication
(ESMTP)
Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) check
box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication.
Check with your system administrator before selecting this
option. See “Adding ESMTP to an account” later in this
chapter for information. If you select this option, username
and password fields appear. These fields are already filled in
based on the account information you entered previously. In
most cases, the information displayed is correct; however,
occasionally your authentication username and/or
password is different from your account username or
password. Check with your e-mail service provider for
authentication username and password information.
If you need to enter new information, enter a username
and/or tap the Password box and enter a password, and
then tap OK.
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
4.
Tap OK twice, or press Function
+ Enter
twice.
281
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Adding APOP to an account
To encrypt your username and password when they are traveling over the
network, some services require APOP to work properly, while others do not work
properly if APOP is used. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider
supports APOP, check with your e-mail provider.
NOTE APOP works only with accounts that use the POP protocol.
To edit an account and add APOP:
1.
In your Inbox or on another folder screen, press Function
2.
Select Options.
3.
Select Mail Servers.
4.
Tap the Account pick list and select Edit Accounts.
+ Menu
All e-mail accounts
appear in the list
282
5.
Tap the name of the account you want to change, and then tap OK.
6.
On the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
7.
Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Incoming.
.
Going beyond the basics
8.
Select the Use APOP check box.
9.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Adding ESMTP to an account
Some services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and
password on an SMTP server. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web e-mail provider
supports ESMTP, check with your e-mail provider.
To edit an account and add ESMTP:
1.
In your Inbox or on another folder screen, press Function
2.
Select Options.
3.
Select Mail Servers.
4.
Tap the Account pick list and select Edit Accounts.
+ Menu
.
All e-mail accounts
appear in the list
5.
Tap the name of the account you want to change, and then tap OK.
6.
On the Server Settings screen, tap Details.
283
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
7.
Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Outgoing.
8.
Select the My server requires authentication (ESMTP) check box if the outgoing
server (SMTP) requires authentication. Check with your system administrator
before selecting this option. If you select this option, username and password
fields appear. These fields are already filled in based on the account information
you entered previously. In most cases, the information displayed is correct;
however, occasionally your authentication username and/or password is
different from your account username or password. Check with your e-mail
service provider for authentication username and password information.
If you need to enter new information, enter a username and/or tap the
Password box and enter a password, and then tap OK.
Username and Password fields appear only if
ESMTP check box is selected
9.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
Setting advanced account preferences
You can set advanced preferences for each e-mail account. Any preferences you set
are account-specific; they apply only to the account you are currently in.
To set advanced account preferences:
284
1.
In your Inbox or on another folder screen, press Function
2.
Select Options.
3.
Select Preferences.
+ Menu
.
Going beyond the basics
4.
Tap Advanced.
5.
Select any of the following preferences:
Enable Smart
Addressing
Types ahead and completes a recognized e-mail address. See
the procedure for creating new e-mail later in this chapter for
more information.
Auto-Empty Mail
from Trash
Determines how often e-mail messages in the trash are
automatically deleted. See “Emptying the trash” earlier in
this chapter for more information.
Timeout
Sets the number of seconds to try to connect before timing
out. This value can be any number greater than 0 seconds;
however, if you set the number too low, your connection
attempt may time out before you make a connection with the
e-mail service provider.
The default setting is 45 seconds. To change, tap the Timeout
field and enter a new value.
Auto-Disconnect
Automatically disconnects your remote connections after
each command. Each command you perform initiates a new
call to your ISP. This setting is not recommended if you plan
to perform multiple e-mail transactions in a short amount of
time.
285
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Disconnect on
Exit
Disconnects from the network only after you leave the
VersaMail application. This feature is an alternative to
Auto-Disconnect. This option keeps your connection active
while you perform multiple transactions in the VersaMail
application, but automatically disconnects when you move
on to a different application on your handheld. If this option
is not selected, you must manually disconnect from your ISP.
Modem Wait
Displays the number of seconds that the modem uses to
initialize itself. If you have a modem, tap and enter a number
of seconds for the wait. The typical setting for a wireless
modem is 3, and the typical setting for most normal modems
is 0.
Cutting and copying text from an e-mail message for use in other applications
You can copy any text from an e-mail message, either from one you have composed
or have read or from an attachment you have downloaded and opened (such as a
Word doc), for use elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another
application. Text you can select and copy includes:
■
A name
■
An e-mail address
■
Body text of an e-mail message or a downloaded attachment
To copy and paste text from an e-mail message:
1.
Select the text by dragging the stylus over it.
2.
Press Command
3.
To paste the text elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another
application, go to the new location and press Command
+ P.
+ C.
You can also cut or copy text from a Word document that you download as an
attachment and view on your handheld. You can then paste this text in another
part of the Word document, another Word document, or another application on
your handheld.
To cut/copy and paste text from within a Word document:
1.
Select the text by dragging the stylus over it.
2.
Press Command
3.
To paste the text elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another
application, go to the new location and press Command
+ P.
+ X.
See “Performing common tasks” in Chapter 4 for more information on copying
and pasting.
286
Going beyond the basics
Using the command bar
The command bar provides shortcuts for performing numerous tasks. The options
presented on the command bar may change, depending on which screen is
displayed in the application. For example, if you are viewing a message in the
Inbox, the command bar gives you the option of quickly moving the message to
another folder. See “Moving e-mail between folders” earlier in this chapter.
To access the command bar on your handheld:
■
Press Command
on the keyboard.
For each type of screen, the command bar offers various options.
View
List (Inbox, Outbox, and so
on showing list of
messages)
Options
Select all messages.
Deselect all messages.
Change display font (toggles between large and
small font).
Delete messages from the handheld; icon appears
only if you have previously selected at least one
message.
Empty the trash; icon appears only if you have
previously deleted at least one message.
Reading a message
Delete message from the handheld.
Move message to a different folder; select folder
from pick list.
Change display font (toggles between large and
small font).
Composing a message
Insert the @ symbol into a recipient’s e-mail
address.
Add attachment.
Undoes last action; icon appears in command bar
only if you have previously performed one of the
actions above or any of the cut/copy/paste
functions described below.
Reading or composing a
message
Cuts selected text.
Copies selected text.
Pastes selected text.
See “Menu commands” in Chapter 4 for more information on the command bar.
287
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Changing e-mail header details
When viewing a message in any folder, you can change the view of the message
header. The e-mail header options are as follows:
■
Short header: Shows
sender’s name or address (From field) and subject line
(Subj field).
Short header
shows sender
name and
message subject
only
■
Full header:
Tap header icon to switch to full
header
Shows the following:
– Sender’s name or e-mail address (From field)
– Subject line (Subj field)
– Date message was composed, sent, or received (Date field)
– Size of message including any attachments (Size field)
– Recipient’s name or e-mail address (To field)
Tap header icon to switch to
short header
Full header
shows sender,
subject, date,
size, and
recipient
information
288
Going beyond the basics
You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are
composing. Short header shows the To and Subject fields only; full header shows
the To, cc:, bcc:, and Subject fields.
Message long header
Message short header
Tap header icon
to switch to
short header
Tap header
icon to switch
to full header
To switch between short header and full header view:
■
Tap the header icon in the upper-right corner of the message screen.
Backing up mail databases
In most cases your e-mail is on your server, so you do not need to back up your
e-mail database from your handheld. If you want to make sure you have a current
copy of all your e-mail, you can back up all the e-mail databases from the
handheld.
To back up the e-mail database:
1.
Press Command
+ R.
Alternately, press Function
Preferences.
+ Menu
2.
Tap System.
3.
Tap Backup ALL Databases to select it.
, select Options, and then select
NOTE If you don’t select this option, HotSync operations are faster.
4.
Tap OK, or press Function
+ Enter
.
289
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Wireless IMAP folder synchronization
If you create an IMAP folder in an account on your handheld that matches a folder
on the mail server, you can wirelessly synchronize e-mail messages that you move
into or out of the IMAP folder, or delete in the folder.
When you synchronize a folder, any e-mail messages in the selected folder on the
mail server will be downloaded to the same folder on your handheld. Any
messages moved out of the selected folder on your handheld or deleted on your
handheld will be moved or deleted in the folder on the mail server.
Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your handheld and/or the
mail server, you may have to perform some steps before you can wirelessly
synchronize e-mail messages between your handheld and the server, as follows:
■
If you need to create a folder on both your handheld and the server, see
“Creating and editing mail folders” earlier in this chapter. Be sure to select the
Also create on server check box as described in that section, After creating the
folders, continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP
folders.
■
If there is a folder on the mail server but you need to create it on your handheld,
see “Creating and editing mail folders” earlier in this chapter. You do not need
to select the Also create on server check box as described in that section. After
creating the folder, continue with the following procedures for synchronizing
IMAP folders.
■
If you have a folder on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server,
continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP folders.
You can synchronize server folders either during a Get Mail operation, or from a
menu.
NOTE You can synchronize folders whose names are up to 16 characters in length.
You can synchronize up to 11 custom folders you create, in addition to the default
folders Inbox, Outbox, Drafts, Sent, and Trash.
To wirelessly synchronize handheld/mail server IMAP folders during a Get Mail operation:
290
1.
From within an IMAP e-mail account, tap Get Mail.
2.
Select the Sync IMAP Folders check box and then tap OK.
3.
Select the check box next to each folder you want to synchronize. You can select
more than one folder.
Going beyond the basics
4.
(Optional) The Subjects Only check box is selected or deselected based on the
preference you set for getting mail. Select or deselect the check box to change
this preference for the IMAP e -mail account only.
5.
(Optional) Select the Use Filters check box to apply any filters you have created
to the IMAP e-mail account. See “Managing mail filters” earlier in this chapter
for information.
6.
Tap OK.
To wirelessly synchronize handheld/mail server IMAP folders from the Options menu:
1.
In your Inbox or on another folder screen of an IMAP e-mail account, press
Function
+ Menu
.
2.
Select Options.
3.
Select Sync IMAP Folders (alternately, press Command
4.
From the pick list, select the folders you want to synchronize either by tapping
the folder name or by using the navigator, as shown in the following table.
+ L).
Button
Action
Select
If no folder is selected, the Select button highlights the first
visible folder on the list. If a folder is selected, the Select button
toggles the check box between selected and deselected.
Up or Down
If a folder is selected, use Up and Down to scroll up or down
one folder on the list. If no folder is selected, use Up and Down
to scroll up or down one page.
Left
If a folder is selected, deselects the folder. No function if no
folder is selected.
Right
No function.
A connection is made to your e-mail service provider to update the server with
changes from your handheld, and to have your handheld updated with changes
from the server.
291
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Five-way navigation in the VersaMail application
The following table summarizes the controls for the five-way navigator on your
handheld that are specific to the VersaMail application. See “Using the navigator”
in Chapter 3 for general navigator information.
View
Selection
Navigation
Function
Main List
(Inbox or
other folder
list)
No message
selected
Up/Down
Scrolls between messages in list.
Select
Highlights the first message in the
list.
Right
No function.
Left
No function.
Select
Opens messages for viewing.
Right
Displays popup menu that normally
appears when you click on the e-mail
icon for each message.
Left
Deselects the highlighted message.
Up/Down
In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields: Tabs
to the next/previous field.
Message
selected
Compose
N/A
New Message
In message body text: Scrolls the text
viewed on the text list.
Select
No function.
Right
In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields:
Moves to the next character.
In message body text: No function.
Left
In To, cc, bcc, and Subject fields:
Moves to previous character.
In message body text: No function.
292
Going beyond the basics
View
Selection
Navigation
Function
Read
Message
N/A
Up/Down
Scrolls the message text.
Select
Returns you to list view.
Right
Displays the next message. If you are
viewing the last message, returns
you to the folder list view.
Left
Displays the previous message. If
you are viewing the first message in
the folder, returns you to the folder
list view.
When you return to the list view (Inbox or other folder) after viewing a message,
the message you were viewing may or may not be selected in the list, according to
the following:
■
If you pressed Select to view the message, the message will be highlighted on
the list when you return to the list view.
■
If you used the stylus or pressed Right or Left to view the message, it will not
be highlighted when you return to the list view. If you press Select, the first
message in the list will be selected.
The following sample procedure shows how to use the navigator to read and
delete a message.
To read and delete a message:
1.
Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the message you want to read.
2.
Press Select to select the message, and then press Select again to open the
message.
3.
After reading the message, press Select to close the message.
4.
(Optional) The cursor should remain on the selected message. If not, press Up
or Down to scroll to the message, and press Select to select the message.
5.
Press Right to open the pop-up menu.
6.
Press Down to scroll to Delete Message.
7.
Press Select to delete the message.
8.
Press Select to confirm that you want to delete the message.
293
Chapter 16 Using Palm™ VersaMail™ Personal E-mail Software
Keyboard shortcuts in the VersaMail application
The following table summarizes the keyboard shortcuts specific to the VersaMail
application. See “Using the keyboard” in Chapter 3 for general keyboard shortcut
information.
To use a keyboard shortcut:
294
1.
Press Command
.
2.
Press the letter of the shortcut.
ShortCut
Feature
C
Copy
D
Delete
E
Empty Trash
F
Forward Message
H
Mark Read
I
Mark Unread
K
Keyboard
L
Address Lookup
M
Get Message
N
Create New Message
O
Reply to Message
P
Paste
Q
Go to Bottom
R
Preferences …
S
Select All
T
Go to Top
U
Undo
V
Move To …
W
Save to Draft
X
Cut
Y
Send
Z
Deselect All
Press & hold Mail
Get & Send
CHAPTER 17
Using Palm™ WAP Browser
Palm™ WAP Browser enables you to quickly and easily browse the Internet
by using specially formatted WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites. Use
Palm WAP Browser to do the following:
■
Access specially formatted WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites.
■
Sign up with a provider to receive Push messages automatically to inform you
of important events, such as changes in stock prices.
■
Bookmark special WAP sites so that you can easily return to them.
■
Make confidential transactions using encrypted keys.
■
Store and manage certificates.
NOTE Not all wireless service providers support Palm WAP Browser. Check with
your wireless service provider to see if this application is supported. If it is, you must
install Palm WAP Browser from the Software Essentials CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT Whenever you use the wireless features of your handheld, please
observe the guidelines or prohibitions on the use of wireless devices in your current
location. For example, when you are on an airplane, do not turn on your radio at
times when government or airline regulations prohibit the use of cellular phones. You
can, of course, use all other applications of your handheld in accordance with airline
regulations for electronic devices.
Opening Palm WAP Browser
Some wireless service providers have set the Wireless button
to open Palm
WAP Browser rather than Palm Web Browser. If your handheld is set to open Palm
WAP Browser from the Wireless button, Palm WAP Browser opens the wireless
service provider’s launch page.
295
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
To open Palm WAP Browser from the Applications Launcher:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the WAP icon
.
A Welcome screen appears, indicating that you have successfully opened Palm
WAP Browser.
NOTE The appearance of the Welcome screen may differ depending on the
wireless service provider you are using.
Tap to access
menu items.
Tap icons to access
functions.
Indicates status of Push
Inbox. Tap to go to Push
Inbox.
Opening a WAP site
Palm WAP Browser allows you to open WAP sites on the Internet. WAP sites are
formatted using WML (Wireless Markup Language). These WAP site addresses
(URLs) usually begin with wap—for example, wap.palm.com. Some WML sites
also use www.
NOTE Palm WAP Browser does not open the same web sites as a standard web
browser. Standard web sites are formatted using HTML (Hypertext Markup
Language), and the URLs usually begin with www—for example, www.palm.com.
To open a WAP site, do one of the following:
■
Enter a URL.
■
Select a URL from the history list.
■
Select a bookmark (see “Using bookmarks” later in this chapter).
To open a WAP site by entering a URL:
1.
Open the Open URL dialog box by doing one of the following:
– Tap the Globe icon
in the upper-right corner.
– Press Command Stroke
– Press Function
296
+ Menu
+ O.
, and then select Open URL on the Go menu.
Browsing a WAP site
2.
Enter the URL.
Enter characters using the keyboard, or by tapping an item to insert common
URL elements.
Tap item to insert common URL elements
3.
Tap Open.
To open a WAP site from the history list:
1.
Tap the Globe icon
.
2.
Tap the pick list arrow.
The most recently visited WAP site URLs are listed.
Tap pick list
arrow
3.
Select a URL from the history pick list and tap Open.
Browsing a WAP site
Browsing a WAP site using Palm WAP Browser is similar to using a standard
Internet browser. The browsing area displays the WAP site with text and
underlined hyperlinks that can be accessed by tapping the link. The title bar
displays information such as the name of the WAP site and navigation icons.
When a WAP page is being downloaded, the title bar displays the following:
■
Status
Connecting: Indicates
the handheld is connecting to the WAP gateway.
Sending: Indicates the Palm WAP Browser is sending a request to a WAP site to
download a page.
Receiving: Indicates the Palm WAP Browser is receiving content from the WAP
gateway.
297
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
■
Stop icon: Tapping the Stop icon halts the download, and only areas of the page
that were downloaded are displayed.
■
Signal strength indicator: Shows the signal
strength of the connection. If the
signal strength indicator shows only one or two bars, the download could take
longer or fail. Move to an area where you have a strong signal.
Status
Tap Stop icon to halt download
Signal strength indicator
When the WAP site is fully downloaded on the handheld, the title bar changes to
display the name of the WAP site and the following navigation icons:
Returns to the previous page.
■
Back:
■
Reload: Downloads current page from the source. If you are using cache
memory, the current page that is saved in cache memory is not used.
■
Open URL, Bookmarks, and Home: Provide the same function as on the Welcome
screen (see “Opening Palm WAP Browser” earlier in this chapter).
Title indicates name
of WAP site.
Navigation icons:
Back
Reload
Open URL
Bookmarks
Home
Browsing secure WAP sites
When you access certain secure WAP sites, such as a bank, you are temporarily
transferred to a secure gateway. Whenever you are transferred to a secure gateway,
you are informed of the change and asked for permission.
Tap OK to change to another gateway
Tap Cancel to deny permission to change to
another gateway
Once you have finished with the secure site, the Palm WAP Browser will
automatically changes back to the default WAP gateway.
298
Using bookmarks
If the Palm WAP Browser is connected to a gateway using the optional security
layer WTLS, a small padlock is displayed in the title area. Tapping the Padlock icon
opens the Connection Information dialog box describing the WAP gateway
address and WAP stack configuration.
Tap Padlock icon
If you have a secure connection using a WAP gateway server certificate, tapping
the View certificate button displays certificate information.
Tap View certificate
Using bookmarks
Bookmarks allow you to manage a list of your favorite WAP sites. You can easily
access your bookmarks by tapping the Bookmark icon in the title bar.
Adding a bookmark
You can add a WAP site to the Bookmarks list in two ways:
■
Add the current WAP page using the Go menu.
■
Enter the information in the Edit Bookmarks dialog box.
299
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
To bookmark the current WAP page:
1.
Open the WAP site.
2.
Press Command Stroke
+ B.
Alternately, press Function
Bookmarks on the Go Menu.
+ Menu
, and then select Add to
Tap to add the current WAP
page to Bookmarks
To enter a bookmark from the Edit Bookmarks dialog box:
1.
Tap the Bookmark icon
2.
Tap Edit Bookmarks.
.
Tap Edit Bookmarks
3.
Tap New.
Tap New
300
Using bookmarks
4.
Enter the bookmark name and URL, and then tap Done.
Enter Bookmark
name and URL
Tap Done
Visiting a bookmarked WAP site
By tapping a bookmark on the Bookmarks list, you can quickly open the WAP site.
To open a WAP site from the Bookmarks dialog box:
1.
Tap the Bookmark icon
.
2.
Tap a bookmark to begin downloading the WAP page.
Tap a bookmark
Editing a bookmark
You can edit an existing bookmark using the Edit Bookmarks dialog box.
To edit a bookmark:
1.
Tap the Bookmark icon
2.
Tap Edit Bookmarks.
.
Tap Edit Bookmarks
301
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
3.
Select a bookmark, and then tap Edit.
Tap Edit
4.
Edit the bookmark name and URL, and then tap OK.
Edit the bookmark
name and URL
Tap OK
Deleting a bookmark
You can delete sites from your bookmarks list using the Edit Bookmarks dialog
box.
To delete a bookmark:
1.
Tap the Bookmark icon
.
2.
Tap Edit Bookmarks.
3.
Tap the bookmark you want to delete.
Tap bookmark
Tap Delete
302
4.
Tap Delete.
5.
In the Confirmation dialog box, tap OK.
Using your Push Inbox
Using your Push Inbox
The Push Inbox lists all WAP Push messages received or stored by the handheld.
Push messages are sent from services that you sign up for–for example,
notifications of new e-mails, changes in stock prices, and so on. The service must
support WAP Push.
You can open the Push Inbox in the following two ways:
■
Tap Push Inbox from the Go menu.
Tap to go to Push Inbox
■
Tap the new message line on the Welcome screen.
Tap to go to Push Inbox
Unread messages are displayed in bold font.
Time of arrival
Extract from the messages
Priority of the message
Tap Done to close the Push Inbox
Tap Clear All to delete all messages
The Push Inbox list has the following three columns:
■
Priority of the message
– 1—High
– 2—Medium
– 3—Low
303
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
■
Extract from the message
■
Time of arrival:
The time of arrival is set differently depending on when the
message was received. If it was received today, the time of arrival is shown. If
received yesterday, the text Yesterday is displayed. If received earlier than
yesterday, the date of arrival is displayed.
Tapping a message opens the Push Message dialog box, showing all available
information about the message. This dialog box displays the following:
Where the message came from
■
From:
■
Received:
■
URL:
■
Message:
Date and time the message was received
The URL associated with the message
The content of the message
Tap address to open WAP site
Tap Done to close and save message
Tap Delete to delete message
Using advanced features
Palm WAP Browser has many advanced features that allow you to modify
performance and set security features. These options affect the performance of
your browser and should be set by knowledgeable users. You may want to consult
with technical support from your wireless service provider before changing some
of these options.
Changing gateways
When you connect to the Internet, you normally connect through the default WAP
gateway. Gateways are servers used to access WAP sites.
NOTE Generally, the gateway is automatically set by your wireless service provider
and it may be hidden or locked. Changing this setting can disable your Palm WAP
Browser’s ability to access sites, so please exercise caution if you alter this setting.
304
Setting advanced options
You can check or change the gateway settings from the Gateway dialog box. To
access the Gateway dialog box, tap Gateway Settings on the Options menu.
Tap Gateway
Settings
Setting advanced options
The Advanced dialog box allows you to enable or disable the cache functions,
select an access point name, and select a mode.
Tap
Advanced
Tap arrow to
make a
selection
Tap OK to implement change
Using cache memory
The Cache pick list on the Advanced dialog box allows you to enable or disable the
cache memory. The default setting is cache memory enabled. Cache memory stores
and displays a previously loaded WAP page rather than reloading the page each
time. This enables you to save time in viewing pages, but you might view an older
saved page rather than an updated one.
Tap the Cache arrow and select Enabled or
Disabled
Tap OK to accept change
305
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
When viewing a page, you can update the current page by tapping the Reload icon.
A new page is downloaded from the WAP site.
Tap the Reload icon to
download a new current page
You can also clear cache memory so that all stored pages are deleted by tapping the
Clear Cache button on the Advanced dialog box.
Tap Clear Cache to clear all pages
stored in cache memory
Selecting an Access Point Name
The APN pick list on the Advanced dialog box allows you to select an Access Point
Name (APN) from a preset number of alternatives. The selections available in the
APN list are dependent on your wireless service provider. The APN may be preset
or configured automatically by your wireless service provider.
NOTE Changing the APN can disrupt your access to the Internet. Contact your
wireless service provider for more information.
Tap APN arrow to set APN
306
Setting advanced options
Selecting Mode
NOTE Changing the mode can disrupt your access to the Internet. The mode should
not be changed unless you receive specific instructions from your wireless service
provider.
The Mode pick list on the Advanced dialog box allows you to set the WAP stack
configuration. There are two standard modes and two secure modes:
Standard modes
■
Connectionless (CL-WSP: Connectionless - Wireless Session Protocol)
■
Connection Oriented (CO-WSP: Connection Oriented - Wireless Session
Protocol)
Secure modes
■
WTLS Connectionless (CL-WTLS-WSP: Connectionless - Wireless Transport
Layer Security - Wireless Session Protocol)
■
WTLS Conn. Oriented (CO-WTLS-WSP: Connection Oriented - Wireless
Transport Layer Security - Wireless Session Protocol)
Each mode has a port number associated with it:
■
Connectionless - 9200
■
Connection Oriented - 9201
■
WTLS Connectionless - 9202
■
WTLS Conn. Oriented - 9203
Once the WAP stack configuration for a WAP gateway is set, this parameter should
not be changed unless you want to use another WAP gateway (see “Using the
security features” earlier in this chapter).
Tap Mode arrow and select mode
Tap OK to accept change
307
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
Using the security features
The Palm WAP Browser uses the Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) method to
exchange secure messages between you and another party. PKI is based on the use
of a password key pair and a signature key pair. Each key pair has one public key
and one signed key. The public key can be available to anyone, but you must store
the signed key securely. All security of a PKI solution is based on the integrity of
the signed key.
The public key is exchanged between you and another party using a certificate
created and signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). (The process of creating
certificates and using a CA is beyond the scope of this chapter.) You can use the
same key pair for several certificates.
All certificates are stored in the WAP Identity Module (WIM). The WIM is a storage
area designed to store certificates, your private keys, and secure session data used
to establish a secure connection. Usually the WIM is a smart card. Palm WAP
Browser uses a software WIM that has the same functionality.
Palm WAP Browser uses the following two protective passwords:
■
Password: Protects the password key pair. This password also protects the WIM
and must be entered every time you access any content in the WIM.
■
Signature: Protects the signature key pair. This signature is used only when you
are asked to verify that you accept something asked for by another, such as a
bank transfer.
Palm WAP Browser allows you to create multiple password and signature key
pairs. Each type of key pair is protected by a password or signature that you create.
You have only one password and one signature even if you have multiple key
pairs. You can change the password and signature at any time.
Creating password and signature key pairs
To protect your transactions, you need to create a password key pair. If you are
signing documents, you will also need to create a signature key pair.
Key generation can take up to an hour. During this time, your handheld
appears to be completely frozen and you are not able to use your handheld.
IMPORTANT
You can create a password and signature key pair by opening the Generate Keys
dialog box from the Options menu. You select which kind of key pair you want to
generate: password or signature.
If this is the first time that you have generated the selected type of key pair, you
must enter a password or signature to protect access to and usage of the keys. If
you have already generated this type of key pair, you must enter the corresponding
password or signature to continue the key generation.
308
Using the security features
To create a password key pair:
1.
Press Command Stroke
+ G.
Alternately, press Function
the Options menu.
+ Menu
, and then select Generate Keys on
Tap Generate Keys
2.
Tap Continue.
Tap Continue
3.
Tap Password key pair.
Tap Password key pair
4.
Enter your password twice and tap OK.
If you have already created a password key pair, enter the password you have
already created. You can use any characters to set the password or signature—
for example, small and capital letters, numbers, or symbols.
309
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
Enter password twice
Tap OK
A Generating Key Pair dialog box appears, informing you that it may take an
hour to generate the key pair. When the key pair has been generated, a
confirmation dialog box appears.
5.
Tap OK.
NOTE Generating a password key pair and generating a signature key pair are
similar. To generate a signature key pair, follow the steps for creating a password key
pair, and select Signature key pair in step 4.
Changing your password or signature
Maintaining a secure password and signature is critical for the security of your
transactions. You can change your password or signature regularly to maintain
security.
To change your password:
1.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
on the Options menu.
+ P.
+ Menu
, and then select Change Password
Tap Change Password
310
Using the security features
2.
Tap Personal password.
Tap Personal password
3.
Enter your current password, and then tap OK.
Enter your current
password
Tap OK
4.
Enter the new password, and then tap OK.
You can use any characters to set the password or signature–for example, small
and capital letters, numbers, or symbols.
Enter your new
password
Tap OK
5.
Verify the new password by entering the password again, and then tap OK.
Enter your new
password
Tap OK
6.
In the Information dialog box, tap OK.
NOTE Changing a password and changing a signature are similar. To change your
signature, follow the steps for changing your password, and select Authentication
signature in step 3.
311
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
Viewing the public key and the signed key
Once you create a keyed pair, you can view the public key and signed the key by
opening the View Public Key dialog box from the Options menu. This information
is useful if you need to send a copy of the public key to your CA. The displayed
keys are Base64 coded.
To view your public key and signed key:
1.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
on the Options menu.
+ K.
+ Menu
, and then select View Public Key
Tap View Public Key
2.
Tap Password key pair.
Tap Password key pair to
view Password public key
3.
If you have several key pairs, a list of certificates is displayed and you can tap
the appropriate certificate.
Tap certificate
312
Using the security features
4.
Tap View Signed Key to view the signed public key.
Tap View Signed Key
5.
Tap OK.
NOTE Viewing a password and changing a signature key pair are similar. To view
your signature public key, follow the steps for viewing your password public key, and
select Signature key pair in step 2.
Storing certificates
Palm WAP Browser supports both CA or root certificates and user/server
certificates. Certificates are stored securely in the WIM, where you can view or
delete them.
You can download a certificate from a WAP page by tapping the link to the
certificate. Once the CA has approved your request for a certificate, the certificate
is available for downloading.
To store a certificate:
1.
Tap the certificate download link.
The certificate download link varies depending on the WAP site.
Tap link
313
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
2.
Tap Save.
Tap Save
3.
Enter your password and tap OK.
Your password is the same password that was set when you generated your
Password key pair.
Enter your
password
Tap OK
4.
If you are storing a user certificate, you can enter a friendly name and tap OK.
The name is used for the certificate list when you are viewing your certificates.
Make the name clear so that you can recognize the certificate. The friendly name
is optional.
Enter an easily recognizable
name for user certificate
Tap OK
5.
314
Tap OK.
Using Palm WAP Browser menus
Viewing certificates
You can view your stored certificates by opening the Certificates dialog box from
the Options menu.
To view your stored certificates:
1.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Options menu.
+ C.
+ Menu
, and then select Certificates on the
Tap Certificates
2.
Tap the certificate name.
You can delete the certificate by tapping Delete.
Tap on a
certificate
Using Palm WAP Browser menus
Palm WAP Browser menus are shown here for your reference, and the Palm WAP
Browser features that is not explained elsewhere in this book is described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Go menu
315
Chapter 17 Using Palm™ WAP Browser
Options menu
About WAP
Browser
316
Shows version information for Palm WAP Browser.
CHAPTER 18
Using World Clock
World Clock enables you to view the current time and date in multiple
locations and to set an alarm. Use World Clock to do the following:
■
View the current time and date in three locations.
■
Open a preferences screen where you can set the time and date for all the
applications on your handheld.
■
Set an alarm.
■
Set Daylight Saving options.
To open World Clock and view the time:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Select the World Clock icon
.
TIP When the power is off, press Select on the navigator to briefly open
World Clock and view the time. From this view, you can tap Go to Clock to
open World Clock and adjust settings.
317
Chapter 18 Using World Clock
Setting the primary location
You can use World Clock to select the Location and Date & Time for the primary
location. Keep in mind that the primary Location settings are system date and time
and that these settings are used by all the applications on your handheld. The
primary Location settings also appear in the Date & Time Preferences screen.
Similarly, if you change the settings in the Date & Time Preferences screen, those
settings become your system date and time and also appear under the primary
Location in World Clock. The primary Location settings also serve as a point of
reference for the secondary locations.
The following procedures show you how to set the Location and Date & Time from
within World Clock. See “Date and Time preferences” in Chapter 20 for details on
setting these preferences.
To set the Location:
1.
Tap the primary location pick list.
Primary location
pick list
2.
Tap the location you want to use as the primary location.
The location you select is typically a large city in the same time zone as the one
where you live. If an appropriate choice does not appear in the list, see “Adding
a location” later in this chapter to create a new location.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
To set the date:
318
1.
Tap Set Date & Time.
2.
Tap the Set Date box.
, or tap OK.
Setting the primary location
3.
Tap the arrows or press Right and Left on the navigator to select the current
year.
Tap
arrows
to
select
year
Tap to
select
month
Tap to set date
4.
Tap the current month.
5.
Tap the current date.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
Tap to select date
, or tap Done.
To set the time:
1.
Tap Set Date & Time.
2.
Tap the Set Time box.
Tap to set time
3.
Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour.
4.
Tap each number of the minute, and then tap the arrows to change them.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Choosing a different primary location
If you travel to another location and you want alerts to appear based on local time,
you need to change the primary location to update the system time. You may,
however, prefer to use the secondary locations to view the local date and time, and
leave the primary location set to your home location.
319
Chapter 18 Using World Clock
To change the primary location:
1.
Tap the pick list next to the current primary location.
Primary
location
pick list
2.
Select the location you want to use as the new primary location.
If the new location is in another time zone, World Clock automatically updates the
date and time in all the applications on your handheld.
Setting the secondary locations
The secondary locations display the date and time in two locations other than the
primary location. You can use the secondary locations to view the time in places to
which you travel or you need to contact people.
The date and time in the secondary locations are based on the Date & Time in the
primary location.
To select the secondary Locations:
1.
Tap the pick list next to the secondary location.
Secondary
location
pick list
2.
Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location.
If an appropriate location does not appear in the list, see the next section “Adding
a location” to create a new location.
320
Adding a location
Adding a location
If an appropriate location does not appear in the Location pick list, you can add a
new location to the list, and if necessary adjust the time zone and Daylight Saving
settings. If you activate the Daylight Saving options, the time change automatically
occurs at 1:00 AM on the selected start and end dates.
To add a location:
1.
Tap the Location pick list.
2.
Select Edit List.
3.
Tap Add.
4.
Select a location that is in the same time zone as the city you want to add.
5.
Press Function
6.
(Optional) Tap the Name field and modify the Location name.
7.
(Optional) Tap the Time Zone box and select a time zone.
8.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
9.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To set Daylight Saving options:
1.
From the Edit Location dialog box, tap the This location observes Daylight
Saving Time check box to select it.
2.
Tap the Start box.
321
Chapter 18 Using World Clock
3.
Tap the month when daylight saving begins.
4.
Tap the Week pick list.
5.
Select the week when daylight saving begins within the selected month.
6.
Tap the Day pick list.
7.
Select the day of the week when daylight saving begins within the selected
week.
8.
Press Function
9.
Tap the End box and repeat steps 3 through 8 to select when daylight saving
ends.
10. Press
Function
+ Enter
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
, or tap OK.
Modifying a Location
If you add a location and later realize you did not use the correct settings, you can
modify the location.
To modify a Location:
1.
Tap a Location pick list.
2.
Select Edit List.
3.
Select the location you want to modify.
4.
Tap Edit.
5.
Adjust the settings. See “Adding a location” earlier in this chapter for details.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Removing a location
If you no longer need a location that appears on the Location list, you can remove
it from the list. You cannot remove a location that is currently assigned to the
primary location.
To remove a Location:
322
1.
Tap a Location pick list.
2.
Select Edit List.
3.
Select the location you want to remove.
4.
Tap Remove.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK to confirm deletion.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Setting an alarm
Setting an alarm
In addition to setting and displaying the Date & Time, World Clock also provides
a convenient travel alarm feature. You can set an alarm to sound during the next
24-hour period.
To set an alarm:
1.
Tap the box next to the Alarm icon
2.
Tap the time columns to set the hour and minute.
3.
Press Function
4.
When the alarm reminder message appears, do one of the following:
+ Enter
to open the Set Alarm dialog box.
, or tap OK.
– Press Function
+ Enter , or tap OK to permanently dismiss the
reminder and return to the current screen.
– Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen. An
attention indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the screen to remind you
of the pending alarm, and the reminder message appears again in five
minutes. When the reminder message reappears, the current time is
displayed in the Reminder bar and the alarm time appears on the screen.
5.
Tap Go To to open World Clock.
323
Chapter 18 Using World Clock
Using World Clock menus
World Clock menus are shown here for your reference, and World Clock features
that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here.
See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands.
Options menu
Display Options
Opens a dialog box where you can choose which information
appears on the World Clock screen.
Show Multiple Locations. Activates the secondary location
displays. When it is selected, the secondary locations appear
below the primary location.
Activates the date display. When it is selected, the
date appears below the time for each location.
Show Date.
Alarm
Preferences
Sound. Sets the sound of the alarm. The choices are Alarm,
Bumble Bee, Reveille, Sonata, Wake Up, and Warbler.
Defines how loud the alarm sounds. The choices are
Low, Medium, and High.
Volume.
About World
Clock
324
Shows version information for World Clock.
CHAPTER 19
Performing HotSync® Operations
HotSync® technology enables you to synchronize data between one or more
Palm OS® handhelds and Palm™ Desktop software or another PIM such as
Microsoft Outlook. To synchronize data, you must connect your handheld and
Palm Desktop software. You can synchronize your data either directly or indirectly.
Direct methods include placing your handheld in the cradle/cable attached to
your computer, or using infrared communications. An indirect method is using a
modem or network HotSync technology.
Selecting HotSync setup options
You can choose when you want HotSync Manager to run. If necessary, you can
adjust the local and modem HotSync settings as well.
To set the HotSync options on a Windows computer:
1.
Click the HotSync icon
2.
Select Setup.
™ in the Windows system tray.
325
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
3.
Click the General tab and select one of the following options:
Always available
Adds HotSync Manager to the Startup folder and
constantly monitors the communication port for
synchronization requests from your handheld. With this
option, the HotSync Manager synchronizes data even when
Palm Desktop software is not running.
Available only
when Palm
Desktop software
is running
Starts HotSync Manager and monitors requests
automatically when you open Palm Desktop software.
Manual
Monitors requests only when you select HotSync Manager
from the Start menu.
If you’re not sure which option to use, keep the default setting: Always
available.
4.
If you are using a serial cradle/cable, click the Local tab to display the settings
for the connection between your computer and the handheld cradle/cable, and
adjust the following options as needed.
If you are using the USB cradle/cable, you do not need to use the settings on the
Local tab for a direct HotSync operation.
Serial Port
Identifies the port that HotSync Manager uses to
communicate with the cradle/cable. You can change the port
selection.
Your handheld cannot share this port with an internal modem
or other device.
Speed
326
Determines the speed at which data is transferred between
your handheld and Palm Desktop software. Try the As Fast
As Possible rate first, and adjust downward if you experience
problems. This setting allows Palm Desktop software and
your handheld to find and use the fastest speed.
Customizing HotSync application settings
5.
Click the Modem tab to display the modem settings and adjust the options as
needed. See “Conducting HotSync operations using an attached modem” later
in this chapter for more information.
6.
If you are attached to a network, click the Network tab to display the network
settings and adjust the options as needed. For more information, see
“Conducting network HotSync operations” later in this chapter.
7.
Click OK.
To set the HotSync options on a Mac:
1.
Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
2.
Click the HotSync Controls tab and select any of the following options.
3.
HotSync
Enabled/
Disabled
Activates the HotSync software and prepares your computer
to synchronize with your handheld. By default, the transport
monitor is enabled whenever you start your computer.
Enable HotSync
software at
system startup
Activates the transport monitor automatically each time you
start your computer. If this option is not selected, you must
open HotSync Manager and select the Enabled option before
you can perform a HotSync operation.
Show more detail
in HotSync Log
Includes more troubleshooting information in the log that is
generated when you perform a HotSync operation.
Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
Customizing HotSync application settings
For each application, you can define a set of options that determines how records
are handled during synchronization. These options are called a conduit. By default,
a HotSync operation synchronizes all files between the handheld and Palm
Desktop software.
In general, you should leave the settings to synchronize all files. The only reason
you might want to change these settings is to overwrite data on either your
327
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
handheld or Palm Desktop software, or to avoid synchronizing a particular type of
file because you don’t use it.
In addition to the conduits for Date Book, Address Book, To Do List, Memo Pad,
and Note Pad, Palm Desktop software includes System and Install conduits, as
well as conduits for the VersaMail™ application. The System conduit backs up the
system information stored on your handheld, including ShortCuts. The Install
conduit installs add-on applications on your handheld. The conduit for the
VersaMail application enables you to select e-mail accounts to synchronize. The
VersaMail application is optional and is not installed on all handhelds.
To customize HotSync application settings on a Windows computer:
1.
Click the HotSync icon
taskbar).
in the Windows system tray (lower-right corner of the
You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop software menu
bar.
2.
From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Custom.
3.
Select the appropriate username from the list.
4.
Select an application in the Conduit list.
5.
Click Change, and do one of the following:
Set synchronization options. Click Configure Accounts to change
e-mail account settings. The VersaMail application is optional and is not
installed on all handhelds.
VersaMail:
For each application, click the direction in which you want
to write data, or click Do Nothing to skip data transfer for an application.
Other applications:
Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To
use a new setting on an ongoing basis, select the Set as default box. Thereafter,
whatever you selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default
button in the Custom dialog box.
328
6.
Click OK.
7.
Click Done to activate your settings.
Customizing HotSync application settings
To customize HotSync application settings on a Mac computer:
1.
Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder.
2.
From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.
3.
From the User pop-up menu, select the appropriate username.
4.
Select an application in the Conduit list.
5.
Click Conduit Settings.
6.
For each application, click the direction in which you want to write data, or click
Do Nothing to skip data transfer for an application.
Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To
use a new setting on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. Thereafter, whatever
you selected as the default setting is used for HotSync operations.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Close the Conduit Settings window.
329
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations
The simplest way to synchronize data is to perform a direct HotSync operation by
placing your handheld in the cradle/cable and pressing the HotSync button.
Performing a cradle/cable HotSync operation: Windows computer
The first time you synchronize your data, you need to enter user information on
Palm Desktop software. After you enter this information and synchronize, the
HotSync Manager recognizes your handheld and doesn’t ask for this information
again.
If you are a system administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users,
you may want to create a user profile. See “Using File Link” later in this chapter
before performing the following steps.
You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local, direct
connection, or with infrared communication, rather than using a modem or network.
IMPORTANT
The following steps assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop
software. If you have not installed this software, see the Read this First installation
guide for instructions.
To perform a local HotSync operation on a Windows computer:
330
1.
Place your handheld in the cradle/cable.
2.
If the HotSync Manager is not running, start it: On the Windows desktop, click
Start, and then choose Programs. Navigate to the Palm Desktop software
program group and choose HotSync Manager. Alternatively, you can start the
Palm Desktop software, which automatically opens the HotSync Manager.
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations
3.
Press the HotSync button
on the cradle/cable.
IMPORTANT The first time you perform a HotSync operation, you must enter a
username in the New User dialog box and click OK. Every handheld should have
a unique name. To prevent loss of a user’s records, never try to synchronize more
than one handheld to the same username.
The HotSync Progress dialog box appears and synchronization begins.
4.
Wait for a message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete.
After the HotSync process is complete, you can remove your handheld from the
cradle/cable. Gently tilt your handheld forward in the cradle, and then lift it up
to remove it.
331
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
Performing a direct HotSync operation: Mac computer
When you installed Palm Desktop software, you entered a username. This
username is the connection between your handheld and your computer.
The first time you perform a HotSync operation the Palm Desktop software does
the following:
■
Adds a username to your handheld.
■
Creates a folder for the username in the Users folder inside the Palm folder
inside the current Mac user’s Documents folder. For example, if you entered
Jane Garcia as your username, a folder called Jane Garcia is created in the Users
folder.
■
Creates a file named User Data in your username folder.
Usernames appear in the User pop-up on the right side of the toolbar. You can
change users by selecting a new name in the pop-up menu.
Each subsequent time you perform a HotSync operation, HotSync Manager reads
the username from your handheld and synchronizes the data in the folder of the
same name.
Be sure you select the correct username from the User pop-up before entering data
on Palm Desktop or performing a HotSync operation.
If you are a system administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users,
you may want to create a user profile. See “Creating a user profile” later in this
chapter before performing the following steps.
You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local, direct
connection, or with infrared communication.
IMPORTANT
The following steps assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop
software. See the Read This First installation guide if you have not installed this
software.
332
Performing cradle/cable HotSync operations
To perform a local HotSync operation on a Mac computer:
1.
Place your handheld in the HotSync cradle/cable.
2.
Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled: Double-click the HotSync Manager
icon in the Palm folder. Click the HotSync Controls tab and make sure the
Enabled option is selected.
3.
Press the HotSync button
on the cradle/cable.
The HotSync Progress dialog box appears, followed by the Select User dialog
box.
333
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
4.
In the Select User dialog box, select the username you entered when you
installed the Palm Desktop software, and click OK.
The HotSync Progress dialog box reappears, and synchronization begins.
5.
Wait for a message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete.
After the HotSync process is complete, you can remove your handheld from the
cradle/cable. Gently tilt your handheld forward in the cradle, and then lift it up
to remove it.
Conducting IR HotSync operations
You can use the infrared (IR) port on your handheld to perform HotSync
operations. When you perform an IR HotSync operation, you don’t need your
cradle/cable. However, you must have a computer that’s equipped with an IR port
and that supports the IrCOMM implementation of the Infrared Data Association
(IrDA) standards. This is especially useful if you travel with an infrared-enabled
laptop. You simply enable infrared communication on your laptop and handheld
and follow the steps in “Performing an IR HotSync operation” later in this section.
Preparing your computer for infrared communication
Before you can perform a HotSync operation using the IR port, the computer with
which you want to synchronize must fulfill these requirements:
334
■
Your computer must support the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA
standards.
■
Your computer must have an enabled infrared port that’s built into the
computer, or an enabled infrared device attached to the computer.
■
Some desktop computers may require an infrared device attached to a physical
COM port. Laptops are likely to have a built-in IR port, so no external device is
necessary.
Conducting IR HotSync operations
■
Your computer must have an installed infrared driver.
■
If you have an external infrared device attached to your computer, a driver is
probably included with the device. Consult the documentation included with
the device for information on installing the required driver.
Check your computer’s documentation to learn if the computer supports infrared
communication.
To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication on a Windows computer:
■
Click the HotSync Manager icon
that Infrared is checked.
in the Windows system tray, and make sure
– If you have an Infrared option on the HotSync Manager menu, and that
option is selected, skip to “Performing an IR HotSync operation.”
– If you do not have an Infrared option on the HotSync Manager menu,
complete the following steps:
a.
Make sure that Local Serial is selected on the menu.
b.
From the HotSync Manager menu, select Setup.
c.
Click the Local tab.
d.
In the Serial Port drop-down box, select the simulated port that your
computer uses for infrared communication.
See the documentation for your operating system for instructions on finding the
simulated port. This information is usually located in the Control Panel.
– Click OK.
NOTE If your cradle/cable is connected to a USB port, you can continue using it while
HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication. If your cradle/cable is
connected to a serial port, you cannot use your HotSync cradle/cable again until you
reconfigure the HotSync Manager to communicate with the port defined for cradle/
cable synchronization.
335
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication on a Mac computer:
1.
Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
2.
In the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.
3.
Click the Connection Settings tab.
4.
Select the On check box next to IR Port.
5.
Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
Performing an IR HotSync operation
After you complete the steps to prepare for performing an IR HotSync operation,
it’s easy to perform the actual operation.
To perform an IR HotSync operation:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the HotSync icon
3.
Tap Local.
4.
Tap the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to PC/Handheld.
5.
Position the IR port of your handheld within a couple of inches of the infrared
port of your computer.
6.
Tap the HotSync icon to start the IR HotSync operation.
.
Tap here to start IR
HotSync operation
336
Conducting IR HotSync operations
Returning to cradle/cable HotSync operations
It’s easy to return to using the cradle/cable for HotSync operations.
If your cradle/cable is connected to a USB port, you can continue using it while
HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication. Use the following
instructions to return to Local USB cradle/cable HotSync operations only when
necessary, such as when you have disconnected the cradle/cable from the USB
port.
To return to local USB cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Windows computer:
1.
If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to the USB port of the computer you use
for HotSync operations.
2.
Click the HotSync Manager icon
in the Windows system tray, and select
Local USB if it is not already selected.
To return to local serial cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Windows computer:
1.
If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to the port of the computer you use for
HotSync operations.
2.
Click the HotSync Manager icon
3.
Choose Setup, and then click Local.
4.
Select the COM port where your cradle/cable is connected.
5.
Click OK.
in the Windows system tray.
To return to local serial cradle/cable HotSync operations on a Mac computer:
1.
If necessary, connect the cradle/cable to a serial port on your computer.
2.
Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
3.
In the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.
4.
Click the Connection Settings tab, and select the correct connection.
5.
Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
The next time you want to perform a HotSync operation, just press the HotSync
button on the cradle/cable, as you always did before.
337
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
Conducting HotSync operations using an attached modem
You can use your attached modem to synchronize your handheld when you are
away from your computer.
IMPORTANT You cannot perform a wireless HotSync operation using your
handheld’s mobile radio.
The first HotSync operation must be performed using a local, direct connection, or
with infrared communication. After that, you can perform a HotSync operation using
an attached modem.
To perform a HotSync operation using your attached modem you need the
following:
■
A modem connected to your computer.
■
Palm Desktop software configured for use with the modem.
■
A modem connected to your handheld.
■
A configuration for the kind of modem connection you want to make.
See “Connection preferences” in Chapter 20 for more information.
Preparing your computer for a modem HotSync operation
There are a few steps you must perform to prepare your computer for a modem
HotSync operation. Be sure to perform these steps before you leave your office so
that your computer is ready to receive a call from your handheld.
To prepare your Windows computer for a modem HotSync operation:
1.
Confirm that the computer modem is connected and turned on, and that no
communications applications, such as fax or telephony software, are running on
a COM port.
Make sure the computer is disconnected from all online services, such as
America Online (AOL). This helps to avoid conflicts with the COM port.
2.
338
Start HotSync Manager if it is not already running, and from the HotSync
Manager menu, select Modem.
Conducting HotSync operations using an attached modem
3.
4.
Adjust the following options as needed.
Serial Port
Identifies the port for the modem. If you are unsure of the port
assignment, look at the Modem Properties in the Windows
Control Panel.
Speed
Determines the speed at which data is transferred. Try the As
Fast As Possible rate first, and adjust downward if you
experience problems. This setting allows Palm Desktop
software and your handheld to find and use the fastest speed.
Modem
Identifies the modem type or manufacturer. Refer to your
modem manual or faceplate for its type or settings. If you’re not
sure of your modem type or your modem doesn’t match any
that appear in the list, select Hayes Basic.
Setup String
Identifies the setup string for your particular modem. Not all
modems require a setup string. Refer to your modem manual
and enter the setup string if recommended by the manufacturer.
Click OK.
To prepare a Mac computer for a modem HotSync operation:
1.
Confirm that the computer modem is connected and turned on, and that no
communications applications, such as fax or telephony software, or AppleTalk
networking are running on that serial port.
NOTE Make sure your computer is disconnected from all online services, such
as CompuServe and America Online (AOL). This helps to avoid conflicts with
the serial port. In addition, your computer must be on, and it should not be in
sleep mode when receiving a call from a remote handheld.
2.
Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
3.
Click the HotSync Controls tab and enable the Transport Monitor, if it is not
already enabled.
339
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
4.
Click the Connection Settings tab.
5.
Select the On check box of the modem connection you’re using, and then click
Settings.
6.
In the Settings dialog box, select Modem as the connection type, if it is not
already selected. This step is not necessary for internal modems.
7.
Adjust the following options as needed.
Modem
Identifies the type of modem connected to your computer. If
your modem does not appear on the list, use the Hayes Basic
setting, or select Custom to enter a command string. Refer to
the manual that came with your modem to find the
appropriate command string.
Modem Speaker
Activates the modem’s speaker. If you are having trouble
connecting, turn on this option to make sure that the modem
connected to your computer is responding to incoming calls.
8.
Click OK.
9.
Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
Preparing your handheld for a modem HotSync operation
There are a few steps you must perform to prepare your handheld for a modem
HotSync operation.
To prepare your handheld for a modem HotSync operation:
340
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the HotSync icon
3.
Tap Modem.
.
Conducting HotSync operations using an attached modem
4.
Tap the pick list below the icon and select a modem configuration.
Select a modem
configuration
5.
If you need to create a configuration, press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
on the Options menu.
+ Menu
+ S.
, and then select Connection Setup
See “Connection preferences” in Chapter 20 for more information.
6.
Tap the Enter phone # field.
Tap here
If you plan to connect to your company’s dial-in server (network modem)
instead of connecting to a computer modem, see “Using File Link” later in this
chapter.
7.
Enter the telephone number to access the modem connected to your computer.
8.
If necessary, enter a dial prefix (such as “9”) to access an outside line, and then
tap the Dial Prefix check box to select it.
You can enter a comma in the field to introduce a “pause” in the dialing
sequence. Each comma equals a two-second pause.
TIP
9.
If the phone line you’re using for the handheld has call waiting, select the
Disable call waiting check box to avoid an interruption during the modem
HotSync operation.
10. If you want to use a calling card to place the call, select the check box and enter
the calling card number.
11.
Tap OK.
341
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
Selecting the conduits for a modem HotSync operation
The Conduit Setup dialog box on your handheld enables you to define which files
and/or applications synchronize during a modem HotSync operation. You can use
these settings to minimize the time required to synchronize data with a modem.
To change the Conduit Setup for a modem HotSync operation:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the HotSync icon
3.
Press Command Stroke
.
+ D.
Alternately, press Function
the Options Menu.
4.
+ Menu
, and then select Conduit Setup on
Tap the check boxes to deselect the files and applications that you do not want
to synchronize during a modem HotSync operation. The default setting is to
synchronize all files.
Applications that do not have a database (such as games) do not synchronize,
even if you select the item in the Conduit Setup dialog box.
5.
Tap OK.
Performing a HotSync operation using an attached modem
After you prepare your computer and your handheld and select your Conduit
Setup options, you are ready to perform a modem HotSync operation.
To perform a modem HotSync operation:
342
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the HotSync icon
.
3.
Tap the Modem icon
applications.
to dial the Palm Desktop modem and synchronize the
4.
Wait for the HotSync operation to complete. If you have any problems
conducting a successful HotSync operation, see “HotSync problems” in
Appendix B.
Conducting network HotSync operations
Conducting network HotSync operations
When you use the network HotSync technology, you can take advantage of the
LAN and WAN connectivity available in many office environments. Network
HotSync technology enables you to perform a HotSync operation by using
Bluetooth technology or an 802.11 accessory to make a wireless connection to a
network, by dialing in to a network, or by using a cradle/cable that is connected to
any computer on your LAN or WAN (provided that the computer connected to the
cradle/cable also has the network HotSync technology installed, your computer is
on, and the HotSync Manager is running).
NOTE Network HotSync technology is available only on Windows computers and
when dialing into the corporate network. Network HotSync is not available if the
desktop computer is located behind a firewall.
Connecting to your company’s dial-in server
A network HotSync operation requires the following (consult your system
administrator for assistance):
■
Your computer has TCP/IP support installed.
■
Both your company’s network system and its remote access server support
TCP/IP.
■
You have a remote access account.
Everything you need for connecting to your company’s dial-in server (network
modem) is included with Palm Desktop software and handheld software. You
need to activate the feature, however, on both Palm Desktop software and your
handheld.
To prepare your computer for a network HotSync operation:
1.
Click the HotSync Manager icon
in the Windows system tray.
2.
From the HotSync Manager menu, select Network.
3.
From the HotSync Manager menu, select Setup.
343
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
4.
Click the Network tab and make sure your user name has a checkmark next to
it. If the checkmark is not there, click the check box next to your user name.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Put your handheld in the cradle/cable, and perform a HotSync operation.
The HotSync operation records network information about your computer on
your handheld. With this information, your handheld can locate your computer
when you perform a HotSync operation over the network.
To prepare your handheld for a network HotSync operation:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Select the HotSync icon
3.
Press Command Stroke
.
Alternately, press Function
Prefs on the Options Menu.
344
4.
Tap Network.
5.
Tap OK.
+ O.
+ Menu
, and then select Modem Sync
Conducting network HotSync operations
6.
Tap Select Service.
Tap here
NOTE See “Network preferences” in Chapter 20 for information on creating a
network connection.
7.
Tap Service and select a service.
Tap here
8.
Press Function
+ Enter
9.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
the Options Menu.
, or tap Done.
+ D.
+ Menu
, and then select Conduit Setup on
For instructions on selecting conduits, see “Selecting the conduits for a modem
HotSync operation” earlier in this chapter.
345
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
Performing a network HotSync operation
After you prepare your computer and your handheld and select your Conduit
Setup options, you are ready to perform a network HotSync operation.
To perform a network HotSync operation:
■
Tap the modem HotSync icon to begin the operation.
Using File Link
The File Link feature enables you to import Address Book and Memo Pad
information onto your handheld from a separate external file such as a company
phone list. HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category on your Palm
Desktop software and on your handheld. You can configure the File Link feature
to check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation.
With File Link you can import data stored in any of the following formats:
■
Comma-separated (*.csv)
■
Memo Pad archive (*.mpa)
■
Address Book archive (*.aba)
■
Text (*.txt)
For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online Help.
NOTE The File Link feature is not available in Palm Desktop software for Mac.
Creating a user profile
A user profile enables you to install the same set of data onto multiple Palm OS
handhelds before each handheld is individualized with a specific user name and
data file.
A handheld that is preconfigured with a user profile can be given to anyone
because the handheld is not yet identified by a unique user name. The handheld
acquires a unique user name when the new user performs his or her first local
HotSync operation.
346
Creating a user profile
For example, suppose a sales organization wants to distribute two dozen
handhelds that each have a common company phone list, a set of memos, and
several key applications. A user profile can be created to install the common data
before the handhelds are distributed to the employees who will use them. Then
when the employees perform their first HotSync operation, the common data
becomes part of their individual data file.
NOTE The handhelds that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new
ones that have never been synchronized or handhelds that have had their user names
and data removed by a hard reset.
To create a user profile on a Windows computer:
1.
Open Palm Desktop software.
2.
From the Tools menu, select Users.
3.
Click Profiles.
4.
Click New.
5.
Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5 for each profile that you want to create, and then click
OK to return to Palm Desktop software.
7.
Select the profile from the User list, and create the data for the profile (for
example, a company phone list).
347
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
To create a user profile on a Mac computer:
1.
Open Palm Desktop software.
2.
From the User pop-up menu, select Edit Users.
3.
Click New Profile.
4.
Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK.
5.
Close the Users window.
6.
From the User pop-up menu, select the new profile.
7.
Create the data for the profile (such as a company phone list).
8.
From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.
9.
Select the conduit settings for the profile. See “Customizing HotSync
application settings” earlier in this chapter for details.
Performing the first HotSync operation with a user profile
After you create a user profile, you are ready to transfer the information to the new
handheld during the first HotSync operation.
To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation on a Windows computer:
348
1.
Place the new handheld in the cradle/cable.
2.
Press the HotSync button
3.
Click Profiles.
on the cradle/cable.
Creating a user profile
4.
Select the profile you want to load on the handheld, and click OK.
5.
Click Yes to transfer all the profile data to the handheld.
The next time you perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software prompts
you to assign a username to the handheld.
To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation on a Mac computer:
1.
Connect the new handheld to the HotSync cradle/cable.
2.
Press the HotSync button
3.
Select the profile you want to load on the handheld, and click OK to transfer all
the profile data to the handheld.
on the cradle/cable.
The next time you perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software prompts
you to assign a username to the handheld.
349
Chapter 19 Performing HotSync® Operations
350
CHAPTER 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
The Preferences screens enable you to customize the configuration options on your
handheld, including the following:
Buttons
Reassign different applications to the buttons on the front panel
of your handheld, and the HotSync® button on the cradle.
Connection
Configure cradle, modem, and infrared communication
settings.
Date and Time
Set the date, time, time zone, and Daylight Saving switch.
Digitizer
Calibrate the screen on your handheld.
Formats
Set the country default and the formats for dates, times,
calendar, and numbers.
Keyboard
Configure your keyboard functions, and set a keyboard lock.
Mobile
The Mobile Panel allows you to configure many of the wireless
settings for the applications sharing configuration settings.
Network
Configure your handheld for use with a network.
Owner
Assign your name, phone number, and other owner
information to your handheld.
Power
Set automatic shutoff interval, Stay on in Cradle, and Beam
Receive options.
Security
Set the security features for your handheld.
ShortCuts
Define a list of abbreviations.
Sounds and Alerts
Set sound, vibrator, and LED alerts.
351
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Viewing Preferences
To open the Preferences screens:
1.
Press Home
.
2.
Tap the Preferences icon
3.
Tap the Preferences screen you want to view.
.
Buttons preferences
The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to associate different applications with
the buttons on the front of the handheld.
Any changes you make in the Buttons Preferences screen become effective
immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen or application.
If you assign a different application to a button, you can still access the original
application using the Applications Launcher.
To change the Buttons preferences:
1.
Tap the pick list next to the button you want to reassign.
Tap arrow to
show pick list
Tap Default to restore all of the
buttons to their factory settings
2.
Select the application that you want to assign to the button.
Connection preferences
The connections preferences may have been set by your wireless
service provider. Check with your provider before changing the preset settings.
IMPORTANT
The Connection Preferences screen enables you to define the settings used to
connect your handheld to other devices. The screen displays a list of available
configurations that are ready to be further defined; the list varies depending on the
kind of software you’ve added to your handheld.
352
Connection preferences
You can also create custom configurations, which include the following:
PC via Cradle/Cable: A local HotSync connection; the direct
connection between your handheld and your desktop computer.
Your handheld is connected by its universal connector to the
cradle, and the cradle is attached by its cable to a USB port of
your desktop computer. (If you are using the optional serial
cradle, the cradle attaches by its cable to a serial [COM] port of
your computer.)
A cable connection between
your handheld’s universal connector and a modem for dialing in
to a modem that is part of your computer or laptop.
Modem via Universal Connector:
A connection between the IR port of your
handheld and the infrared device of your computer or laptop.
PC via Infrared:
Modem via Infrared: A connection between the IR port of your
handheld and a modem. The modem can be attached to or
within a mobile phone or some other device containing an IR
port. (Some IR phones contain modems.)
Creating and editing GPRS connections
IMPORTANT Your wireless service provider may have set your GPRS connection
settings. Different settings may affect your service. Contact your wireless service
provider before using different settings.
To add or edit a GPRS connection:
1.
Do one of the following:
– To add: Tap New.
– To edit: Tap the GPRS connection and tap Edit.
353
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
2.
Do one of the following:
– To add: Enter name and tap Details.
– To edit: Tap Details.
Enter name if new connection
Tap Details
3.
Adjust settings.
Access Point
Name
Opens a dialog box that allows you to change the address on the
GPRS network in which data is routed through to outside
networks–for example, a specific gateway to the Internet or a
specific WAP gateway.
Quality of
Service
Opens up a dialog box that allows you to choose between using
the network default settings for quality service or customizing
individual settings.
The quality of service settings are only a request made to
the network. The network may or may not grant the level of quality
requested, depending on current network conditions and services
provided on an individual basis.
NOTE
354
Header
Compression
Sets whether the GPRS data headers are compressed or not.
Compressing before transmission aids in increasing
transmission speed.
Data
Compression
Sets whether transmitted data is compressed or not compressed.
Compressing data aids in increasing transmission speed.
Connection preferences
4.
5.
Tap the box under Quality of Service and adjust settings.
Network
Default
Sets the quality to what the GPRS network currently is
providing.
Custom
Allows you to adjust the individual quality settings.
Precedence
Changes the requested priority that your data receives in times
of network congestion. A higher priority results in privileged
handling of your data by the network.
Delay
Sets the requested maximum time it takes for your data to travel
through the network. Best Effort sets all data to be handled in a
first in, first out manner.
Reliability
Sets the requested level of acceptable data loss and timeliness of
data delivery that the network provides for data from the device.
■
Class 1 is for non-time, error-sensitive applications that
cannot cope with data loss.
■
Class 2 is for non-time, error-sensitive applications that can
cope with infrequent data loss.
■
Class 3 is for non-time, error-sensitive applications that can
cope with data loss and some interruption.
■
Class 4 is for time and error-sensitive applications that can
cope with data loss.
■
Class 5 is for time, non-error-sensitive applications that can
cope with data loss.
Peak
Sets the maximum rate of data sent through the network per
second.
Mean
Sets the requested maximum rate of data sent through the
network averaged over all of the data transmitted.
Press Function
+ Enter
, twice or tap OK twice.
355
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Creating and editing GSM connections
IMPORTANT Your wireless service provider may have set your GSM connection
settings. Changing the settings may affect your service. Contact your wireless service
provider before making changes to the settings.
To create or edit a GSM connection:
1.
Do one of the following:
– To add: Tap New.
– To edit: Tap the GSM connection and tap Edit.
2.
Do one of the following:
– To add: Enter name and tap Details.
– To edit: Tap Details.
Enter name if new connection
Tap pick list and select GSM
Tap Details
356
Connection preferences
3.
4.
Tap the pick lists, select the settings, and then tap OK.
Speed
Sets the modem rate and protocol used for the connection.
Autobauding automatically negotiates the best modem rate and
protocol at the beginning of the connection.
Connection
Element
Sets the connection as Transparent or Non-Transparent.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
IR to PC connection
The following example shows you how to edit the IR to PC/Handheld connection
to adjust the communication speed; you can similarly edit other connections or
settings or create a custom connection. You can use the IR to PC/Handheld
connection to perform a remote IR HotSync operation. To accomplish the HotSync
operation, your handheld sends data through its IR port to an IR port in your
desktop computer, to synchronize with your Desktop application.
To edit the IR to PC/Handheld connection:
1.
Tap the IR to PC/Handheld connection and tap Edit.
357
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
2.
Tap Details.
Tap
Details
3.
Tap the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed.
4.
Enter the initialization string supplied by the documentation for the modem
attached to your mobile phone, if necessary.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK again to save the configuration.
After you create the configuration, you need to set up the HotSync Manager of
your Desktop application and the HotSync application of your handheld to
perform a modem HotSync operation.
Date and Time preferences
The Date and Time Preferences screen enables you to set the date, time, time zone,
and Daylight Saving option on your handheld.
To set the date:
1.
Tap the Set Date box.
2.
Tap the arrows to select the current year.
Tap arrows to
select year
Tap or use the
navigator to select
month
Tap to set date
358
3.
Select a month.
4.
Tap the current date.
Tap to select date
Digitizer preferences
To set the time:
1.
Tap the Set Time box.
2.
Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour.
3.
Tap each number of the minute, and then tap the arrows to change the numbers.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To set the time zone:
1.
Tap the Location pick list.
2.
Select a time zone.
When you travel, changing the time zone setting to a new time zone
automatically resets the date and time on your handheld, but it does not change
the time of appointments set in Date Book.
Digitizer preferences
The Digitizer Preferences screen opens the digitizer calibration screen. This is the
same screen that appears when you start your handheld for the first time.
You can recalibrate your screen after a hard reset, or if your digitizer drifts.
359
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Formats preferences
Use the Formats Preferences screen to set the country default and the display
format of the dates, times, and numbers on your handheld.
Country default
The country default sets date, time, week start day, and number conventions based
on geographic regions where you might use your handheld. For example, in the
United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In the United
States, on the other hand, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or
PM suffix.
All your handheld applications use the Country default settings. You can,
however, customize your own preferences as described in “Time, date, week start,
and numbers formats” later in this chapter.
To set the country default:
■
Tap the Preset to pick list and select a country.
Time, date, week start, and numbers formats
The Time setting defines the format for the time of day. The time format that you
select appears in all applications on your handheld.
To select the time, date, week start, and numbers format:
1.
Tap the Time pick list and select a format.
2.
Tap the Date pick list and select a format.
3.
Tap the Week starts pick list, and select whether you want the first day of the
week to be Sunday or Monday.
This setting controls the Day, Week, and Month views in Date Book and all other
aspects of your handheld that display a calendar.
4.
360
Tap the Numbers pick list, and select formats for the decimal point and
thousands separator.
Keyboard preferences
Keyboard preferences
The Keyboard Preferences screen enables you to customize the keyboard. You can
set how each key responds when pressed or held. You can also remap the character
or function of the key.
Any changes you make in the Keyboard Preferences screen become effective
immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen or application.
To set the key repeat rate:
■
Move the slider or tap the adjustment bar.
Move the slider
Tap the adjustment bar
To set key clicking:
■
Tap check box to enable or disable key clicking.
Tap check box
To set key press-and-hold functionality:
■
Tap the Press and hold key pick list, and select the function.
Tap pick list and select function
361
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Keylock
The Keylock setting enables you to lock the keypad. This prevents battery drainage
if a key is unintentionally pressed and held down. When you lock the keypad, all
keys are disabled, including the headset key.
NOTE Keylock does not prevent you from receiving incoming phone calls or alarms.
It is automatically disabled to accept incoming calls or alarms. After you finish the call
or dismiss an alarm, the keypad is again locked until you unlock it.
To set the keylock:
1.
Tap the Keylock check box.
Tap check box
2.
Select Manual or At Power-Off.
If you select Manual, you must press Function and Power on your handheld to
lock the keypad. The keypad locks automatically when At Power-Off is
selected.
Remapping keys
Keys can be remapped from their default function to any of the keys or buttons
available on the handheld, including the Function keys.
To remap a key:
1.
Tap Remap keys.
2.
Tap a key.
Tap a key
362
Mobile preferences
3.
Tap Remap.
You can chose to remap the key and the Function + key combination.
Mapping function
Tap to remap key
Tap to remap Function + key combination
4.
Tap Save.
Tap pick list and select keyboard
Tap character
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Mobile preferences
The Mobile Preferences screen allows you to view and configure many of the
wireless settings for the applications sharing configuration settings. You can also
turn the mobile radio on and off.
363
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Turning the mobile radio on and off
When you open a wireless application, the radio dialog box automatically appears
if the mobile radio is turned off. You can also turn on the mobile radio from the
Mobile Preferences screen.
To turn the mobile radio on or off:
■
Tap the Mobile pick list and select On or Off.
Tap Mobile pick list to turn on and off mobile radio
Mobile number read from SIM card
Enabling call waiting
NOTE Call waiting is a subscriber service that may be provided by your wireless
service provider. Contact your wireless service provider for information.
Call waiting lets you accept an incoming call when you have a currently active call.
You are notified of the incoming call by a sound and a dialog box.
To enable or disable call waiting:
1.
Tap Call Settings.
Tap Call Settings
364
Mobile preferences
2.
Tap the Enable call waiting check box to select or deselect it.
Tap check box
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Concealing your number
You can conceal (block) or display your number when making a call.
To conceal or display your number:
1.
Tap Call Settings.
Tap Call Settings
2.
Tap the Conceal my number when making a call check box.
Tap check box
A checkmark appears, indicating that your number is concealed from the
recipient when you place a call. Leave the check box blank to display your
number to the recipient when you place a call.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
365
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Keeping the screen on during a call
You can set an option to keep the screen turned on during a call.
To conceal or display your number:
1.
Tap Call Settings.
2.
Tap the Leave screen on during a call check box.
Tap check box
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
NOTE Enabling this feature may require more frequent battery charging.
Diverting your calls
You can divert (forward) your voice, data, and fax calls if your phone is not
reachable.
To divert your phone calls:
1.
Tap Call Settings.
Tap Call Settings
366
Mobile preferences
2.
Tap Call Diverts.
Tap Call Diverts
3.
Tap the Call Type pick list and select Voice.
Tap Voice
4.
Tap a selection and select On.
Tap Lookup to access your Address Book
Busy
If the line is busy, diverts call to phone number.
No Answer
If the call is not answered, diverts call to phone number.
Not
Reachable
If the mobile radio is out of range, diverts call to phone number.
5.
Enter a phone number for the selection.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
367
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To divert your data calls:
1.
Tap Call Settings.
Tap Call Settings
2.
Tap Call Diverts.
Tap Call Diverts
3.
Tap the Call Type pick list and select Data.
Tap Data
4.
368
Tap the Data pick list and select On.
Mobile preferences
5.
Enter the number.
Tap the Data pick list and select On
Enter number
Tap Lookup to access your Address Book
To divert your Fax messages:
1.
Tap Call Settings.
Tap Call Settings
2.
Tap Call Diverts.
Tap Call Diverts
369
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
3.
Tap the Call Type pick list and select Fax.
Tap Fax
4.
Tap the Fax pick list and select On.
5.
Enter the number.
Tap the Data pick list and select On
Enter the number
Tap Lookup to access your Address Book
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Tracking your phone time
You can track your phone usage using the Call Timer screen.
To check your phone call timer settings:
1.
Tap Call Timer.
Tap Call Timer
370
Mobile preferences
2.
Check your phone usage statistics.
Tap to reset call timer for outgoing and incoming
calls to zero
Check the following statistics:
Lifetime
Total amount of time spent on calls for the life of your mobile
(it cannot be reset)
Outgoing
Amount of time spent on outgoing calls since last reset
Incoming
Amount of time spent on incoming calls since last reset
Total
Total amount of time spent on outgoing and incoming calls since
last reset
Last Reset
Date and time you last reset the call timer to zero
Checking your current status
You can check your current status related to your handheld and network access.
To check your current status statistics:
1.
Tap Current Status.
Tap Current Status
371
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
2.
Check your current status statistics.
Check the following statistics:
372
Carrier
Name of your mobile carrier
Number
Your mobile phone number
Service
Indicates if voice service is available
GPRS
Indicates the current status of your GPRS data service
Signal
Percentage of signal strength
Battery
Percentage of battery strength remaining
Cell location
Cell location and tower assigned to your mobile
IMSI number
International Mobile Subscriber Identity assigned to your SIM
card
IMEI number
Your mobile International Mobile Equipment Identity number
SV number
Your mobile Software Version number
Mobile preferences
Checking your GPRS network usage
You can check your GPRS network usage.
To check your GPRS network usage:
1.
Tap GPRS Meter.
Tap GPRS Meter
2.
Check your current GPRS statistics.
Tap to reset meter
Check the following statistics:
Latest
Session
Amount of information tracked (sent, received, and total)
during your latest or current session since last reset
All Sessions
Amount of information tracked (sent, received, and total) on all
sessions since last reset
Last Reset
Date and time of last reset
373
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Setting your network selection search mode
The Search mode setting allows you to specify how the phone will register with a
network carrier during mobile radio power-on. The following two options are
available:
Automatic
The phone attempts to register with the home network during
mobile radio power-on. If the home network is not available, the
phone automatically attempts to register with the next available
network (if any). The phone attempts to register with each available
network until registration succeeds or registration with each
available network fails. The search order for network registration is
home network, preferred carriers, and other carriers, respectively.
Manual
The phone attempts to register with the home network during
mobile radio power-on. If the home network is not available, a
dialog box listing all the available networks is displayed for your
selection.
To set your network search mode:
1.
Tap Network.
Tap Network
2.
Tap the Search mode pick list and select Automatic or Manual.
Tap pick list to select network search mode
used during mobile radio power-on
3.
374
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Mobile preferences
Viewing and editing your preferred networks list
If your home carrier is not available, your mobile registers with the next preferred
network on your preferred networks list. You can view and edit your preferred
networks. The networks are listed in order of priority, with the most preferred at
the top. You can sort the priority list.
You can also add and remove networks. The user can add networks to the
Preferred list by entering a new network ID or by selecting a network from the
Known or Available lists. Networks are excluded from the Known and Available
lists if they are already in the preferred list. This prevents duplicate networks from
being added to the preferred list. Only one network can be added at a time.
IMPORTANT Some wireless service providers restrict editing privileges for the
Preferred Networks list. If the list is restricted, you can read the list, but you are
unable to edit it.
To view the Preferred Networks list:
1.
Tap Network.
Tap Network
2.
Tap Preferred.
Tap Preferred
375
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
3.
View the Preferred Networks list.
Networks are listed in order of priority, with the most preferred at the top.
To sort priority in the Preferred Networks list:
■
Select a network and tap the up or down arrow buttons.
To remove a network:
■
Select a network and tap Remove.
To add a network to the Preferred Networks list from your Known or Available Networks:
376
1.
Tap Add.
2.
Tap the upper-left pick list and select Known Networks or Available Networks.
Mobile preferences
3.
Select a network, and press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To add a network to the Preferred Networks list by specifying a network ID:
1.
Tap Add.
2.
Tap the upper-left pick list and select New Network.
377
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
3.
Enter the five- or six-digit network ID number, and then press Function
Enter , or tap OK.
+
If you don’t know the ID, contact the new network (mobile carrier).
The added networks appear at the bottom of your Preferred Networks list,
where you can sort them.
Setting PIN for mobile power on
When the Security setting is enabled, the mobile requires the user to enter a valid
PIN code each time the mobile radio is powered on. The mobile is locked until a
valid PIN code is entered. Modification of this setting is PIN code protected. You
are prompted to enter a valid PIN code when a change to this setting is saved.
IMPORTANT If you enter the current PIN incorrectly three times, the SIM card is
locked. You must enter an eight-digit PIN Unlock Key to unlock your SIM. See
“Unlocking your SIM card” later in this chapter for more information.
To edit PIN protection:
1.
Tap Security.
Tap Security
378
Mobile preferences
2.
Tap the PIN protect mobile check box to select or deselect it.
3.
Enter a PIN number using the keypad and press Function
tap OK.
+ Enter
, or
The minimum length is four characters, and the maximum length is eight
characters.
Enter PIN number
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To change your PIN number:
1.
Tap Change PIN.
Tap Change PIN
2.
Enter your current PIN number.
379
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Enter PIN number
4.
Enter a new PIN.
5.
Press Function
6.
Enter your new PIN number again to verify.
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
, or tap OK.
Unlocking your SIM card
If you enter the current PIN incorrectly three times, the SIM card is locked. A SIM
locked alert displays. You must enter an eight-digit PIN Unlock Key (PUK) to
unlock your SIM. The PUK is provided by your wireless service provider. To find
your PUK, check the documentation that came with your wireless service or
contact your wireless service provider.
IMPORTANT If you enter your PUK incorrectly ten consecutive times, your SIM card
is permanently locked. A permanently locked SIM card is usable for emergency
dialing only. Contact your wireless service provider.
380
Mobile preferences
To unlock your SIM card:
1.
Press Function
2.
Enter your PUK.
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Enter PUK
3.
Enter a new PIN.
4.
Press Function
5.
Enter the new PIN again to verify.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
, or tap OK.
Setting call barring
Call barring is a supplementary service that allows you to bar or block different
classes of incoming and outgoing calls ranging from All calls to No barring. The
call barring settings are protected by the barring password. The barring password
is managed by and originally obtained from the wireless service provider.
381
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To edit call barring settings:
1.
Tap Security.
Tap Security
2.
Tap the Call barring box.
Tap box
3.
Tap Edit Settings.
Tap Edit Settings
4.
382
Enter a call barring four-digit password using the keypad.
Mobile preferences
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Enter password
6.
Tap the Incoming Calls or Outgoing Calls pick list to change settings.
7.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To change the call barring password:
1.
Tap Change Password.
Tap Change Password
2.
Enter a new four-digit password.
383
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
4.
Enter the new password again to verify.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
, or tap OK.
Setting Fixed Number Dialing (FND)
Fixed Number Dialing (FND) restricts the handheld so that only preprogrammed
phone numbers in the FND phone book can be dialed. When you use FND, all
keyboard number and caps lock settings are disabled.
There are two modes to the FND screen: view and edit. When the user taps the
FND selector on the main Security screen, the FND view panel is displayed. You
can view or dial the numbers that are stored in the FND phone book. Tapping Edit
Settings and entering a valid PIN2 security code enables editing of the FND
settings.
IMPORTANT If you enter the PIN2 code incorrectly three consecutive times, access to
FND menus is blocked. You must obtain a PUK2 code from your wireless service
provider to unlock the services.
When FND is enabled:
384
■
Dialing is restricted to numbers contained in the FND phone book, except for
emergency calls.
■
You can extend an FND entry by adding digits to the dial string. This makes it
possible to restrict dialing to a specific country or area code.
Mobile preferences
To view or dial an FND entry:
1.
Select Security.
Tap Security
2.
Select the Fixed dialing box.
Tap box
3.
Select an entry and tap Dial.
You go to the PalmTM Mobile main screen and the number is dialed.
Select an entry
Tap Dial
385
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To add or edit an FND entry:
1.
Select Edit.
Tap Edit
2.
Enter your PIN2 number.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Done.
Enter PIN2 number
Tap OK
4.
Tap New, or select an entry and tap Edit.
Select an entry to edit
Tap New or Edit
5.
386
Edit or add the entry.
Mobile preferences
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
You can delete the entry by tapping Delete, or access your Address Book by
tapping Lookup.
To change the PIN2 number:
1.
Select Edit.
Tap Edit
2.
Enter your PIN2 number.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Enter PIN2 number
Tap OK
387
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
4.
Tap PIN2.
Tap PIN2
5.
Enter the new PIN2 number.
6.
Press Function
+ Enter
or tap OK.
The number must be between four and eight digits.
7.
Enter the new PIN2 number again to verify.
8.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Using SIM phone books
SIM phone books are stored on the SIM card that you receive from your wireless
service provider. You can access SIM phone books from the Mobile preferences
screen. You can view entries in and dial numbers from all phone books, and you
can edit entries in some phone books.
388
Network preferences
To open SIM phone books:
1.
Tap SIM Phone Books from the Available settings list in the Mobile preferences
screen.
The SIM Phone Books screen opens.
2.
Tap the Phone book pick list, and then select one of the following phone books
to open:
Service numbers: Stores service numbers. This phone book only appears if your
wireless service provider supports service numbers. You can only view entries
in this phone book, but you cannot edit them.
My numbers:
Stores numbers that you frequently use. You can view and edit
these entries.
SOS numbers: Stores emergency numbers. You can view these entries, but you
cannot edit them.
Copying entries from SIM phone books to Address Book
You can copy information from a SIM phone book into Address Book on your
handheld.
To copy information from a SIM phone book to Address Book:
1.
Tap an entry in the SIM phone book.
1.
Press Function
2.
Do one of the following:
+ Menu
.
– Tap Copy to Address Book to copy the last name associated with the entry to
Address book.
– Tap Copy All to copy all information associated with the entry to Address
book.
Network preferences
Your handheld supports GPRS data connections and acts as a fully functional data
modem for circuit-switched connections over GSM.
Modem Accessory and TCP/IP software
Although your handheld is wirelessly enabled, you can also use TCP/IP software
that is included in the handheld operating system to connect with Internet Service
Providers (ISPs) or dial-in (remote access) servers.
To use TCP/IP, you must create a configuration in Connection Preferences and
then create Network Preferences settings.
The Connection Preferences screen enables you to define several ways that your
handheld can use a modem to communicate with remote devices. For example,
you can communicate with the wireless service provider server, or with your
389
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
computer if you are traveling. See “Connection preferences” earlier in this chapter
for a complete explanation of how to create modem configurations.
After you configure both the Connection and Network Preferences, you can
establish a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) connection with your wireless service
provider or dial-in server. You can do this either by using menu commands from
the Network Preferences screen or by using a third-party application.
NOTE TCP/IP provides the ability to connect to your wireless service provider or dial-
in server with applications that allow you to view the transmitted data. Visit the web
site www.palm.com/support/intl for information on third-party applications that take
advantage of TCP/IP.
Selecting a service
Use the Service setting to select the service template for your wireless service
provider or a dial-in server. Service templates are a set of wireless service provider
and dial-in server configuration settings that you can create, save, and reuse. Also,
you can create new service templates. See “Creating additional service templates”
later in this chapter.
To select a service:
1.
Tap the Service pick list.
Tap here to display a
list of service
templates
2.
Select the predefined service template you want to use.
Entering a username
The User Name setting identifies the name you use when you log in to your
wireless service provider or your dial-in server. Although this field can contain
multiple lines of text, only two lines appear onscreen.
390
Network preferences
To enter a username:
1.
Tap the User Name field.
2.
Enter your username.
Enter your username here
NOTE Most dial-in servers do not accept spaces in the username.
Entering a password
The Password box identifies the password you use to log in to your server or
wireless service provider. Your entry in this field determines whether your
handheld prompts you to enter a password each time you log in to your network:
■
If you do not enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Prompt” in
this field and asks you to enter a password during the login procedure.
■
If you enter a password, your handheld displays the word “Assigned” in this
field and does not prompt you to enter a password during the login procedure.
If you are concerned about security, select the Prompt option and do not enter a
password.
To enter a password:
1.
Tap the Password box.
2.
Enter the password you use to log in to your server.
.
Enter password here
Tap here
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
The Password field updates to display the word “Assigned.”
391
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Selecting a connection
Use the Connection setting to select the method you want to use to connect to your
wireless service provider or a dial-in server. See “Connection preferences” earlier
in this chapter for information about creating and configuring connection settings.
To select a connection:
1.
Tap the Connection pick list.
Tap here to display a
list of available
connections
2.
Select the connection you want to use.
Adding telephone settings
Some services require a telephone number. When you select the Phone field, a
dialog box opens in which you define the telephone number you use to connect
with your wireless service provider or dial-in server. In addition, you can define a
prefix, disable call waiting, and give special instructions for using a calling card.
To enter your server phone number:
1.
Tap the Phone field.
2.
Enter the phone number for your wireless service provider or dial-in server.
Enter the phone number here
3.
392
If you need to enter a prefix or disable call waiting, skip to those procedures.
Otherwise, press Function
+ Enter , or tap OK.
Network preferences
Entering a prefix
A prefix is a number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside
line. For example, many offices require that you dial “9” before dialing a number
outside the building.
To enter a prefix:
1.
Tap the Dial prefix check box to select it.
Select this
box if you
need to use a
prefix
2.
Enter the prefix.
3.
Press Function
Enter your
prefix here
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Disabling call waiting
Call waiting can cause your session to terminate if you receive a call while you are
connected. If your telephone has call waiting, you need to disable this feature
before logging in to your wireless service provider or dial-in server.
To disable call waiting:
1.
Tap the Disable call waiting check box to select it.
Select this
box if you
need to
disable call
waiting
2.
Enter your disable
code here
Enter the code to disable call waiting on the Disable call waiting line.
Each telephone company assigns a code to disable call waiting. Contact your
local telephone company for the code that is appropriate for you.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
393
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Using a calling card
The Use calling card field enables you to use your calling card when dialing your
wireless service provider or Intranet server. Keep in mind that there is usually a
delay before you enter your calling card number. When you define your calling
card number, you need to add commas at the beginning to compensate for this
delay. Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two
seconds.
To use a calling card:
1.
Tap the Use calling card check box to select it.
Select this
box to use a
calling card
2.
Enter your
calling card
number here
Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line.
NOTE The Phone Setup dialog box works correctly for AT&T and Sprint long-
distance services. However, because MCI works differently, MCI customers
need to put the calling card number in the Phone # field and the phone number
in the Use calling card field.
It’s a good idea to add at least three commas before your calling card
number to compensate for the cue delay.
TIP
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Connecting to your service
After you set your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection
to your wireless service provider or your company’s network (dial-in server) is
easy.
To establish a connection:
■
Tap Connect to dial the current service and display the Service Connection
Progress messages.
To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press the lower half of
the Scroll button.
394
Network preferences
To close a connection:
■
Tap Disconnect to terminate the connection between your handheld and your
service.
Creating additional service templates
You can create additional service templates from scratch, or you can duplicate
existing templates and editing information. After you create a new or duplicate
template, you can add and edit settings.
To add a new service template:
■
Press Command Stroke
+ N.
Alternately, press Function
Service Menu.
+ Menu
, and then select New on the
An Untitled service template is added to the Service pick list.
To duplicate an existing service template:
1.
Tap the Service pick list.
2.
Select the predefined service template you want to duplicate.
3.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Service Menu.
+ L.
+ Menu
, and then select Duplicate on the
A copy of the service template is added to the Service pick list.
Adding detailed information to a service template
If you are using one of the predefined service templates, you probably need to
enter only your username and telephone number. If you are creating a new service
template, you may need to provide additional information to your wireless service
provider or dial-in server. You use the Details dialog box to add more information
to a selected service template.
395
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To add connection details:
1.
Tap the service field.
2.
Tap Details.
Idle timeout
The Idle timeout setting defines how long your handheld waits before dropping
the connection with your wireless service provider or dial-in server when you
switch out of a TCP/IP application.
To set the Idle timeout:
1.
Tap the Idle timeout pick list and select one of the following options:
1 minute
Waits one minute for you to open another application before it
drops the connection.
2 minutes
Waits two minutes.
3 minutes
Waits three minutes.
Never
Maintains your connection until you
turn off your handheld (or until it times out).
PPP or SLIP connections:
Maintains your connection until you
disconnect from the network, or until your wireless service
provider terminates your connection. Turning off your handheld
or experiencing a timeout event does not automatically
terminate a GPRS connection.
GPRS connections:
CAUTION By enabling this option, you may incur significant
charges if the connection to your wireless service provider is left
open.
Power off
2.
396
Ends the connection at power off (GPRS only).
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Network preferences
Selecting Next Service
Next Service allows you to automatically try another connection method when the
primary method fails. If the current connection fails, then a connection to the
selected service is attempted. If you do not want to try another service connection,
select None.
To select the Next Service:
■
Tap the Next Service pick list and select a service.
Defining primary and secondary DNS
The Domain Naming System (DNS) is a mechanism in the Internet for translating
the names of host computers into IP addresses. When you enter a DNS number (or
IP address) you are identifying a specific server that handles the translation
services.
Each IP address has four sections, separated by periods. In the Details dialog box,
you enter each section separately. Each section of an IP address is made up of a
number from 0 to 255; numbers are the only allowable characters in this field.
Ask your wireless service provider or system administrator for the correct primary
or secondary DNS IP numbers.
Many systems do not require that you enter a DNS. If you are not sure, leave the
DNS field blank.
To enter a primary and secondary DNS:
1.
Tap the Query DNS check box to deselect it.
2.
Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary DNS field, and then
enter the first section of the IP address.
Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
3.
Repeat step 2 for the second, third, and last sections of the Primary DNS field.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the secondary DNS number.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
397
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
IP address
Everyone who logs in to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier (an IP
address), whether permanent or temporary. Some networks dynamically assign a
temporary IP address when clients log in. The IP Address field lets you identify
whether your network provides automatic (dynamic) temporary IP addressing.
If your IP address is permanently assigned, you need to get that information from
your system administrator. If you are not sure, select Automatic.
To identify dynamic IP addressing:
■
Tap the IP Address check box to select it.
Tap to select automatic IP
address
To enter a permanent IP address:
1.
Tap the IP Address check box to deselect it and display a permanent IP address
field below the check box.
2.
Tap the space to the left of the first period, and then enter the first section of the
IP address.
Each section must be a number from 0 to 255.
398
3.
Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Network preferences
Login scripts
A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network
server—for example, your corporate network or your wireless service provider.
A login script is associated with a specific service template created in Network
Preferences.
A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system
administrator if your company has a system in which you log in to the corporate
servers from your handheld using a modem or network connection. The script is
generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need
it. It automates the events that must take place in order to establish a connection
between your handheld and the corporate servers.
You can create login scripts from the Login Script dialog box on your handheld,
accessed from the Details dialog box in Network Preferences.
Tap here to see the list of
available commands
NOTE You can also use non-ASCII and literal characters in your login script.
Creating a login script on your handheld
You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in
the Login Script dialog box. Some commands, such as Send, require you to supply
additional information. Those commands have a parameter field so that you can
add the necessary data.
399
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To create a login script:
1.
Tap Script.
2.
Tap the End pick list.
Tap here
3.
400
Select the command you want from the Command list. If the command requires
additional information, a field appears to the right of it for you to enter the
information. The following commands are available:
Wait For
Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the
TCP/IP server before executing the next command.
Wait For
Prompt
Detects a challenge-response prompt coming from the server
and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value.
You then enter the challenge value into your token card, which
in turn generates a response value for you to enter on your
handheld. This command takes two arguments, separated by a
vertical bar (|) on the input line.
Send
Transmits specific characters to the TCP/IP server to which you
are connecting.
Send CR
Transmits a carriage return or LF character to the TCP/IP server
to which you are connecting.
Send User ID
Transmits the user ID information entered in the User ID field of
the Network Preferences screen.
Send
Password
Transmits the password entered in the Password field of the
Network Preferences screen. If you did not enter a password,
this command prompts you to enter one. The Password
command is usually followed by a Send CR command.
Delay
Tells your handheld to wait a specific number of seconds before
executing the next command in the login script.
Network preferences
Get IP
Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your
handheld. This command is used with SLIP connections.
Prompt
Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter text of some kind
(for example, a password or a security code).
End
Identifies the last line in the login script.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the login script is complete.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Plug-in applications
You can create plug-in applications containing script commands that extend the
functionality of the built-in script commands. A plug-in application is a standard
PRC application that you install on your handheld just like any other application.
After you install the plug-in application, you can use the new script commands in
a login script.
Plug-in applications have the following characteristics:
■
Written in C language
■
Compiled into a device executable
■
Called properly from a login script
■
Able to return control to a login script after it terminates
■
Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS® software,
such as Metrowerks CodeWarrior for Palm Platform.
For additional information on creating plug-in applications, send e-mail to Palm
Developer Support at [email protected]
Deleting a service template
There is only one way to delete a service template: use the Delete command from
the Service menu.
To delete a service template:
1.
Tap the Service pick list.
2.
Select the service template you want to delete.
3.
Press Command Stroke
Alternately, press Function
Service Menu.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
+ D.
+ Menu
, and then select Delete on the
, or tap OK.
401
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Network preferences menu commands
The Network Preferences screen includes menu commands to make it fast and easy
to create and edit service templates. See “Using menus” in Chapter 4 for more
information about choosing menu commands.
Service menu
Options menu
View Log
The Network Log lists all of the communication that occurs between your modem
and your dial-in server during the login procedure. The information in the
Network Log can help your wireless service provider or your system
administrator pinpoint where the login procedure communication fails and why.
Owner preferences
The Owner Preferences screen enables you to record a name, company name,
phone number, or any other information that you want to associate with your
handheld. This information can be from the business card created during
installation.
If you use the Security Preferences screen to turn off and lock your handheld with
a password, information that you put in the Owner Preferences is displayed the
next time you turn on your handheld.
To enter the Owner preferences:
■
402
Enter the text that you want to associate with your handheld in the Owner
Preferences screen. If you enter more text than can fit on one screen, a scroll bar
automatically appears on the right side of the screen.
Power preferences
If you assign a password with the Security Preferences screen, the information in
the Owner Preferences screen cannot be changed. In this case, an Unlock button
appears at the bottom of the screen.
To unlock the Owner Preferences screen:
1.
Tap Unlock.
2.
Enter the password that you defined in the Security Preferences screen.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Power preferences
The Power Preferences screen enables you to set the automatic shutoff feature,
cradle settings, and the Beam Receive feature.
Automatic shutoff
Your handheld has an automatic shutoff feature that activates after a period of
inactivity. This feature turns off the power and backlight but leaves the radio on.
This feature helps conserve battery power in case you forget to turn off your
handheld.
If you find that your handheld shuts itself off before you finish reviewing the
information on the screen, you can increase the time setting of the automatic
shutoff feature.
To set the automatic shutoff:
1.
Tap the Auto-off after pick list.
2.
Select the setting you want to use: 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes.
403
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Cradle settings
You can choose to leave your handheld on when it is in the cradle during a
HotSync operation, or when you are recharging the battery, so you can continue to
view your data.
To change the cradle setting:
■
Tap the Stay on in Cradle check box to leave your handheld on when it is in the
cradle.
Beam Receive
You can choose to turn off the Beam Receive feature. This prohibits anyone from
beaming information to your handheld. It also results in a slight saving of battery
power.
To change the Beam Receive setting:
■
Tap the Beam Receive pick list and select On or Off.
Security preferences
Your handheld comes with a Security feature so that unauthorized users cannot
view the entries you want to protect. Use the Security feature to do the following:
■
Lock and turn off your handheld so that it does not operate until you enter the
correct password.
■
Mask all records that you mark as private so the information appears grayed
out.
■
Hide all records that you mark as private so they do not appear on any screen.
You can mask and hide private records with or without a password. Without a
password, private records are hidden or masked until you set the Security
preference to show them. With a password, you must enter the password to view
the private entries.
404
Security preferences
Assigning a password
You can assign a password to protect your private records and to lock your
handheld.
To assign a password:
1.
Tap the Password box.
2.
Enter a password.
3.
Enter a hint to help your remember your password if you forget it. This is
optional.
Tap here
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
5.
Enter the same password a second time, and press Function
tap OK.
+ Enter
, or
Changing or deleting a password
Once you define a password for your handheld, you can change or delete it at any
time. You must enter the current password before you can change or delete it.
405
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To change or delete your password:
1.
Tap the Password box.
2.
Enter the current password.
Tap here
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
4.
Do one of the following:
, or tap OK.
– To change the password and hint, enter the new password and hint, and
press Function
+ Enter , or tap OK.
– To remove the password, tap Unassign.
Locking your handheld
You can lock your handheld so that it cannot be operated until your password is
entered. In the event that your handheld is lost or stolen, this helps protect your
data from unauthorized use. You can set your handheld to lock automatically, or
you can lock it manually.
NOTE The lockout screen has an Emergency Call button in case the phone needs to
be used in an emergency.
406
Security preferences
Locking your handheld automatically
You can set your handheld to lock automatically when any one of the following
occur:
■
When you turn off the power
■
At a time you specify
■
After a period of inactivity you specify
To set your handheld to lock when you turn it off:
1.
Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Select On power off.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
407
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
To set your handheld to lock at a preset time:
1.
Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Select At a preset time, and then use the arrows to set the time.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To set your handheld to lock after a period of inactivity:
408
1.
Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box.
2.
Enter your password.
Security preferences
3.
Select After a preset delay.
Tap to select Minutes or Hours
Enter the amount of time
4.
Enter the inactive period, and then select Minute(s) or Hour(s) from the pick list.
5.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
IMPORTANT If you lock your handheld, you must enter the exact password to
reactivate your handheld. If you forget the password, your handheld will present the
hint you have entered to help you remember the password. If you still cannot
remember the password, you must perform a hard reset to resume using your
handheld. Performing a hard reset deletes all the records in your handheld; however,
you can restore all synchronized data at the next HotSync operation. See “Performing
a hard reset” in Appendix A for more information.
Locking your handheld manually
You can turn off and lock your handheld manually. When the handheld is locked,
you can only make emergency calls by pressing the four application buttons
simultaneously.
To lock and turn off your handheld:
1.
Tap Lock & Turn Off.
Tap Lock
and Turn Off
2.
Tap Off & Lock.
3.
To use your handheld, turn it on and then enter the password.
409
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Recovering from a forgotten password
IMPORTANT
Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries and files marked
as Private.
If you forget your password, your handheld displays the password hint, if you
entered one, to help you remember the password. If you are still unable to
remember the password, you can delete it from your handheld.
IMPORTANT If you synchronize with your computer before deleting a forgotten
password, your handheld restores your private entries the next time you perform a
HotSync operation, but it does not restore the password.
To delete a forgotten password:
1.
Tap Lost Password.
2.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Yes.
Making records private
In many applications, you can make individual records private. Private records
remain visible and accessible, however, until you select the Security setting to hide
or mask all private records. Masked records appear as grey placeholders in the
same position they would appear if they were not masked, and are marked with a
lock icon. Hidden records disappear completely from the screen. If you define a
password for your handheld, you must enter it to display private records.
410
Security preferences
To hide all private records:
1.
Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Hide Records.
Tap Hide
Records
2.
Press Function
private records.
+ Enter
, or tap OK to confirm that you want to hide
To mask all private records:
1.
Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Mask Records.
Tap Mask
Records
2.
Press Function
private records.
+ Enter
, or tap OK to confirm that you want to mask
To display all private records:
1.
Do one of the following:
– Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Records.
– If you do not have a password, hidden and masked records become visible.
If you have a password, the Show Private Records dialog box appears. Go to
step 2.
Select
Show
Records
411
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To unmask individual records:
1.
Select a masked record.
2.
Do one of the following:
– If you do not have a password, a masked record becomes visible.
– If you have a password, the Show Private Records dialog box appears. Go to
step 3.
3.
Enter your password.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To make a record private:
1.
Display the entry that you want to make private.
2.
Tap Details.
3.
Tap the Private check box.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
ShortCuts preferences
The ShortCuts Preferences screen enables you to define abbreviations for entering
text. This section describes how to create, edit, and delete a ShortCut.
Creating a ShortCut
You can create a ShortCut for any words, letters, or numbers. All ShortCuts you
create appear on the list in the ShortCut Preferences screen. All the ShortCuts are
available in any of your handheld applications and are backed up on your
computer when you perform a HotSync operation.
To create a ShortCut:
1.
Tap New.
2.
On the ShortCut Name line, enter the letters you want to use to activate the
ShortCut.
Tap New
412
ShortCuts preferences
3.
Select the ShortCut Text area and enter the text that you want to appear when
you write the ShortCut characters.
You may want to add a space (space character) after the last word in your
ShortCut text. This way, a space automatically follows the ShortCut text.
TIP
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
To use a ShortCut, press Press Function
+ ShortCut
followed by the
ShortCut characters. The ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to
show that you are in ShortCut mode.
ShortCut
symbol
Editing a ShortCut
After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time.
To edit a ShortCut:
1.
Tap the ShortCut you want to edit.
2.
Tap Edit.
3.
Make the changes you want.
4.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap OK.
Deleting a ShortCut
If you no longer need a ShortCut, you can delete it from the list of ShortCuts.
To delete a ShortCut:
1.
Tap the ShortCut you want to delete.
2.
Tap Delete.
3.
Press Function
+ Enter
, or tap Yes.
413
Chapter 20
Setting Preferences for Your Handheld
Sounds & Alerts
Your handheld uses a variety of sounds. The Sounds & Alerts Preferences screen
enables you to turn the sounds on or off and to adjust the volume level.
Do one of the following:
■
Tap Custom to set each option individually.
■
Tap Silent to disable all sounds but enable LED and vibrator settings.
■
Tap All Off to disable all sounds and alerts.
System, game, and alarm sounds
To set the system, game, and alarm sounds:
1.
Tap the System Sound pick list and select the sound level.
When you turn off the system sounds, you also turn off the “chime”
tones associated with the HotSync operation.
IMPORTANT
2.
Tap the Game Sound pick list and select the sound level.
The Game Sound setting works only with games that are programmed to
respond to this setting. Older games typically do not respond to this setting.
3.
Tap the Alarm Sound pick list and select the sound level.
Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings
You can set alarms in Date Book, Note Pad, and World Clock to remind you of
important meetings or notes. Depending on the settings you select, your handheld
can vibrate and the indicator light can blink to notify you of alarms. This is useful
whenever you want to turn the Alarm Sound off but still be notified of alarms.
To set the Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings:
414
1.
Tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list and select On or Off.
2.
Tap the Alarm LED pick list and select On or Off.
APPENDIX A
Maintaining Your Handheld
This appendix provides information on the following:
■
Proper care of your handheld
■
Prolonging battery life
■
Resetting your handheld
■
Removing and installing your SIM card
Caring for your handheld
Your handheld is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide years of
trouble-free service. Please observe the following general tips when using your
handheld:
■
Take care not to scratch the screen of your handheld. Keep the screen clean.
When working with your handheld, use the supplied stylus or plastic-tipped
pens intended for use with a touch-sensitive screen. Never use an actual pen or
pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the handheld screen.
■
Your handheld is not waterproof and should not be exposed to rain or moisture.
Under extreme conditions, water may enter the circuitry through the front
panel buttons. In general, treat your handheld as you would a pocket calculator
or other small electronic instrument.
■
Take care not to drop your handheld or subject it to any strong impact. Do not
carry your handheld in your back pocket: if you sit on it, you may damage it.
■
Protect your handheld from temperature extremes. For example, do not leave
your handheld on the dashboard of a car on a hot day or on a day when
temperatures are below freezing, and keep it away from heaters and other heat
sources.
■
Do not store or use your handheld in any location that is extremely dusty, damp,
or wet.
■
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean your handheld. If the surface of the handheld
screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted
window-cleaning solution.
415
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld
Battery considerations
Please note the following considerations for the battery in your handheld:
■
Under normal conditions, you can keep your handheld battery charged by
placing it in the cradle between 30 and 60 minutes each day. You can conserve
battery life by minimizing the use of the backlight feature, and changing the
Auto-off setting that automatically turns the handheld off after a period of
inactivity. See “Automatic shutoff” in Chapter 20 for more information.
■
If the battery becomes low in the course of normal use, an alert appears on the
handheld screen describing the low battery condition. If this alert appears,
perform a HotSync® operation to back up your data; then leave your handheld
in the cradle to recharge the unit. This helps prevent accidental data loss.
■
If the battery becomes too low, the wireless operations are disabled to save
battery strength.
■
If the battery drains to the point where your handheld does not operate, it stores
your data safely for about five days. In this case, there is enough residual energy
in the battery to store the data, but not enough to turn on your handheld. If your
handheld does not turn on when you press the power button, you should
recharge the unit immediately. The battery may not have enough residual
energy to power the indicator light, which normally displays green when
charging.
■
If your battery drains and you have the unit in an uncharged state for an
extended period of time, you can lose all of the stored data.
■
There are no serviceable parts inside your handheld, so do not attempt to open
the unit.
■
If you ever dispose of your handheld, please dispose of it without damaging the
environment. Take your handheld to your nearest environmental recycling
center.
Resetting your handheld
Under normal circumstances, you will not have to use the reset button. On rare
occasions, however, your handheld may no longer respond to buttons or the
screen. In this case, you need to perform a reset to get your handheld running
again.
416
Resetting your handheld
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset tells your handheld to stop what it’s doing and start over again. All
records and entries stored in your handheld are retained with a soft reset. After a
soft reset, the Welcome screen appears, followed by the Date and Time Preferences
screen (to set date and time).
To perform a soft reset:
■
Use the reset tip tool, or the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or similar object
without a sharp tip), to gently press the reset button inside the hole on the back
panel of your handheld.
Reset button
The metal and plastic stylus that comes with your handheld has a reset tip
inside. To use it, unscrew the barrel from the stylus quill.
TIP
Performing a hard reset
With a hard reset, all records and entries stored in your handheld are erased. Never
perform a hard reset unless a soft reset does not solve your problem.
NOTE You can restore any data previously synchronized with your computer during
the next HotSync operation.
To perform a hard reset:
1.
Hold down the power button on the front panel of the handheld.
2.
While holding down the power button, use the reset tip tool, or the tip of an
unfolded paper clip (or similar object without a sharp tip), to gently press and
release the reset button.
3.
Wait for the Palm Powered™ logo to appear; then release the power button.
417
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld
4.
When a message appears on the handheld screen warning that you are about to
erase all the data stored on your handheld, do one of the following:
– Press Up on the navigator to complete the hard reset and display the
Digitizer screen.
– Press any application button to perform a soft reset. (Pressing a keyboard key
has no effect.)
NOTE With a hard reset, the current date and time are retained. Formats
Preferences and other settings are restored to their factory default settings.
To restore your data from a Windows computer after a hard reset:
1.
Click the HotSync icon
the taskbar).
™ in the Windows system tray (lower-right corner of
You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm™ Desktop software
menu bar.
2.
From the HotSync Manager menu, select Custom.
3.
Select the appropriate username from the list.
4.
Select an application in the Conduit list.
5.
Click Change, and select Desktop overwrites the handheld.
Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync
operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings. To
use a new setting on an ongoing basis, select the Set As Default box. Thereafter,
whatever you selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default
button in the Custom dialog box.
418
6.
Click OK.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to change conduit settings for other applications.
8.
Click Done to activate your settings.
9.
Perform a HotSync operation.
Resetting your handheld
To restore your data from a Mac computer after a hard reset:
1.
Double-click the HotSync Manager in the Palm folder.
2.
From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.
3.
From the Users pop-up menu, select the appropriate username.
4.
Select an application from the list.
5.
Click Conduit Settings.
6.
Click Macintosh overwrites handheld.
NOTE Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next
HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default
settings. To use a new setting on an ongoing basis, click Make Default.
Thereafter, whatever you selected as the default setting is used for HotSync
operations.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change conduit settings for other applications.
9.
Close the Conduit Settings window.
10. Perform
a HotSync operation.
419
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld
Installing and removing the SIM card
With the SIM card installed, you can use your handheld’s wireless features, such
as the mobile phone, SMS, and wireless e-mail. Without the SIM card, you can
operate your handheld, but you cannot use the wireless features.
If you have not installed your SIM card, read the following instructions. Most
likely, the SIM card either is in your package or was handed to you by a
representative of your wireless service provider. In some cases the SIM card is
already installed in your handheld by your wireless service provider.
IMPORTANT If you are sending in your handheld for service to Palm, you must
remove the SIM card before sending in your handheld. Use the following instructions
if you need to exchange or remove the SIM card.
To install the SIM card or verify installation:
1.
If you have the SIM card attached to its plastic holder, carefully detach the SIM
card from the holder.
2.
On the back panel of your handheld, slide a thin, flat edge (similar to your
thumb nail) in the indent and under the access door until the access door is
released.
3.
Do one of the following:
– If a placeholder card is present, remove the placeholder card. Then slide the
SIM card into place on the access door. Close the access door.
420
Installing and removing the SIM card
– If the SIM card is present (look for the gold contact area), close the access
door.
After removing the placeholder card,
slide the SIM card into place on the
access door
To remove the SIM card:
1.
Turn off the handheld.
Turn off the handheld before opening the access door and removing
the SIM card. This prevents any static discharge and damage to the connector.
IMPORTANT
2.
On the back panel of your handheld, slide your thumbnail into the indent and
under the access door until the access door is released.
SIM card
421
Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld
422
3.
Slide the SIM card out of guides on the underside of the access door. Close the
access door.
4.
Place the SIM card in a nonstatic container for safe keeping.
APPENDIX B
Frequently Asked Questions
If you encounter a problem with your handheld, do not call technical support until
you have reviewed the following list of frequently asked questions and you have
also reviewed the following:
■
This handbook
■
The Read This First that came with your handheld
■
The README file located in the folder where you installed the Palm™ Desktop
software on your Windows computer or on your installation CD for Macintosh
users
■
The Palm Desktop online Help
■
The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide located in the
Documentation folder on your installation CD
■
The Palm Knowledge Library, accessible at www.palm.com/support/. Be sure to
navigate to country-specific pages, if necessary.
■
The most recent Palm™ Tungsten™ W handheld HelpNotes on your regional
web site
If you are still having problems, contact Technical Support. See the Customer
Support card that comes with your handheld, or go to www.palm.com/support/. Be
sure to navigate to country-specific pages, if necessary.
NOTE Thousands of third-party add-on applications have been written for Palm OS®
handhelds. Unfortunately, we are not able to test and qualify such a large number of
third-party applications. If you are having a problem with a third-party application,
please contact the developer or publisher of that software.
423
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions
Software installation problems
Problem
Solution
The Palm Desktop Installer
Menu did not appear when I
inserted the CD-ROM into my
Windows computer.
1.
Click the Start button.
2.
Choose Run from the Start menu.
3.
Click Browse.
4.
Locate your CD-ROM drive and select the autorun.exe
file.
5.
Click Open.
6.
Click OK.
I cannot install Palm Desktop
software on my Windows
computer.
Try the following:
1.
Disable any virus scanning software on your computer.
2.
Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE and end all tasks except Systray
and Explorer.
If a dialog box with buttons appears instead of a list of
tasks, click the Task List button and then end all tasks
except Systray and Explorer.
I cannot install Palm Desktop
software on a Mac computer.
424
3.
Make sure your computer has at least 30MB of disk space
available.
4.
Delete all temporary files.
5.
Run ScanDisk on your computer.
6.
Reinstall Palm Desktop software.
Try the following:
1.
Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer.
2.
Quit any open applications.
3.
Make sure your computer has at least 25MB of disk space
available.
4.
Reinstall Palm Desktop software.
Operating problems
Operating problems
Problem
Solution
I don’t see anything on my
handheld’s screen.
Try each of these in turn:
■
Press an application button to ensure your handheld is
turned on.
■
Press Function
+ Brightness . If the Brightness
dialog box appears, adjust the brightness by holding down
the up scroll button for a few seconds. If this doesn’t work,
hold the down scroll button for a few seconds.
■
If your handheld was exposed to cold, make sure it is at
room temperature.
■
Recharge the unit.
■
Perform a soft reset. If your handheld still doesn’t turn on,
perform a hard reset. See “Resetting your handheld” in
Appendix A.
IMPORTANT With a hard reset, all records and entries stored
in your handheld are erased. Never perform a hard reset
unless a soft reset does not solve your problem. You can
restore any data previously synchronized with your computer
during the next HotSync® operation.
My battery doesn’t charge.
I get a warning message telling
me my handheld memory is
full.
■
Make sure the power outlet is active and the HotSync
cradle is properly plugged in.
■
If the battery does not hold a charge, return your handheld
to an authorized Palm service center.
■
Purge records from Date Book and To Do List. This deletes
To Do List items and past Date Book events from the
memory of your handheld. See “Purging records” in
Chapter 4. You may need to perform a HotSync operation
to recover the memory.
■
Delete unused memos and records. If necessary, you can
save these records. See “Deleting records” in Chapter 4.
■
If you have installed additional applications on your
handheld, remove them to recover memory.
See “Removing applications” in Chapter 4.
425
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions
My handheld keeps turning
itself off.
Your handheld is designed to turn itself off after a period of
inactivity. This period can be set at one, two, or three minutes.
Check the Auto-off setting. See “Automatic shutoff” in
Chapter 20.
My handheld is not making
any sounds.
Check the System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings.
See “Sounds & Alerts” in Chapter 20.
My handheld’s indicator light
is not blinking when alarms
occur.
Check the Alarm LED setting. See “Alarm Vibrate and
indicator light settings” in Chapter 20.
My handheld does not vibrate
when alarms occur.
Check the Alarm Vibrate setting. See “Alarm Vibrate and
indicator light settings” in Chapter 20.
My handheld has frozen.
Perform a soft reset. See “Resetting your handheld” in
Appendix A.
My handheld appears to freeze
when I place it near my
computer.
Move your handheld away from the computer’s infrared port.
Tapping and writing problems
Problem
Solution
When I tap the buttons or
screen icons, my handheld
activates the wrong feature.
Calibrate the screen. See “Digitizer preferences” in Chapter 20.
When I press Function
+
Not all applications or screens have menus. Try changing to a
Menu
, or tap the Menu bar different application.
nothing happens.
E-mail problems
Problem
Solution
E-mail settings are inaccurate.
For the latest information on settings, consult your ISP or
e-mail service provider. The settings for the default list of
preconfigured accounts in the Palm™ VersaMail™ e-mail
application are accurate at release, but mail server settings
may change over time.
426
E-mail problems
E-mail service is not working
properly.
Short periods of time when e-mail is unavailable are common
due to server problems or poor wireless coverage. If you have
problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of
time, check with your ISP or e-mail service provider to verify
that the service is working properly.
E-mail is not being sent.
Try these steps, in turn:
■
Make sure your ISP or e-mail provider allows you to access
e-mail on a wireless handheld. Several providers, like
Hotmail, do not offer this option at all; other providers
require an upgrade to access e-mail on a wireless handheld.
■
Configure ESMTP. Many services require authenticated
access to use their SMTP servers, or ESMTP.
– In the VersaMail application, press Function + Menu,
and then select Mail Servers on the Options menu.
– Tap Details.
– Tap the Options pick-list and select Advanced
Outgoing.
– Select the My server requires authentication box.
– Enter your username and password.
– Tap OK, and then tap OK again.
■
Select another available server for sending mail. Many ISPs,
such as cable companies, require that you have an Internet
connection to their network to send e-mail through their
servers. In this case, you can almost always receive e-mail
from these accounts, but if you want to send e-mail, you
must send it through another server.
– Press Function + Menu on the keyboard, and then select
Account Setup from the Accounts menu.
– Tap the problem account.
– Tap Edit.
– Tap Next.
– Make sure your username and password are correct,
and tap Next.
– In the Outgoing Mail Server field, enter the address of a
server through which you can send mail.
– Tap Next.
– Tap Done.
427
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions
Wireless problems
Problem
Solution
The signal strength is weak.
You can monitor the transmission signal strength using the
Signal Strength bar graph. Monitor the signal strength while
you try the following solutions:
I can’t access the Internet.
I can’t access a web page or a
web clipping application.
■
Move away from your original location, five to ten feet in
any direction.
■
If you’re indoors, stand near a window, or move outdoors.
■
Open metal blinds on windows.
■
If you’re in an underground parking lot or other space
below street level, move to a location above ground.
■
If you’re in a crowd, move to a less crowded area.
■
If you’re in a vehicle, keep your handheld level with the
windshield. The metal frame of the vehicle shields mobile
radio signals. Mountains and buildings may also block
signals.
■
If you’re outdoors, move away from overhead electrical
wires. Move from under trees.
■
Check the battery icon to verify that the battery is charged.
■
Make sure the mobile radio is on and within range by
verifying that the indicator light is flashing green.
See “Using the indicator light” in Chapter 2.
■
Verify that the signal strength indicator shows a strong
signal.
■
Your wireless service provider’s server may be down. Try
again later.
■
Make sure the mobile radio is on and within range by
verifying that the indicator light reflects coverage.
See “Using the indicator light” in Chapter 2.
■
Try to access the home page of your wireless carrier by
pressing the Wireless button.
– If you can access the home page, network service is
available. It may be that the web page or the web
clipping server currently is not accessible. Try again
later.
– If you cannot access the home page, network service
may be down. Try again later.
428
Wireless problems
I am having a problem
establishing a network
connection.
■
For questions and support for third-party web clipping
applications, please contact the software developer directly.
■
Display expanded Service Connection Progress messages.
It’s helpful to identify at what point in the login procedure
the connection fails. An easy way to do this is to display the
expanded Service Connection Progress messages.
Expanded Service Connection Progress messages describe
the current stage of the login procedure. Press Up on the
navigator during login to display these messages.
■
View the Network Log.
If viewing the expanded Service Connection Progress
messages does not give you enough information to find out
why you cannot connect to your wireless service provider
or dial-in server, take a look at the Network Log. The
Network Log lists all of the communication that occurs
between your modem and your dial-in server during the
login procedure. The information in the Network Log can
help your wireless service provider or your system
administrator pinpoint where the login procedure
communication fails and why.
To view the Network Log, go to the Network Preferences
screen and press Command Stroke
+ V. (Alternately,
press Function
+ Menu
. Select Options, and then
select View Log.)
■
Add a DNS number.
If your wireless service provider or dial-in server requires a
DNS number and you did not enter that information in the
Network Preferences screen, it will appear that you
successfully logged into your network. When you try to use
an application or look up information, however, the
connection fails. If this occurs, try adding a DNS number.
Ask your wireless service provider or your system
administrator for the correct primary and secondary DNS
IP numbers.
429
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions
Palm WAP Browser problems
Problem
Solution
I cannot connect to my wireless
service provider.
You may need to enter additional technical networking
information. Contact your wireless service provider to
obtain their primary and secondary DNS address and
their IP address.
I can connect to my ISP, but I can’t
access a WAP site.
Try alternate WAP sites. A WAP site could be temporarily
unavailable due to site problems.
If you can’t access the alternate sites, then contact your ISP
and verify the following WAP browser settings: APN,
Mode, and Gateway Server. Also check Gateway ID and
Gateway password, if applicable.
I can’t access some WAP sites.
The WAP browser can access all WAP web sites compliant
to WAP version 1.1 or WAP version 1.2.1 (WAP June 2000
Conformance Release).
I can’t access an HTML web site.
The WAP browser does not open HTML web sites, only
WML web sites.
When generating a new password
or signature key pair, my handheld
froze.
Key generation can take up to an hour. During this time,
your handheld appears to be completely frozen and you
are not able to use your handheld.
I am having problems within a
specific WAP Internet site.
Contact the site administrator.
SMS problems
Problem
Solution
I cannot connect to my
SMS center.
You may need to enter the SMS center telephone number in
the SMS Preferences Details dialog box. To find this number,
check your mobile phone options screen or your wireless
service provider’s web site. See “Setting preferences” in
Chapter 14 for details.
430
Application problems
Palm Mobile problems
Problem
Solution
I connect to my wireless service
provider, but the number
doesn’t work.
■
Be sure the telephone number you are dialing has all the
digits required by your wireless service provider. If you are
dialing an international telephone number, a + (plus) sign
might be required at the beginning of the telephone
number.
■
Verify that your wireless service provider plan includes
phone services. Contact your wireless service provider for
information.
Application problems
Problem
Solution
I tapped the Today button, but
it does not show the correct
date.
Your handheld is not set to the current date. Make sure the Set
Date box in the Date and Time Preferences screen displays the
current date. See “Date and Time preferences” in Chapter 20
for more information.
I know I entered some records,
but they do not appear in the
application.
■
Check the Categories pick list (upper-right corner). Choose
All to display all of the records for the application.
■
Check Security and confirm that Private Records is set to
Show private records.
■
In To Do List, tap Show and see if Show Only Due Items is
selected.
■
If you cannot manually arrange the order of the memos in
the list screen, check the Memo Preferences setting. Make
sure that Sort by is set to Manual.
■
If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm
Desktop software and then perform a HotSync operation,
the memos on your handheld still appear in the order
defined in the Memo Preferences setting. In other words,
the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are
not transferred to your handheld.
I am having problems listing
memos the way I want to see
them.
431
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions
I created an event in Date Book,
but it doesn’t appear in the
Week View.
In the Week View, you cannot select overlapping events that
have the same start time. If you have two or more events with
the same start time, choose the Day View to see the
overlapping events.
My vCard or vCal e-mail
attachment isn’t forwarding
correctly.
Palm Desktop software provides several features that interact
with e-mail client software on a Windows computer. In order
for these features to work correctly, the e-mail client software
must be properly configured. Follow these steps to check the
configuration:
1.
Click the Windows Start menu, and then select Settings.
2.
Select Control Panel.
3.
Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab.
4.
Make sure that the E-mail field is set to the correct E-Mail
client software.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Start the e-mail client software and make sure it is
configured as the default MAPI client. Consult the
documentation for your desktop E-Mail application for
more information.
HotSync problems
Problem
Solution
I cannot perform a HotSync
operation; what should I check
to make sure I am doing it
correctly?
Make sure the HotSync cradle is connected securely.
On a Windows computer try these steps:
■
Check the Windows system tray to make sure the HotSync
Manager is running. If it is not, open Palm Desktop
software.
■
Make sure you selected Local USB or Local Serial, as
appropriate, from the HotSync Manager menu.
■
If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you selected the
correct serial port on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box.
It should be set to the port where you connected the
HotSync cradle.
On a Mac computer, try the following:
■
432
Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled. If it is not, doubleclick the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder and
enable HotSync Manager on the HotSync Controls tab.
HotSync problems
I performed a HotSync
operation, but one of my
applications did not
synchronize.
■
On a Windows computer, click the HotSync Manager and
choose Custom. Check that the correct conduit is active.
■
On a Mac computer, double-click the HotSync Manager
icon. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.
Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and
check that the correct conduit is active.
I am using Outlook as my PIM,
but I cannot do a HotSync
operation.
■
Click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom. Check that
the correct conduit is active.
■
Check that the correct conduit is installed. Reinstall the
HotSync Manager and make sure the correct conduit is
selected.
I cannot launch the HotSync
Manager.
■
If you are using the optional serial cradle, or if you are
performing a HotSync operation using a modem, make
sure you are not running another program, such as America
Online, that uses the serial port you selected in the Setup
dialog box.
■
Back up the Palm Desktop software, uninstall it, and then
reinstall it.
■
Make sure your handheld is seated in the cradle correctly.
■
Check the connection between the HotSync cradle and the
USB or serial port on your computer.
■
Make sure the username you selected in Palm Desktop
software matches the username assigned to your handheld.
■
Make sure the date on your computer matches the date on
your handheld.
■
Read the HotSync Log for the user account for which you
are performing a HotSync operation.
I tried to perform a local
HotSync operation, but it did
not complete successfully.
On a Windows computer, try each step in turn:
■
Make sure HotSync Manager is running. If it is running,
close it, and restart it.
■
Make sure you selected Local USB or Local Serial, as
appropriate, from the HotSync Manager menu.
433
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions
I tried to perform a local
HotSync operation, but it did
not complete successfully
(continued)
■
If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you selected the
correct serial port on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box.
It should be set to the port where you connected the
HotSync cradle.
■
If you are using the serial cradle, try a lower baud rate
setting on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box.
■
If you are using the serial cradle, make sure you aren’t
running a program, such as America Online, that uses the
serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box.
On a Mac computer, try the following:
■
I tried to perform a modem
HotSync operation, but it did
not complete successfully.
Make sure that HotSync Manager is enabled on the
HotSync Controls tab in the HotSync Software Setup
window.
Check the following on your computer:
■
Make sure your computer is turned on and that it does not
shut down automatically as part of an energy-saving
feature.
■
Make sure the modem connected to your computer is
turned on and is connected to the outgoing phone line.
■
Make sure the modem you are using with your handheld
has an on-off switch. Your handheld cannot “wake up” a
modem that has an auto-off feature.
■
Make sure the modem is connected properly to your
computer and is connected to the incoming phone line.
On a Windows computer, check the following:
434
■
Make sure that Modem is checked in the HotSync Manager
menu.
■
Confirm that the Setup String in the Setup dialog box
configures your modem correctly. You may need to select a
different Modem Type or enter a custom Setup String. Most
modems have a Setup String that causes them to send
initial connection sounds to a speaker. You can use these
sounds to check the modem connection.
■
Confirm that the Speed setting in the Setup dialog box
works for your modem. If you have problems using the As
Fast As Possible option or a specific speed, try using a
slower speed.
HotSync problems
I tried to perform a modem
HotSync operation, but it did
not complete successfully.
(continued)
■
Make sure you are not running another program, such as
WinFax, CompuServe, or America Online, that uses the
serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box.
■
Make sure your modem resets before you try again. (Turn
off your modem, wait a minute, and then turn it back on.)
On a Mac computer, check the following:
■
Make sure that Modem is selected on the Connection
Settings tab in the HotSync Software Setup window.
■
You may need to select a different Modem type or enter a
Custom setup string on the Connection Settings tab. Most
modems have a setup string that causes them to send initial
connection sounds to a speaker. You can turn on the
Modem Speaker option and use these sounds to check the
modem connection.
■
Make sure you are not running another program, such as
America Online, fax or telephony software, or AppleTalk
networking, that uses the serial port you selected in the
Serial Port Settings tab.
■
Make sure your modem resets before you try again. (Turn
off your modem, wait a minute, and then turn it back on.)
Check the following on your handheld:
■
Confirm that the telephone cable is securely attached to
your modem.
■
Make sure the dialing instruction dials the correct phone
number.
■
If you need to dial an outside line prefix, make sure you
selected the Dial Prefix option on your handheld and
entered the correct code.
■
If the telephone line you are using has Call Waiting, make
sure you selected the Disable call waiting option under
Modem Sync Phone Setup on your handheld and entered
the correct code.
■
Make sure the telephone line you are using is not noisy,
which can interrupt communications.
■
Check the batteries in your modem and replace them if
necessary.
435
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions
I can’t perform an IR HotSync
operation.
■
On a Windows computer, be sure the HotSync Manager is
running and the Serial Port for local operations is set to the
simulated port for infrared communication.
See “Conducting IR HotSync operations” in Chapter 19 for
details.
■
On a Mac, open the HotSync Software Setup window and
be sure that HotSync Manager is enabled and that the IR
Port Connection Setting is set to On. See “Conducting IR
HotSync operations” in Chapter 19 for more information.
■
On your handheld, be sure the HotSync application is set to
Local, with the option IR to PC/Handheld.
■
Be sure the IR port of your handheld is aligned directly
opposite to, and within a few inches of, the infrared device
of your computer.
■
IR HotSync operations do not work after you receive a low
battery warning. Check the battery power of your
handheld. Recharge the internal battery.
When I press the HotSync
button on the cradle, nothing
happens on Palm Desktop
software and my handheld
times out.
■
Make a copy of your Palm folder. Uninstall, and then
reinstall, Palm Desktop software.
■
Turn on your handheld and press the Home
HotSync icon, and then tap Local.
When I perform a HotSync
operation, my information
does not transfer to Palm
Desktop software.
■
If you perform a HotSync operation for more than one
device, make sure the correct user is active on the Palm
Desktop software.
■
If you have performed a HotSync operation successfully
but you cannot find the data from your handheld on Palm
Desktop software, check to see that you have the correct
user name selected for viewing data.
■
On a Windows computer, click the HotSync Manager and
choose Custom. Check that all conduits are set to
synchronize files.
■
On a Mac computer, double-click the HotSync Manager
icon. From the HotSync menu, choose Conduit Settings.
Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and
check that the correct conduit is active.
436
. Tap the
Beaming problems
My handheld displays the
message “Waiting for sender”
when it’s near my computer’s
infrared port.
I want to synchronize my
computer with more than one
handheld.
■
Your computer’s infrared port may be set to search
automatically for the presence of other infrared devices.
Consult the documentation for your operating system for
information about turning off this option.
■
In some cases, simply moving your handheld away from
the computer’s infrared port solves the problem.
■
If the computer running Palm Desktop software
synchronizes with more than one handheld, each handheld
must have a unique name. Assign a username to your
handheld the first time you perform a HotSync operation.
■
Please be aware that synchronizing more than one
handheld with the same username causes unpredictable
results and, potentially, loss of your personal information.
Beaming problems
Problem
Solution
I cannot beam data to another
device with an IR port.
■
If you are beaming to another Palm handheld, confirm that
your handheld and the other handheld are between ten
centimeters (approximately 4”) and one meter
(approximately 39”) apart, and that the path between the
two handhelds is clear of obstacles. Beaming distance to
other devices with an IR port may be different.
■
Move your handheld closer to the receiving device.
■
Your handheld requires at least twice the amount of
memory available as the data you are receiving. For
example, if you are receiving a 30KB application, you must
have at least 60KB free.
■
Perform a soft reset. See “Performing a soft reset” in
Appendix A for more information.
When someone beams data to
my handheld, I get a message
telling me it is out of memory.
437
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions
Recharging problems
Problem
Solution
When I place my handheld in
the cradle, the indicator light
does not go on.
■
Confirm that your handheld is well seated in the cradle.
■
Confirm that your recharger cable is properly connected to
the back of the cradle’s USB or serial port connector that
plugs into your computer.
■
Confirm that your recharger is plugged into an AC outlet
that has power.
■
If you have not used your handheld for a long period, such
as an extended vacation, the battery may not contain
enough charge to power the indicator light. After your
handheld has recharged, the indicator light will function
normally.
Password problems
Problem
Solution
I forgot the password, and my
handheld is not locked.
First, use the password hint to try and remember the
password. If this does not help, or if you do not have a
password hint, you can use Security to delete the password,
but your handheld deletes all entries marked as private.
However, if you perform a HotSync operation before you delete
the password, the HotSync process backs up all entries,
whether or not they are marked private. Then you can follow
these steps to restore your private entries:
I forgot the password and my
handheld is locked.
438
■
Use the Palm Desktop software and the cradle or infrared
communication to synchronize your data.
■
Tap Forgotten Password in Security to remove the
password and delete all private records.
■
Perform a HotSync operation to synchronize your data and
restore the private records by transferring them from your
computer to your handheld.
First, use the password hint to try and remember the
password. If this does not help, or if you do not have a
password hint, you must perform a hard reset to continue
using your handheld. See “Performing a hard reset” in
Appendix A for more information.
Technical support
Technical support
If, after reviewing the sources listed at the beginning of this appendix, you cannot
solve your problem, contact your regional technical support office by e-mail,
phone, or fax.
Before requesting support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the
problem. When you do contact support, please be ready to provide the following
information:
■
The name and version of the operating system you are using
■
The actual error message or state you are experiencing
■
The steps you take to reproduce the problem
■
The version of handheld software you are using and available memory
■
The wireless service provider’s name
■
The software version of your mobile radio
To find your handheld version and memory information:
1.
Press the Home
.
2.
Press Command Stroke
+ L.
Alternately, press Function
Menu.
+ Menu
, and then select Info on the App
NOTE Thousands of third-party add-on applications have been written for
Palm OS handhelds. Unfortunately, we are not able to support such a large
number of third-party applications. If you are having a problem with a thirdparty application, please contact the developer or publisher of that software.
3.
Tap Version to see version numbers, and tap Size to see the amount of free
memory in kilobytes.
To find your wireless service provider’s name and mobile radio software version:
1.
Press the Home
.
2.
Tap the Preferences icon
3.
Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen.
4.
Select Mobile.
5.
Select Current status.
6.
Scroll down to SV number to view the software version of your mobile radio.
.
439
Appendix B
440
Frequently Asked Questions
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
FCC Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
■
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
■
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
■
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
■
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional
peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC rules.
CAUTION Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the
manufacturer’s Regulatory Engineering Department. Changes or modifications made without written
approval may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the United States with its action
in Report and Order FCC 96-326 adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio
frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are
consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.
The design of this product complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards.
441
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Exposure to radio frequency energy (SAR)
In order to comply with FCC radio frequency (RF) exposure guidelines, users must use a Palm™
brand body-worn accessory during body-worn operation. Use of accessories that are not provided
by Palm or that were not tested for RF exposure compliance with this product may not comply with
the FCC RF exposure safety guidelines and should not be used.
Maximum Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) value
This device has a maximum 0.41 W/kg per 10 grams based on EN50360 and EN50361 standards.
Electrical safety
This apparatus is intended for use when supplied with power from Motorola,
p/n 163-1149 or Phihong, p/n PSA05R-050. Other usage will invalidate any approval given to this
apparatus and may be dangerous.
Aircraft safety
Switch off your cellular telephone when in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft
may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network and is illegal. Failure
to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular telephone services to the
offender, or legal action or both.
Explosive Atmosphere
■
Users are advised not to use the equipment when at a refueling station.
■
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel
depots, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress.
Road Safety
It is advised that a hand-held microphone or telephone handset should not be used by the driver
while the vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. Speak only into a fixed, neck slug or clipped-on
microphone when it would not distract your attention from the road.
Non-Ionizing radiation
As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation
of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body
be allowed to come too close to the antenna during the operation of the equipment.
Agency Compliance Information
Product regulatory and compliance information can be found in the Handbook file located on the
product CD-ROM.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard – Substitution Of Components May Impair Suitability For Class I,
Division 2
WARNING
Explosion Hazard – When In Hazardous Location, Turn Off Power Before Replacing Or Wiring
Modules
WARNING
Explosion Hazard – Do Not Disconnect Equipment Unless Power Has Been Switched Off Or
The Area Is Known To Be Non-Hazardous
442
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Emissionen von Hochfrequenzenergie (SAR)
Damit dieses Gerät die FCC-Bestimmungen zu HF-Emissionen erfüllt, ist die Verwendung einer
Tragetasche der Marke Palm™ während des mobilen Betriebs zwingend erforderlich. Zubehör, das
nicht von Palm vertrieben oder für dieses Produkt nicht auf die Konformität mit den Vorschriften zu
HF-Emissionen getestet wurde, erfüllt möglicherweise nicht die in den FCC-Bestimmungen zur
HF-Emission festgelegten Sicherheitsrichtlinien und sollte daher nicht verwendet werden.
Maximale spezifische Absorptionsrate (SAR)
Das Gerät weist einen maximalen SAR-Wert von 0,41 W/kg pro 10 g gemäß den Standards EN50360
und EN50361 auf.
Elektrische Sicherheit
Dieses Gerät darf nur mit Netzteilen von Motorola (P/N 163-1149) oder Phihong (P/N PSA05R-050)
benutzt werden. Durch die Verwendung anderer Netzgeräte werden die Zulassungen des Geräts
hinfällig. Außerdem können dadurch Schäden oder Verletzungen verursacht werden.
Sicherheit im Flugzeug
Schalten Sie das Handy im Flugzeug aus. Die Benutzung von Handys im Flugzeug ist verboten, da
der Betrieb des Flugzeugs möglicherweise beeinträchtigt wird und Störungen bei
Funkverbindungen verursacht werden. Bei Missachtung dieser Vorschrift können dem Betreffenden
die Benutzung des Handys untersagt sowie weitere rechtliche Schritte eingeleitet werden.
Gefahrenbereiche
■
Das Gerät sollte nicht an Tankstellen verwendet werden.
■
In der Nähe von Kraftstofflagern, chemischen Anlagen oder Bereichen, in denen Sprengarbeiten
durchgeführt werden, sind die Vorschriften zur Benutzung von Hochfrequenzgeräten
strengstens einzuhalten.
Sicherheit im Straßenverkehr
Handmikrofone sowie Telefone ohne Freisprechanlage dürfen während der Fahrt nur im Notfall
verwendet werden. Fest installierte, umzuhängende oder Clip-Mikrofone können benutzt werden,
sofern Ihre Aufmerksamkeit nicht abgelenkt wird.
Nicht ionisierende Strahlung
Wie bei anderen Mobilfunkgeräten sollte sich die Antenne während des Gerätebetriebs nicht zu nahe
am Körper befinden, um eine optimale Leistung zu gewährleisten und gesundheitliche
Beeinträchtigungen so gering wie möglich zu halten.
Informationen zu Betriebsbestimmungen
Informationen zu Betriebsbestimmungen für dieses Produkt finden Sie in der Handbuchdatei auf der
zugehörigen CD-ROM.
443
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Exposition aux radiofréquences (SAR)
Afin de respecter les consignes de la FCC relatives à l'exposition aux radiofréquences (RF), les
utilisateurs doivent disposer d'un accessoire de marque Palm™ pour conserver leur appareil sur eux.
L'utilisation d'accessoires non fournis par Palm ou non testés aux normes d'exposition aux
radiofréquences avec ce produit peut s'avérer non conforme aux consignes de sécurité émises par la
FCC relatives à l'exposition aux radiofréquences et s'avère, à ce titre, à proscrire.
Débit d'absorption spécifique maximal
Le débit maximal de cet appareil est de 0,41 W/kg par 10 g (selon les normes EN50360 et EN50361).
Sécurité électrique
Cet appareil est conçu pour être utilisé avec un bloc d'alimentation Motorola (numéro de référence
163-1149) ou Phihong (numéro de référence PSA05R-050). D'autres configurations annulent toute
homologation attribuée à cet appareil et peuvent s'avérer dangereuses.
Sécurité aérienne
Éteignez votre téléphone portable lorsque vous voyagez en avion. Pour ne pas compromettre la
sécurité aérienne et perturber le réseau de téléphonie mobile, l'utilisation de téléphones portables
dans un avion est illégale. Toute inobservance de ce règlement peut entraîner la suspension ou la
dénégation des services de téléphonie mobile et/ou l'ouverture d'une procédure judiciaire.
Atmosphère explosive
■
Il est recommandé de ne pas se servir de l'équipement dans une station-service.
■
Il est nécessaire d'observer les restrictions concernant l'utilisation de matériel radio dans les
dépôts de carburant, les usines chimiques ou tout autre lieu où des explosifs sont utilisés.
Sécurité routière
Si vous conduisez un véhicule, il est conseillé de ne pas utiliser de micro de poche ni de combiné
téléphonique, sauf en cas d'urgence. Utilisez un micro fixe ou attaché à un vêtement pour vous
permettre de concentrer votre attention sur la route.
Rayonnement non ionisant
Tout comme d'autres appareils de transmission radio mobiles, il est conseillé de ne pas placer
l'antenne trop près du corps lorsque l'appareil fonctionne, et ce pour obtenir des performances
satisfaisantes et assurer la sécurité du personnel.
Informations relatives à la réglementation
Les informations relatives à la réglementation et son respect figurent dans le fichier Manuel_FR situé
sur le CD-ROM du produit.
444
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Exposición a energía de radiofrecuencia (SAR)
En cumplimiento de las normas de exposición a radiofrecuencia (RF) de la FCC, los usuarios deben
usar un accesorio portátil de la marca Palm™ junto con el dispositivo portátil. Los accesorios no
suministrados por Palm o cuyo cumplimiento de las normas de exposición a RF con este producto no
se ha comprobado pueden no ser compatibles con las normas de seguridad de la FCC y no se deben
utilizar.
Valor máximo de SAR (Specific Absorption rate, tasa específica de absorción)
Este dispositivo presenta un máximo de 0,41 W/kg por cada 10 gramos, de acuerdo con las normas
EN50360 y EN50361.
Seguridad eléctrica
Este aparato ha sido diseñado para su uso con una toma de corriente Motorola,
p/n 163-1149 o Phihong, p/n PSA05R-050. El uso de cualquier otro aparato invalidará las
aprobaciones otorgadas y podría resultar peligroso.
Seguridad aérea
Apague el teléfono móvil cuando se encuentre en un avión. El uso de teléfonos móviles durante el
vuelo puede causar interferencias en el funcionamiento de los aparatos del avión y resultar peligroso,
además de causar trastornos en la red de telefonía móvil y ser ilegal. No respetar esta norma puede
provocar que al infractor le sean suspendidos o retirados los servicios de telefonía móvil, que se
emprendan acciones legales contra el mismo, o ambas cosas.
Uso en entornos explosivos
■
Se recomienda a los usuarios que no utilicen el equipo mientras se encuentren engasolineras.
■
Se recuerda a los usuarios que deben respetar las limitaciones impuestas al uso de equiposde
radio cerca de depósitos de combustible, plantas químicas u otros lugares en los que selleven a
cabo operaciones que puedan provocar explosiones.
Seguridad en carretera
No es aconsejable utilizar un micrófono portátil o un aparato telefónico con microteléfono durante la
conducción, excepto en casos de emergencia. Utilice para hablar únicamente un micrófono fijo, con
adaptador para el cuello o sujeto con una pinza, y siempre que ello no distraiga su atención de la
carretera.
Radiación no ionizante
Al igual que para otros equipos de transmisión de radio portátiles, y a fin de asegurar un
funcionamiento correcto del equipo así como la seguridad personal de los usuarios, se recomienda
que la antena no se sitúe demasiado cerca del cuerpo durante el funcionamiento del equipo.
Información referente al cumplimiento de las normas de los organismos
La información reguladora así como la referente al cumplimiento de las normas se encuentra en el
CD-ROM del producto.
445
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Esposizione a energia a radiofrequenza (SAR)
Per lavorare in conformità alle direttive di sicurezza per l'esposizione a energia a radiofrequenza (RF)
definite dall'FCC, gli utenti devono utilizzare un accessorio di protezione Palm™ nel corso delle
operazioni che lo richiedono. L'utilizzo, con questo prodotto, di accessori non forniti da Palm o non
sottoposti a test di conformità alle normative sull'esposizione a energia a radiofrequenza potrebbe
non essere conforme alle direttive di sicurezza FCC in materia ed è pertanto da evitare.
Tasso di assorbimento specifico massimo (SAR)
Il presente dispositivo raggiunge un massimo di 0,41 W/kg per 10 grammi in base agli standard
EN50360 e EN50361.
Sicurezza delle apparecchiature elettriche
Questo dispositivo è progettato per essere alimentato con l'accessorio n. 163-1149 di Motorola o n.
PSA05R-050 di Phihong. Qualsiasi altro genere di utilizzo potrebbe annullare la conformità del
prodotto e potrebbe inoltre renderlo pericoloso.
Sicurezza a bordo di aeromobili
Spegnere il cellulare prima di salire sull'aereo. L'utilizzo di telefoni cellulari in aereo potrebbe essere
pericoloso, compromettere il corretto funzionamento dell'aeromobile, provocare disturbi alla rete
cellulare ed è quindi proibito. L'inosservanza dell'avviso indicato sopra può portare alla sospensione
del servizio telefonico cellulare o all'interdizione del trasgressore all'utilizzo di tale servizio.
L'inosservanza potrà inoltre essere punita a norma di legge.
Atmosfera esplosiva
■
L'uso del dispositivo è sconsigliato vicino a pompe o distributori di carburante.
■
Gli utenti devono rispettare le normative in vigore in merito all'utilizzo di apparecchiature radio
in depositi di carburante, stabilimenti chimici o zone ove sia in corso l'impiego di esplosivi.
Sicurezza sulle strade
Non utilizzare microfoni o telefoni per i quali è necessario l'uso delle mani mentre ci si trova alla
guida di un veicolo, salvo in casi di emergenza. Utilizzare unicamente microfoni con collare o con
clip, sempre che il loro utilizzo non interferisca con la concentrazione richiesta per la guida.
Radiazioni non ionizzanti
Come con altri apparecchi cellulari che trasmettono onde radio, per un funzionamento soddisfacente
e per la sicurezza degli utenti stessi, si raccomanda che nessuna parte del corpo venga avvicinata
eccessivamente all'antenna dell'apparecchio mentre è in funzione.
Informazioni sulla conformità legale
È possibile trovare normative relative al prodotto e informazioni sulla conformità nel file del
manuale contenuto nel CD fornito con il prodotto stesso.
446
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Exposição à energia de radiofreqüência (SAR)
Para estar em conformidade com as diretrizes estabelecidas pela FCC para exposição à
radiofreqüência (RF), os usuários devem usar um acessório de proteção da marca Palm™ durante as
operações de risco para o usuário. O uso de acessórios não fornecidos pela Palm ou que não tenham
sido testados quanto à conformidade com as normas para exposição à RF com este produto poderá
não estar de acordo com as diretrizes de segurança da FCC para exposição à RF e deverá ser evitado.
Valor máximo de SAR (Specific Absorption Rate, taxa de absorção específica)
Este aparelho possui no máximo 0,41 W/kg por 10 gramas com base nos padrões EN50360 e
EN50361.
Segurança elétrica
Este equipamento destina-se ao uso quando fornecido com fonte de alimentação da Motorola,
número da peça 163-1149, ou da Phihong, número da peça PSA05R-050. Outros usos invalidarão
qualquer aprovação concedida para este equipamento e poderão ser perigosos.
Segurança em aeronaves
Desligue o telefone celular em aeronaves. O uso de telefones celulares em aeronaves poderá ser
perigoso para a operação da aeronave, interromper a atividade da rede de telefonia celular e é ilegal.
O não cumprimento dessa instrução poderá resultar na suspensão ou negação dos serviços de
telefonia celular para o usuário, em ação legal ou em ambos.Atmosfera explosiva
■
O uso do equipamento em postos de gasolina não é recomendável.
■
Os usuários devem obedecer às restrições quanto ao uso de equipamento de rádio em depósitos
de combustível, instalações químicas ou em locais onde haja operações com explosivos.
Segurança no trânsito
É recomendável que o motorista não utilize um fone ou microfone de mão ao dirigir o veículo, exceto
em situações de emergÍncia. Fale somente em um microfone fixo ou de lapela evitando desviar sua
atenção do trânsito.
Radiação não ionizante
Como outros equipamentos de transmissão de rádio móvel, para a operação satisfatória do
equipamento e segurança pessoal, é recomendável que os usuários não se aproximem muito da
antena enquanto o equipamento estiver em operação.
Informações sobre a conformidade com órgãos normativos
As informações sobre regulamentação e conformidade do produto estão no arquivo Handbook
localizado no CD-ROM do produto.
447
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Responsible Party:
Palm™ Tungsten™ W Product Family
Palm, Inc.
400 N. McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, California 95035
United States of America
(408) 878-9000
Tested to Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Industry Canada
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
Battery Warning
Do not mutilate, puncture, or dispose of batteries in fire. The batteries can burst or explode, releasing
hazardous chemicals.
Varning
Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Advarsel!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverandøren.
Varoitus
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan
suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
Advarsel
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type
anbefait av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
Waarschuwing!
Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd. Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar
inleveren als KCA.
448
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Uwaga
449
Product Regulatory and Safety Information
Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
Application of Council Directive(s):
89/336/EEC, 99/5/EC, 95/54/EC, EN60950
Standards to which Conformity is Declared:
89/336/EEC EMC directive
99/5/EC RTTE directive
95/54/EC Vehicular directive
EN60950 Safety directive
ICNIRP SAR exposure directive 1998
NAPRD 2.3.0 PTCRB compliance
GCF Field trial compliance
Manufacturers Name:
Palm Inc.
Manufacturers Location:
5470 Great America Pkwy
Santa Clara, CA 95052
USA
Importers Name:
Palm Germany GmbH
Importers Location:
Landsberger Strasse 155
D-80687 Munchen
Germany
Type of Equipment:
Handheld Computer
Model Number:
Palm i710
Year of Manufacture:
2002
I, the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above
conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s)
Place: Santa Clara, CA
Signature: _____________________________
Date: April 20, 2002
Typed Name: David Woo
Title: Global Compliance Manager
450
Index
A
ABA (Address Book archive file) 38
Accented characters, Graffiti 2 writing 32
Access Point Name, changing 306
Account. See E-mail account
Add-on applications
compatibility 6
installing using a Mac 67
installing using Windows 65
removing 69
Address Book
*If Found Call* entry 73
adding custom fields 78
adding e-mail address from 222
adding entry from e-mail 250
archive files (.aba) 38
business card for beaming 36
categorizing records 53
conduit for synchronizing 328
creating records 49
deleting records 51
displaying category 77
displaying data in the Address list 74
finding records 18, 57
fonts 63
menus 76
notes for records 62
opening 71
overview 71
private records 412
sorting records 61
using to address e-mail 222
Addressing e-mail
displaying another address 177, 184,
191, 280
message 221–224
using Smart Addressing 223
Addressing messages 148
Advanced options 305
Advanced preferences 246
Agenda (Date Book view) 97
Alarm
LED setting 414
lists 64
preset 100
setting in Clock 323
setting in Date Book 91
setting in Note Pad 141
sound 100, 205, 324, 414, 426
vibrate setting 414
Alerting for new mail 203
Alphabet
Graffiti 2 writing 29
APN, changing 306
APOP
adding to an account 279, 282, 283
and synchronization 255
requirement 171, 278
Application buttons 11, 41, 71, 87, 352
Applications
Address Book 71
beaming 35–37
Calculator 79
Card Info 83
categories 43–44
Clock 317
Date Book 87
Expense 101
font style 63
installing 65–68
Launcher 41–45
Memo Pad 109
Note Pad 139
opening 41
Palm VersaMail 167
plug-in 401
preferences for 49
removing 69
security 404
sending data from 155
To Do List 161
451
Index
viewing as icons 44
viewing as list 44
See also Add-on applications
Archive files
importing data from 38
for main applications 38
saving deleted records 51
saving purged records 53
Archive messages 153
Attaching a signature to messages 178, 185,
192
Attachments
attaching files from an expansion
card 240
attaching files from applications 238
downloading 249
icon for 208
saving to expansion card 237
selecting plug-ins 266
sending 224
using Documents To Go 265–267
Auto get mail 200
notification options 203
notifications 203
Reminders screen 205
resource issues 208
scheduling 200
VPN connections 172
Automatic fill, in Expense 108
Automatic sending of messages. See Send retry
Auto-off delay 403
Autotext 19
Autotext. See Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
B
Back icon 298
Background sending of messages. See Send
retry
Backing up e-mail databases 289
Backlight 11
adjusting 15
Battery
conserving power 403
doesn’t charge 425
gauge 41
life and use 416
452
recycling 416
warning 448–450
Bcc field 221
See also Blind copies
Beaming
location of IR port 11
problems with 437
See also Infrared
Beep for new mail 203
Blind copies 177, 178, 184, 185, 191, 192, 222,
280
Blinking asterisk 205
Bold font for text 63
Bookmark
adding 299
deleting 302
editing 301
opening a web site 301
overview 299
Brightness
adjusting 15
key location 19
using backlight 15
Broken envelope icon 206, 226
Business card for beaming 36
Buttons
mapping 352
preferences 352
C
CA certificate
description 308
storing 313
Cache memory
clear 306
enable or disable 305
overview 305
reload icon 298
Calculator
buttons explained 79–80
memory 80
overview 79
recent calculations 79, 80
Calibration 17, 359
Call barring 381
password 382
Call history, dialing from 130
Index
Call waiting
answering 121
disabling 393
setting 364
Call Waiting, disabling 341, 393
Calling card, using in phone settings 341,
394
Capital letters
Graffiti 2 writing 30
Capitalizing, CAPS key location 20
CAPS key
function 20
location 20
Card Info 83
Caring for the handheld 415
Categories 151
application 43–44
assigning records to 53–54
beaming 35–36
creating 55
default 43, 53
displaying 54, 77, 431
merging 56
renaming 55
using in Applications Launcher 43, 44
Cc field 222
Certificate
download 313
friendly name 314
storing 313
supported types 313
view information about 299
viewing 315
WAP gateway server 299
Certificate Authority
description 308
sending information 312
Chain calculations 80
Characters, Graffiti 2 27
Check boxes 25
Clearing
reminders 206
Clearing Calculator entries 79
Combining categories 56
Comma delimited files, importing data
from 38
Command
bar in VersaMail 287
buttons 25
toolbar 23
Command stroke key 23, 49
Compressing Day view 99
Conduits
account information screens 262
for modem HotSync operations 342
for synchronizing applications 433
shortcuts 263
for synchronizing applications 328, 418,
419
for synchronizing applications,
Macintosh 329
synchronizing multiple accounts 269
Conference call
creating 121
managing 122
Conflicting events 98
Connecting
service templates 395
to server or ISP 394
Connection
GPRS 353
GSM 356
IR to PC 357
selecting for network 392
Connection Oriented mode 307
Connection types
changing in account 275
GPRS, prerequisite for 170
GPRS, using 171
GSM, prerequisite for 170
GSM, using 171
modem sled, prerequisite for 170
network connection 169
PalmModem accessory, prerequisite
for 170
synchronize-only connection 169
Connectionless mode 307
Continuous events
deleting from Date Book 52
scheduling 93
Contrast control 15
Contrast. See Brightness
Copying
notes into other applications 139
text 51
453
Index
Cradle
connecting to computer 13
for local HotSync operations 330, 337
viewing data from 404
Creating
Address Book entries 72–73
categories 43–44, 55
currency symbols 105
custom fields in Address Book 78
Date Book events 87
Expense items 102
expense reports 107
messages 148
notes for records 62
records 49
signature 155
Currency
default 105
defining 105
for Expense items 104
Current date 431
Current time 41
Custom
currencies and symbols 105
fields in Address Book 78
Cutting text 51
Cycling through views 71, 87
D
Data compression 354
Data entry. See Entering data
Database
backing up 289
upgrading a MultiMail database 168
Date
displaying in Clock 324
Expense item 102
setting 358
setting current 318, 431
setting preference 358
To Do List record due 164
Date Book
adding Address Book data to records 59
Agenda view 97
alarm 91
archive files (.dba) 38
changing event time 91
changing event to untimed 91
454
conduit for synchronizing 328
conflicting events 98
continuous events 93–95
creating records 49, 88–91
Day view 95
deleting records 51
display options 99
end time for Day view 100
fonts 63
menus 98
Month view 96
notes for records 62
opening 87
overview 87
private records 412
purging records 52–53
repeating events 52, 93–95
scheduling events 87–89
selecting dates 89
start time for Day view 100
Sunday or Monday to start week 360
switching views 95
untimed events 88, 90
viewing appointment reminders 205
Week view 95, 360, 432
Day (Date Book view) 88, 99
Day, displaying in Clock 324
DBA (Date Book archive file) 38
Decimal point 360
Default
categories 43, 53
currency in Expense 105
Delete key 20
Deleted data, saving in archive files 51
Deleting
applications 69
Desktop software 69
e-mail 242–245, 279
filters 273
Graffiti 2 characters 29
mail in the trash 245
old messages 244
passwords 405
records 51
service templates 401
text 51
See also Purging records
Index
Desktop software
displaying euro 107
linking to external files 39, 346
removing 69, 70
saving deleted data to an archive file 51
upgrade 6
Dialing phone number 118
Digitizer 17, 359
Disconnecting a modem 285
Divert calls 366
DNS (Domain Naming System) 397
DNS number 429
Documents To Go, converting
attachments 265–267
Double-booked events 98
Download
attachments 208
message size 176, 183, 190
Downloading
messages from phone 150
WAP page 297
Draft messages 154
Drafts
creating 219
saving 224, 228
Dragging
memos into other applications 109
using the stylus 18
E
Editing records 50
E-mail
adding Address Book entry from email 250
adding attachments 238–240
addresses in Address Book 73
addressing 221
alert for new mail 203
attaching files 198
attaching files from an expansion
card 240
attaching files from applications 238
attachments 232–242
auto get notifications 203
backing up databases 289
beeping for new mail 203
buzzing or blinking for new mail 204
color selection 211
composing 224
copying and pasting text 286
creating new messages 220–224
days to synchronize 257
deleting messages on handheld 242–245
deleting messages on server 279
display options 211
downloading large attachments 236–237
drafts 228
emptying trash 245–246
filters for 270–271
folder on server 279
font selection 211
forwarding 229, 230
forwarding attachments 242
getting entire message 198
getting on desktop 252–256
getting subject only 198
header details 288
HTML 210
icons 208, 227
leaving mail on server 175, 183, 189, 278
managing mail settings 274
marking read and unread 247–248
maximum message size 176, 183, 190
message format 210
notification options 203
personal signature 228, 249
preferences 248–249
reading 197
replying to 230–231
saving attachments to expansion
card 237
scheduling auto get mail 200
Secure Sockets Layer
send retry 226
sending 224
signature, adding 178, 185, 192
storing in Outbox 224
trash 245
URLs in messages 232
viewing attachments 232–235
E-mail account
advanced preferences 284
APOP setting 279
auto get mail 200
before setting up 170
changing e-mail address 276
changing mail server settings 277
455
Index
changing protocol type 275
changing username and password 275
checking for new messages 197, 198
color selection 211
corporate 171
creating a synchronize-only
account 179–186
creating new 172–176, 182–184
default mail service 194–196, 275–276
deleting accounts 193–194
display options 211
displaying Inbox 197
editing 192, 193
editing accounts 186–281
font selection 211
incoming and outgoing server 174, 181,
188
managing mail settings 274
notification option 203
outgoing mail server 280
password 174, 181, 187
problems with 196
synchronization options 252–256
synchronizing 252, 267–268
troubleshooting 196
username 174, 181, 187
E-mail provider. See ISP, Network provider,
Wireless carrier
Emergency call 6
Entering data
importing from other applications 38–40
using the computer keyboard 37
using the onscreen keyboard 21
Entries. See Address Book
Envelope icon 208
Error log 252
ESMTP 171, 281
adding to an account 283
Eudora, configuring for e-mail 265
Euro
displaying on desktop computer 107
in Expense 104, 105
in Graffiti 2 writing 33
in onscreen keyboard 21
printing 107
Events. See Date Book
Exclamation marks in To Do List 165
456
Expansion Card
adding hardware 13
applications 42
copying applications 45
described 14
formatting 84
renaming 84
using cards 83
Expense
adding Address Book data to
records 59–60
categorizing records 53
creating records 102
currency 104
date of item 102
defining new currency 105
menus 107
overview 101
receipt details 103
reports 107
type 103, 108
vendor 104
Extended MAPI 254
F
FAQs 430
FCC Statement 441
Filed messages 153
Files
converting attachments 265–267
error log 252
Files, linking to external 39, 346
Filters
creating 270–272
deleting 273
editing 273
examples of 273
turning on and off 272–273
Find key 20
Finding
Find key location 20
information in applications 56–60
phone numbers 59
using the Find application 58
Fixed number dialing
PIN2 387
setting 384
Index
FND
PIN2 setting 387
setting 384
Folders
creating new 219
viewing other 211
Fonts 63, 107
Formats preferences 360
Forwarding e-mail 229
Frequently asked questions (FAQs)
application problems 431
beaming problems 437
HotSync problems 432
Mobile 431
operating problems 425
password problems 438
recharging problems 438
SMS 430
software installation problems 424
tapping and writing problems 426
WAP browser 430
wireless problems 428
Frozen handheld 426
Function key
location 20
using 22
G
Games 414
Gateway
changing 304
changing stack configuration 307
changing to secure site 298
description 304
secure 298
WAP gateway address 299
General preferences 204
alarm LED setting 414
alarm vibrate setting 414
auto-off delay 403
Generate key pairs 309
Getting e-mail
checking for new messages 198
Glossary. See Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
Go menu, Push Inbox 303
GPRS
connection settings 354
creating connections 353
indicator 5
prerequisite for connection 170
quality of service settings 355
setting compression 354
using 171
Graffiti 2
accented characters 32
alphabet 27, 29
basic concepts 27
capital letters 30
how to write characters 28
numbers 31
punctuation marks 31
ShortCuts for entering data 34
symbols 33
tips 29
writing area 28
GSM
creating connections 356
new connection 356
prerequisite for connection 170
using 171
H
Handheld
alarm 205
blinking 204
buzzing 204
vibrating 205
Handheld, increasing space on 14
Hard reset 417, 425
Hardware add-ons 13
Header compression 354
Headset 114
Help, online tips 26
Hiding records 410
HotSync
conduits for synchronizing
applications 328, 418, 419
conduits for synchronizing applications,
Mac 329
customizing 328, 329
first-time operation 330–334, 347–349
IR operation 334–337
linking to external files 39, 346
local operation 326, 330, 433, 434
local operation on Mac 333
modem operation 327, 338–342, 434–435
457
Index
modem settings 339
network operation 343–346
operations using cradle 337, 353
operations using IR port 334–336, 357–
358
problems launching application 433
problems with 432–437
problems with IR 436
restoring data 418–419
setting options 325–327
starting Manager 251
synchronize active accounts 252
synchronizing e-mail 268
using with another PIM 70
I
Icon
alarm 91
application 44
back 298
broken envelope 206, 226
for e-mail messages 208, 227
HotSync Manager 251
note 62
online Tips 26
padlock 299
paperclip 208
reload 298, 306
repeating event 93
stop 298
VersaMail e-mail 208
Idle timeout of ISP or server connection 396
IMAP
adding an account 173, 180, 187
ESMTP synchronization in 255
root mailbox 279
server options 175, 183, 189
synchronize an account 255
wireless folder sychronization 290
IMEI number 372
Importing data 38–40
IMSI number 372
Inbox 151
Reminders screen and 206
synchronizing 257
viewing mail 197
Incoming mail server 174, 181, 187, 188
changing 277
458
Indicator light
described 12
problems 426
setting 414
Infrared
connections 353
HotSync operations 334–336, 357–358
PC connection 357
port 11, 334
problems with IR HotSync
operations 436
requirements for computer 334
Initialization string 358
Installing
applications 65–68
conduit to install applications 328
International characters
Graffiti 2 writing 32
keyboard 20
typing 20
Internet
access problems 428
password 391
selecting connection 392
username 390
IP address 395, 398
IR port.
See also Beaming and Infrared
IR. See Infrared
IrCOMM 334, 353
IrDA (Infrared Data Association) 334
ISP
login script 171
requirements for 170
requiring APOP 279, 282, 283
requiring ESMTP 283
using 171
Items. See To Do List or Expense
K
Key pair
changing password 310
changing signature 310
creating 308
description 308
time to generate 310
Index
Keyboard
computer 37
description 19
key clicking 361
key repeat rate 361
keyboard type 19
keylock 362
onscreen 21
press-and-hold 361
remapping keys 362
setting preferences 361
shortcuts in VersaMail 294
L
Letters
font style 63
Graffiti 2 27, 29
onscreen keyboard 21
List, in Applications Launcher 44
Location
setting primary 318, 320
setting secondary 320
Locking the handheld with a password 402,
407–409
Logging informational errors 252
Login script 171, 399–401
Looking up Address Book data
to add to other records 59
scrolling in Address list 57
Lost
handheld, contact for 73
records 431
Lotus Notes, selecting as mail client 254
Lotus Organizer, importing data from 38
M
Mac computer, system requirements 4
Mail server settings, changing 277
Mail service, default service for e-mail
account 194–196, 275
Mail settings
changing e-mail address 276
changing mail server settings 277
changing protocol type 275
changing username and password 275
managing 274
Mailbox, adding new 172
Maintenance information 415
Marking messages unread/read 247
Maximum message size
incoming e-mail 176, 183, 190
POP and IMAP server 278
Medical emergency call 6
Memo Pad
adding Address Book data to records 59
archive files (.mpa) 38
conduit for synchronizing 328
creating records 49
deleting records 51, 94
dragging memos into other
applications 109
fonts 63
menus 81, 110
opening 109
private records 412
reviewing memos 110
sorting records 61, 431
Memory
for beaming 437
cache 305
Calculator 80
regaining 52, 425
Memos. See Memo Pad
Menu commands 23, 49
accessing 24
key location 20
using 23
Menus 23, 47–49, 158
Address Book 76
choosing 48
command equivalents (Graffiti
writing) 23, 49
command toolbar 23
commands 23
Date Book 98, 324
Edit menu 50–51
Expense 107
key location 20
Memo Pad 81, 110, 143
menu bar 24, 48
menu commands 24
mobile 135
Network Preferences 402
problems 426
SIM Services 146
459
Index
To Do List 166
WAP Browser 315
Messages
archive 153
creating 148
deleted 153
draft 154
filed 153
folders 151
icons 151–153
multi-part 148
outgoing 153
receiving 150
restoring deleted 153
sending 150
signature 155
viewing 151
Microsoft Exchange 5.0 254
Microsoft Outlook
connecting to 433
synchronizing with 254
Microsoft Outlook Express
configuring for e-mail 264
selecting as mail client 254
Mobile
adjusting volume 115
answering call 117
answering call waiting 121
call history dialing 130
cell location 372
conference call 121
dialing 118
IMEI number 372
IMSI number 372
managing phone calls 120
managing profiles 133
managing ring tunes 135
menus 135
opening 116
phone number 372
problems connecting 431
redial 118
redial reminder 120
retrieving voicemail 125
setting network search mode 374
software version number 372
speed dialing 127
tower location 372
460
using headset 114
using redial reminders 131
Mobile carrier 372
Mobile preferences 363
call barring 381
call waiting 364
conceal number 365
current status 371
divert calls 366
fixed number dialing 384
GPRS usage 373
network selection 374
preferred network 375
setting PIN 378
track phone time 370
unlocking SIM card 380
Mobile radio
changing PIN 379
current status 371
description 5
PUK 380
setting PIN 378
statistics 372
turning on and off 364
Mode 307
Modem
auto-disconnect 285
HotSync operations via 338–342, 434–
435
initialization string 358
timeout 285
Modem sled, prerequisite for
connection 170
Monday, to start week 360
Month (Date Book view) 96, 99
MPA (Memo Pad archive file) 38
MultiMediaCard 9
See also Expansion Card
Multi-part messages 148
Multiple addressees 222
N
Navigator 18
accessing international characters 21
description 11
in VersaMail 292
location 10, 11
look up Address Book record 57
Index
scroll 26
scroll in Address Book 73
Netscape 254
Network
connecting 394
HotSync operation 343–346
idle timeout 396
login scripts 399–401
password 391
phone settings 392
preferences 429
primary DNS 397
secondary DNS 397
selecting connection 392
selecting service 390
user name 390
Network connection 169
adding preferred network 376
connection methods 169
GPRS, prerequisite for 170
GPRS, using 171
GSM, prerequisite for 170
GSM, using 171
modem sled, prerequisite for 170
PalmModem accessory, prerequisite
for 170
preferred network settings 375
problems establishing 429
search mode 374
use statistics 373
Note Pad
alarm 141
copying notes into other
applications 139
menus 143
opening 139
overview 139
reviewing notes 140
Notes, attaching to records 62
Notifications. See Auto get mail
Numbers
decimal point and thousands
separator 360
Graffiti 2 writing 31
onscreen keyboard 21
O
Old messages, deleting 242
Onscreen keyboard 21, 51
Opening
Address Book 71
applications 41
Calculator 79
Clock 317
Date Book 87
Memo Pad 109
Note Pad 139
To Do List 161
Organizer (Lotus PIM) 38
Outbox 153, 219
storing e-mail 224
synchronizing 257
Outgoing server, settings 174, 181, 188, 280
Outlook, connecting to 433
Overlapping events 98
Owner preferences 402
P
Padlock icon 299
Palm OS upgrade 3
PalmModem accessory, prerequisite for
connection 170
Paperclip icon 208
Password 174, 181, 187
call barring 382
changing 275, 310, 405
characters used 309
creating key pair 308
deleting 405
description 308
editing in account 186
for network 391
forgotten 410, 438
Pasting
notes into other applications 139
Pasting text 51
Payment, Expense item 104
Peripheral hardware 13
Phone
downloading messages from 150
Lookup 59
settings for ISP or dial-in server 392
461
Index
Phone call
adding note 120
answering 117
answering call waiting 121
call history dialing 130
conference calling 121
managing 120
save to Address Book 120
speed dialing 127
voicemail 125
Phone headset
using 114
using button 114
Phone number
barring 381
conceal 365
dialing 118
redial 118
your mobile 372
Phone numbers
selecting for Address list 74
selecting types 73
Phone profiles, managing 133
Pick lists 25
PIM (personal information manager), using
HotSync Manager with 70
PIN 378
PIN2 387
PKI 308
Plug-ins 266, 401
POP accounts, APOP synchronization in 255
POP3 accounts 175, 183, 189
adding an account 173, 180, 187
Port number 279, 281, 307
Ports
IR on handheld 334
serial 4, 5
USB 4, 5
Power button 11
PPP 395
PRC (application file extension) 66, 401
Preferences
Advanced 246
advanced 284
Buttons 352
choosing 49
Connection 352–358
cradle setting 404
Date and Time 358–359
462
deleting e-mail 248
Digitizer 359
Formats 360
getting mail 248
Keyboard 361–363
mail databases 289
Mobile 363–388
Network 389–402
Owner 402
Power 403
Security 404–412
ShortCuts 412
SMS 156–158
Trash 246
viewing 352
Preferred network
sort priority 376
viewing 375
Primary DNS 397
Prioritizing To Do List records 162, 165
Private records
displaying and creating 410–412, 431
lost with forgotten password 410
Profile
VersaMail 256
Profile, Mobile user 346
Protocol
changing type 275
Public Key
infrastructure 308
viewing 312
PUK 380
Punctuation marks
Graffiti 2 writing 31
Purging
records 52–53
See also Deleting
Push e-mail 206
Push Inbox
description 303
opening 303
Push message 304
R
Radio status 12
Range of times in Day view 100
Read messages, marking 247
Reading e-mail 197–209
Index
Receipts, recording in Expense 103
Receiving messages 150
Recharging the battery 404
Records
beaming 35–36
choosing categories 53
creating 49
Date Book 88
defined 49
deleting 51, 94
displaying a category of 54
editing 50
Expense 102
fonts 63
hiding private 404, 410
lost 431
masking private 404
Memo Pad 109
notes for 62
private 410–412
purging 52–53
sorting 60–61
To Do List 162
unmasking individual 412
Redial reminder
creating 131
managing 132
setting 120
using 131
Reload icon 298, 306
Reminder lists 64
Reminders screen
send retry 226
types of reminders 205
using 206
viewing 205
Removing
applications 69
Desktop software 69
Renaming categories 55
Repeating events
deleting from Date Book 52
scheduling 93
Replying to e-mail 230
Rescheduling events 91
Resetting handheld
hard reset 417, 425
location of reset button 13, 417
soft reset 416
Restoring data
Mac 419
Windows 418
Ring tunes
deleting 135
managing 135
Root certificate 313
S
Safety emergency call 6
Saving
data 42, 49, 51
e-mail databases 289
e-mail messages 244
Scheduled retrieval of e-mail. See Auto get
mail
Scheduling events 87–91
Screen
backlight 11
blank 425
calibrating 17, 359
caring for 415
touching with your finger 12
Scroll bar 26
SD card 9
Searching. See Finding
Secondary DNS 397
Secure gateway, transfer permission 298
Secure mode 307
Secure Sockets Layer
Secure WAP site 298
Security 404–410
changing password 405
creating password or signature 308
deleting password 405
forgotten password 410
private records 410–412
setting a password hint 405
unmasking individual records 412
using 308
Selecting
date for event 89
phone numbers in Address Book 73
text 50, 51
Send
e-mail 224
463
Index
Send retry 225
modifying messages during 227
notifications 226
VPN connections 172
Sending
data from applications 155
messages 150
Serial port 4, 5, 326, 338, 339
Server
deleting messages on 246, 249
sent mail folder 279
Server certificate 313
Service
selecting for network 390
templates 395, 401
Settings. See Preferences
ShortCuts
backing up 328
for entering data 24, 413
key location 20
managing 412–413
menu commands 23, 49
predefined 35
preferences 412
using 24, 34
Signal strength
indicator 298
location 5
weak 428
Signature 178, 185, 192
adding to a message 155
attaching personal 228, 249
changing 310–313
characters used 309
creating key pair 308
Signed public key 312
SIM card
installing 420
removing 421
unlocking 380
verifying installation 420
SIM Services
accessing a service 145
menus 146
SMAPI (Simple MAPI) 254
Smart Addressing
turning on 224
using 223
464
SMS
menus 158
overview 147
preferences 156–158
problems connecting 430
SMTP settings 280
Soft reset 417
Sorting
applications 43
records 60–61, 431
Sound
alarm on handheld 205
Sounds. See Alarm and System sounds
Special characters, typing 20
Speed dial
creating entry 127
dialing 128
editing 129
using 127
Spelling correction, automatic 19
SSL. See Secure Sockets Layer
Stack configuration 299
Starting applications 41
Stop icon 298
Stylus
dragging with 18
tapping with 17
Sunday, to start week 360
Symbol key 20
Symbol
in Graffiti 2 writing 33
Symbol, for currency 104
Synchronize-only
connection 169
creating account 179–186
Synchronizing
an existing username 168
IMAP folders 290
Synchronizing e-mail 267–268
account information screens 262
active accounts 268
e-mail applications for 254
HotSync operation 252
logging errors 252
setting how many days 257
shortcuts 263
synchronizing multiple accounts 269
turn off synchronization 268
Index
System
conduit 328
sounds 414
System requirements 4
T
Tab delimited files, importing data from 38
Tab key 19
Tapping 17
TCP/IP 389
TDA (To Do List archive file) 38
Technical support 423, 439
Test
Index 17
Text
copying 51
copying and pasting in e-mail 286
cutting 51
entry. See Entering data
files, importing data from 38, 39
fonts for 63
selecting all 51
Thousands separator 360
Time
alarm setting 91
format 360
setting current 319, 359
setting event 88
setting preference 358
start and end for Date Book Day
view 100
Time Zone 321
setting 359
Tips, online 26
To Do List
adding Address Book data to records 59
archive files (.tda) 38
categorizing records 53, 165
checking off items 163
completed items 165
completion date 165
conduit for synchronizing 328
creating records 49
deleting records 51, 94
due date 164, 165
fonts 63
menus 166
notes for records 62
opening 161
overview 161
prioritizing records 162, 165
private records 412
purging records 52–53, 165
sorting records 61
viewing reminders 205
To field 222
Today. See Current date
Track phone time 370
Trash 153
automatically emptying 246
creating other folders 219
emptying deleted e-mail 245–246
setting frequency in preferences 246
Troubleshooting 430, 436
Turning off handheld
automatically 403
problems with 426
Turning on handheld
displaying owner’s name 402
power button 11
problems with 425
U
Undoing actions 51
Uninstalling Desktop software 69
Universal connector 13, 353
Unread mail 175, 183, 189, 278
Unread messages, marking 247
Unresponsive handheld 426
Untimed events 88, 90, 91, 92
Upgrading 3
a MultiMail database 168
URLs
in e-mail messages 232
USB
infrared communication 337
Local tab settings 326
port 4, 5
User certificate 313
User profiles, HotSync operation with 348–
349
Username 174, 181, 187
changing 275
editing in account 186
entering 275
for ISP 390
465
Index
identifying handheld 402
synchronizing existing 168
V
vCal 38
vCard 38
Vendor for Expense item 104
VersaMail
application 167–294
icons 208, 227
setting preferences for 248
Vibrate alarm 205, 414
Viewing
archive messages 153
deleted messages 153
draft messages 154
incoming messages 151
messages, overview 151
outgoing messages 153
Voice jack 13
Voicemail, retrieving 125
Volume dialog box 115
Volume, adjusting headset 115
VPN
access e-mail 172
W
WAP Browser
menus 315
problems 430
WAP Identity Module
description 308
protect with password 308
viewing certificate 315
WAP page
bookmark 300
download new 306
downloading 297
WAP site
browsing 297
opening 296
secure sites 298
title bar 297
WAP stack configuration, changing 307
Web address
See URLs
Web sites 430
466
Week (Date Book view) 95–96, 360, 432
WIM
description 308
protect with password 308
viewing certificate 315
Windows, system requirements 4
Wireless features 5
Wireless service provider
access services 145
password 391
username 390
World Clock
alarm 323
alarm preferences 324
display options 324
menus 324
opening 317
Time Zone 321
Writing area 11
Writing. See Entering data
WTLS Conn. Oriented mode 307
WTLS Connectionless mode 307
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement